Home

App Builder CET W/32 User guide

1. The return value can be 1 Operation completed successfully 1 Error in operation Example dim result 500 w32FtpDir call ftp ya com Jjobrodriguez ya com key MATADDROF result addrof return i l results while 1 lt gt print at 1 i result i i i 1 wend Msgbox conclude with return amp str returns w32FtpDel call FTPSite user key ficheroftp addrof return Deletes a file from an FTP location DII is required cetftp dated 12 11 2007 or later The return value can be 1 Operation completed successfully 1 Error in the connection to the ftp site 2 Error processing file w32BLoadAnyImageH call r200 benefits _mac JPG 130 120 addrof Return call w32USBDisable addrof return Prevents the use of removable USB storage devices on the computer The return will be 1 is the operation was successful or O otherwise Requires CETUSB dll file dated 04 12 2005 or later w32USBEnable call addrof return Allows use of USB removable storage devices on the computer The return will be 1 is the operation was successful or O otherwise Requires CETUSB dll file dated 04 12 2005 or later CETGRID DLL With the library version dated 15 08 05 CETGRID added the following functionality 1 Extension of operating the ENTER key on the control grid when working with environment variable B_CREQTAB 1 so that the behavior when pressing that key would be to
2. HHHH Se TS Th fnend select an item REM Obtiene el indice del elemento seleccionado call cGetLBoxSelection lineHDLG 300 MATADDROF linelTEMS Currentltem linelTEMS 2 REM Corta el alfanum rico en sus campos respectivos y activa los controles de edici n call cSetEditText lineHDLG 100 TRIM Lineltems Currentltem 5 16 call cSetEditText lineHDLG 101 TRIM Lineltems Currentltem 17 26 call cSetEditText lineHDLG 102 TRIM Lineltems Currentltem 27 46 call cSetEditText lineHDLG 106 TRIM Lineltems Currentltem 47 52 call cSetEditText lineHDLG 107 TRIM Lineltems Currentltem 53 62 REM Establece el focus al primer control de edici n call cSetFocus lineHDLG 100 REM Activa los botones de Actualizaci n y Cancelaci n call cEnableCtrl lineHDLG 200 1 call cEnableCtrl lineHDLG 201 1 return 7 15VALIDATE Data validation subroutine It has created a simple dialogue to illustrate how data can validate user input Three controls are used text editors to accept three inputs an integer an integer from a specified range and five or fewer alphanumeric characters The field type that can be entered is determined by the first user property defined in the control It uses two command buttons The Cancel button will cancel the dialog and exit the dialog The OK button closes the dialog the user input display defined as GLOBAL a
3. 4 5 8 Changing the message About 4 5 9 Changing the title of a message box w 32 4 5 10 Changing the program icon 4 5 11 Simulating keyboard input with mouse subroutines 4 5 12 Special considerations when using windows 5 1 Introduction 5 2 Use Project Basics 5 3 The program W32APBLD 5 3 1 The Help menu 5 3 2 The View menu 5 3 3 The File menu 5 3 4 Command Arguments W32APBLD 5 4 Create a project 5 5 Adding files to project 5 6 Building and maintaining a project 5 7 Create subprojects 5 8 W32 examples Projects 5 9 Rename Copy or Move existing projects 5 9 1 Rename a project 5 9 2 Move or copy a project 43 43 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 45 Index Chapter 6 6 1 Introduction 6 3 1 The debugger W 32 6 2 Using the Source Code Editor 6 3 Using the debugger W 32 Enable debugger The dialog editor W 32 Chapter 7 7 1 Introduction 7 2 Creating a user interface 7 3 The dialog editor w 32 7 3 1 Moving a control 7 32 Resizing a Control 7 3 3 Copying a Control 7 3 4 Deleting a Control 7 3 5 Selecting multiple controls 7 3 6 Undo and Redo options 7 4 Opening an existing dialog 7 5 Savea dialog 7 6 Utility Dialog templates 7 7 Defining a dialogue or a display forma
4. Ejemplo retorno 0 dim archivos 500 dim fechas 500 dim tamanos 500 call w32FtpFilesInfo ftp ya com Jobrodriguezlya com clave _MATADDROF archivos MATADDR OF fechas MATADDROF tamanos addrof retorno i 1 while archivos 1 lt gt print at 1 1 archivos 1 fechas i tamanos 1 bytes i i 1 wend 182 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Msgbox Concluyo con retorno sstr retorno call w32ImageBackgroundEx5 padre imagen ANCHO ALTO addrof tapiz Sets the background of a FormView or dialogue as image Requires that the file is in the directory CETExt dll work cSetFocus call dlglHDLG 200 w32GetParent call addrof parent w32ImageBackgroundEx5 call fatherS fondo jpg 800 600 addrof Skin w32KillProcess call nombre_del_proceso addrof return Ends the process indicated as the first argument The name to be indicated is shown as image name in the Processes tab of Windows Task Manager For example WINWORD EXE EXCEL EXE or The return value is 1 if it has managed to abort or 0 if the process does not exist Requires Seller CETProcess dll dated 17 06 2007 or later Example call cForceExit w32KillProcess call EXCEL EXE addrof returns If returns 1 Print The process has been aborted else Print The process does not exist IfEnd sleep 2 w32ImageBackgroundExn call father image width height addrof
5. call w32CheckBox padre nele opciones titulo mensaje icono anchotexto selpordefecto addrof seleccion addrof retorno Function that can be invoked from a program in graphical mode or in text mode and with a single line of code creates a dialog box with multiple check box controls The user can choose one or more of the elements that will be passed as arguments to the function in the string options with the delimiter character Also you can specify the dimensions of the section of text that can be included in the dialogue the default selections are punctuated dialogue and icon The function will return the button pressed by the user as well as a string with a sequence of and 0 to indicate the user s selections It runs the following line of code until the input is complete Requires CETExt dll file dated 18 06 2005 or later The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father Return value w32GetParent function if text mode programs specify 0 nele Number of check box controls Maximum allowed 5000 options string with all the options that are displayed separated by the delimiter character Title Title of the window Message Message to be presented to the user Icon numeric value associated with the icon is displayed in the dialog The possible values are 16 shows the critical message icon 32 shows the warning icon question 48 shows the warning icon 64 shows the information messa
6. CETPNG WS_BASE OR SS_NOTIFY OR SS_OWNERDRAWS 0 rutaarchivoPNGS posx posy anchoimagen altoimagen addrof cont rolPNGS Nota Para recibir notificaciones de las pulsaciones del rat n debemos asignar como idcontrol un valor que no est usado por otro bot n comprendido entre 200 y 299 Anexo Rem Estilos de Ventana WS_OVERLAPPEDS 00000000H WS_POPUPS 80000000H WS_CHILD 40000000H WS_CLIPSIBLINGS 04000000H WS_CLIPCHILDRENS 02000000H WS_VISIBLES 10000000 WS_DISAB 0800000 WS_MINI 2000000 0H 0H WS_MAXI WS_CAPTIO WS_BORDE WS_DLGFRAI WS_VSCRO WS_HSCRO WS_SYSME WS_THIC WS_MINI WS_MAXI WS_GROU WS_TABSTO WS_BASE WS_C IZEBOX PS 00 o P Rem Estilos ex 0100000 00C00000 0800000H 0040000 00200000 00100000 00080000 00040000H 00020000H 00010000H 020000H 00010000H HILD 2 tendidos OR WS_VISIBLES WS_EX_TRANSPARENTS 00000020H WS_EX_WINDOWEDGES 00000100H WS_EX_CLIENTEDGES 00000200H WS_EX_LAYEREDS WS_EX_NOPARENT Rem Controles SS_LEFTS 000 SS_CENTE 0 SS_RIGHT S 00 S8_ICONS 000 SS_BLACKRECTS SS_GRAYRECTS SS_WHITERECTS SS_BLACKFRAMES R 2 00080000H NOTIFYS estaticos 00000H 0000001H 000002H 00003H 00000004H 00000005H 00000006H 00000007H 184 00000004H Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 SS_GRAYFRAMES 00000008H SS_WHITEFRAME 00000009H SS_SIMPLE S 0000000BH SS_LEFTNOWORDWRAP 0000000CH SS_NOPREFIX 0
7. Note that the only case where the printer number from 1 to 9 in the name of the variable is associated with the LPT port for that printer so that you can continue using the feature BLMAPPRTn If the variable has the 12 Chapter 1 Installation guide value DEFAULT B_PRINTERn or DIALOG there is no association between the number of printer and LPT port in any Windows environment The variable can also be enabled to make the screen a print dialog that allows the user to select a printer from the list specified in the Print Manager B_PRINTERn DIALOG Since at present still be printing ASCII text there will be some print dialog options as copies and the selection of specific numbers of pages that are disabled To be implemented when there is genuine Windows printing pictures in next releases It will use the system default printer if B_PRINTERn is equal to B_PRINTERx DEFAULT Print is described in detail in the Implementation Notes in the Appendix B_WINPRINT Set the value to 1 1f you want to use the new printer interface described in B_PRINTERn B_WINPRINT If the variable is not set then use the print method type Bat Both methods are described in Notes Implementation B_WINPRINT 1 Variables que afectan a la pantalla B_DFLTBGC Load the value of the default background color use a program that when executed During the initialization process the Framework will verify the value of this variable in W32APBLD w32 file If this variable i
8. Profits blist bcreate bcopy and similar 2 9 4 References Paul DuBois MySQL Segunda Edici n Pearson Education Enero 2003 ISBN 0735712123 Michael Widenius David Axmark MySQL Reference manual O Reilly amp Associates Junio 2002 ISBN 0596002653 Documentos DOC que se pueden descargar de la web MySQL http www mysql com documentation index html 2 9 5 Working with MySQL data base The MySQL module provides BASIC programmers CET two ways to work with the MySQL database Emulation indexed files Native APIs 2 9 6 Files indexed emulation The extension module allows access to tables of MySQL database using standard statements of CET BASIC file accesses 20 Chapter 2 Overview OPEN CLOSE READ READNEXT READPREV WRITE DELETE UNLOCK MAT READ MAT READNEXT MAT READPREV MAT WRITE And end of file EOF 2 9 7 Configuraci n The form of emulation is set by the variable contained in w32appw32 B_MYSQL B_MYSQL lt server gt lt user gt lt palabra of Step gt lt database gt where lt server gt server name or IP address lt user gt the user name to connect to the MySQL server lt palabra of Step gt password that corresponds to the user name above lt database gt database used for the emulation module The emulation module works only with a single database This database must contain a table called _cet_files_ configuration This table contains informati
9. invmain b The source code for the main program dlginv b The source file display format dlginv idh which shows the input screen formats and validates user input calls a dialog box that gets the items of the invoice lines and running all operations of input and output file dlgline b The dialogue source file dlgline idh that gets the items of the invoice lines All these files are automatically installed with your version of CETWIN in the default directory cetlib samples This software is also included in a file called facturas zip within our BBS in the library windows The program INVOICE framework uses the default WINDOWS CET programs so there are no menus or toolbars special There has been a change to the file invmain b cetwin b file copy to add a line that sets the background color to white so you re not seeing a white window on black before the initialization process We could also have used the environment variables of background color and foreground file W32APBLD w32 environment variables 86 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 7 14 1 The main program The main program invmain b declares global variables that have passed between subroutines in a display format calls a function that prints out the title of the display format and calls INV1 which is the main subroutine display format dlginv b stored in the file and exit MAIN GLOBAL mat rec GLOBAL docModified GLOBAL newFlag GLOBAL dataEntered c
10. w32GetWindowSessions ventana addrof numero returns the number of open windows in the system whose title is equal to the expression window This feature is useful for controlling the fact that the same user can open multiple instances of an application module The following example uses the function recursively w32GetWindowSessions to control that only open 5 sessions of a program cAppTitle call My Window w32GetWindowSessions call My Window addrof number print numbers if numbers lt 5 then cWinExec call gws 1 IfEnd wait Example gws b w32LBoxResetContent Erases the contents of a list box control Previously the focus should be placed on the list control whose contents are deleted Use this function to cSetFocus Example lbrc prj w32LBoxDir directories addrof return Fill a list control with a list of directory names and units Previously the focus should be placed on the list control desired Use this function to cSetFocus The parameter directory should contain a string that defines a DOS file specification You can include extended search characters And Directory names appear in the list enclosed in brackets The units are listed on the form x where x is the drive letter The parameter returns returns the entry number starting from 0 the last line that was added to the list Zero on failure Ejemplo lbrc prj w32BloadImage fichero a
11. 7 fn GetFromRec RPAD rec idx 4 RPADS rec idx 1 12 RPADS rec idx 2 10 RPADS rec idx 3 20 RPADS rec idx 4 6 FORMAT val rec idx 5 HHHHH HH FORMAT val rec idx 6 HHHHH fnend REM La funci n que toma una linea de los controles de edici n actualiza la matriz del REM registro y la formatea como una caja de listado tambi n toma un argumento REM el n mero de l nea def fn GetFromEdit num REM Los elementos de la linea comienzan con rec 24 y tienen 7 campos idx 24 num 1 7 REM Copia el contenido del control de edici n a la matriz del registro REM El n mero de l nea campo 1 nunca cambia call cGetEditText lineHDLG 100 ADDROF rec idx 1 95 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 call cGetEditText call cGetEditText lineHDLG 101 ADDROF rec idx 2 lineHDLG 102 ADDROF rec idx 3 call cGetEditText lineHDLG 106 ADDROF rec idx 4 call cGetEditText lineHDLG 107 ADDROF rec idx 5 REM El campo 7 Total es calculado como Qty Cost rec idx 6 STR VAL rec idx 4 VAL rec idx 5 REM Formatea un alfanum rico de la caja de listado con los resultados fn GetFromEdit RPAD rec idx 4 RPADS rec idx 1 12 RPADS rec idx 2 10 RPADS rec idx 3 20 RPADS rec idx 4 6 FORMAT val rec idx 5 HHHHH HH FORMAT val rec idx 6
12. Configurar Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft dBase YFP Driver dbf Driver do Microsoft dBase dbf Microsoft Excel Driver xls Microsoft FoxPro YFP Driver dbf Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Microsoft Visual FoxPro Driver Un Origen de datos de usuario ODBC almacena informaci n de conexi n al proveedor de datos indicado Un Origen de datos de usuario s lo es visible y utilizable en el equipo actual por el usuario indicado Cancelar Ayuda You can then use the READ statement to select the set of rows records you want from the table open file The names of the columns fields of the table will be loaded as fields in a record which can be used to further interrogate the database using READs The judgment READNEXT used to access each row that has been read MATWRITE WRITE statements and can be used to update the data in the table 2 9 MySQL 2 9 1 Introduction This document describes the optional module for MySQL runtimes CET w 32 of BASIC 2 9 2 New features The optional module allows the programmer MySQL CET BASIC access MySQL tables like ISAM files The module exports a set of APIs functions similar to the MySQL C APIs These functions allow programmers to use the full power of the MySQL database in BASIC programs 2 9 3 Non supported features The following w 32 compiler are not yet supported with MySQL The functions ACCESS Phase One FREEDOM
13. Make a sentence main subroutine GOSUB to call routines that create and show the dialog These routines are stored in the file HDI Click Button subroutine processes the button click event Process Event Handling several special events which occur as a result of a change in the value or state of a control Initialization subroutine Sets or changes the initial state list boxes and other controls The code produced by such dialogue dlgcet b is used to explain the individual parts of the program CETDEMO the main program that calls the dialog dlgcet b has also been included in the manual Other programs are also documented examples at the end of this chapter 7 11 1 Program upper part The dialog editor uses the character REM to mark special lines in the source file One of the first lines identifies the publisher and the publisher s version that was used to create this dialogue The sentences REM define current dialog controls and screen display are stored in a file Idh Include Dialog Header that is specified by an include statement By default the file also contains the include code to return the values of interactive controls And GLOBAL statements that define the shared variables At the top of the file will find the following statements dlgCET b REM Dialog dlgCET V2 3 REM first dialog save area REM 1ststart REM The Next button allows you to change the contents of the REM list box The following statements defin
14. Or just add the file w32funcs lib in group Library Files We have developed several features to provide the opportunity to enhance the performance of applications W32 CET w32CreateCaret width Hight addrof retorno Ey App Builder dialo prj a EY Basic Files H E Dialog Files H E RC Files B E Object Files 1w32text obj E Library Files 3 Dependencies E Sub Projects Lets you change the size of the cursor indicating the position of the text in any Windows box The width parameter is the sign of the cursor width in logical units High is the height of the cursor The return value is non zero if the call was successfully executed Ejemplo cc b w32ExitWindows codigo addrof retorno Valid values for code argument are File View Fonts Help TEXTO DE PRUEBA Llamando al programa que cambia cursor TEXTO CON NUEVO CURSOR 0 if you want to restart the session WINDOWS 132 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 1 if you want to turn off the computer 2 if you want to restart your computer 5 if you want to turn off the computer without prompting the user for any open programs 6 if you want to restart your computer without prompting the user for any open programs Return will have a value other than 0 if executed properly The line of code that would shutdown Call w32ExitWindows 1 addrof retorno Ejemplo ew b w32PlaySound fichero addr
15. Skin Where n is a value from to 5 Calling this function group to define the background wallpaper that displays a dialog box or a Form View In all cases the controls will be transparently overlaid on the carpet Requires CETExt dll file dated 09 12 2007 or later and CETPNG dll file dated 19 04 2009 or later The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father reference to the dialog or Form View Value returned by the function w32GetParent Path image file to be displayed as wallpaper It may be of type bmp gif jpg etc W width in pixels of the image Alto high pixels of the image in bmp Skin is the identifier of the resulting image of the tapestry The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init In all dialogues that make up an executable should not be called more than once to the same function in this group Thus to define the three dialogues Skin functions to be used Call w32ImageBackgroundEx1 Call w32ImageBackgroundEx2 Call w32ImageBackgroundEx3 w32InitCETPNG call father Initializes the runtime to dynamically create controls transparent PNG32 images in the application To display the images you must set the background wallpaper or FormView corresponding dialogue through the call to the function group w32ImageBackgroundExn dated 26 04 2009 or later The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father reference to t
16. We suggest that you check the operation of each group of radio buttons with the test command in the Controls menu If the buttons do not behave as you expect 1 Select the Undo undo all radio groups 2 Check the tab order 3 Remake all groups The properties for a radio control button are Property Value Effect Label Text Label The text appears to the right of the button RDIO900 BASIC Variable The variable that can be used in a BASIC program to reference the data after the variable has been defined with GLOBAL ID Control ID 900 The value associated with the control Group ID 1 Group ID The control belong to the first group of radio Initial State off state The button is not checked initially which is the default The initial state of a button can be set as one of its properties or routine Init function using dialogue or cSetCtrl Value cSetCheck To set or change the status of check in implementation need to get the ID of the currently selected button in the group using cGetRadioGroup function and setting the control to unproven 7 8 8 Scrollbars The scroll bar controls vertical and horizontal are typically used to provide the operator a quick and easy way to select a value approximate a predefined range The selected value is determined by the position of the scroll bar which is a relative value based on the minimum and maximum properties Ownership of an initial value can be specified as the starting positi
17. fi char fgets char buf int max int channel READP int int channel char key char buffer readn int int channel char key char buffer readk int int channel char key char buffer void unlock int channel The File Access Library CET consists of at least two separate libraries one library is designed to bind to the C key routines and another for binding with CET BASIC programs You need the Microsoft C compiler to use these functions 34 Chapter 2 Overview 2 10 4 Future versions CET Software has decided to develop additional libraries within each version w 32 CET The libraries will extend the power of Application Development System w 32 using routines to support the needs of the developer of management applications 35 Chapter 3 The W 32 compiler Chapter 3 The W 32 Compiler 3 1 Introduction W 32 The Application Builder is a set of compilers libraries and utilities that aims to develop management applications in 32 bits This chapter explains how the compiler and runtime system can modify its behavior with a set of flags and environment variables Note that all compiler features explained in this chapter can be used from the command line But we recommend that if you are developing under Windows 95 or NT use the integrated development environment to create debug and maintain their applications See other chapters for more detail 3 2 The W 32 components Development System w 32 CET Compi
18. invi HDLG cmdid addrof phone fld patt pmap for i 1 to 4 for j 1 to 6 if match phone fld phone msk j patt phone msk pmap phone map j j 611 4 ifend next j next i if patt lt gt ofmt 510 000 0000 temp ofmt if patth and pmap 5 5 then temp temp 1 5 for i 1 to len patt chr pos asc pmap i i 32 temp chr pos chr pos phone fld i i Lineas de Factura Nro Serie Producto Descripci n QTY Costo Total p Sample Line 2 Sample Line 3 Sample Line 4 Nro Serie Producto Descripci n EE QTY Costo MA Actualizar Cancelar Volver next i phone fld temp ifend return 7 14 3 Dialog source files When the operator selects the Invoice Line Items invoice lines in the display format the program will make a call to the main subroutine invoice lines dialog to modify an existing invoice lines creating lines a new bill The source code for this dialog is stored in the file dlgline b The following source code has been added in several areas reserved The first safe area contains the following global statements that are used to pass information between these subroutines in the display format and dialogue invoice lines These same global variables are declared in the file also dlginv b REMOH Dialog line V2 3 REMO 1ststart 93 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 GLOBAL mat rec GLOBAL newFlag GLOBAL dataEnt
19. 3 gosub status case 202 call cAppWindowMin call cCreateProcess addrof hdle invoices 3 gosub status case 203 call cAppWindowMin call cCreateProcess addrof hdle calc 3 gosub status case 204 call cAppWindowMin call cCreateProcess addrof hdle Asuprint 3 gosub status case 205 call cAppWindowMin call cCreateProcess addrof hdle odbc 3 gosub status case 206 call cAppWindowMin call cCreateProcess addrof hdle progress 3 gosub status cend REM btnend GOSUB w32dlg BTNEND EXIT The Status subroutine is stored in the secure area of the last file in the subroutine w32dlgInit See Chapter w 32 Window Functions for more information on the use of functions and cProcessStat cCreateProcess SUB w32dlgInit REM Local function gosub save area REM usrstart status if hdle 0 msgbox Program not started call cAppWindowNormal ifend stat 998 while stat 998 sleep 25 call cProcessStat hdle addrof stat wend call cAppWindowNormal return REM usrend 99 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 7 17CALC A special buttons proccesing program This program example shows a 5 function calculator Each key on the calculator is a command button For this program we have made some changes in the file dialog At the end of the subroutine is calcBtnClick cSetCtrlValue a call to update the text editor The calculator screen as normal calculators work Added code in the security area calcInit subro
20. BASIC subroutine begins with a statement defining SUB mode subroutine that can be called from another BASIC subroutine or program The syntax is SUB name module Module name is case sensitive and sensitive so TestSub TestSub and TestSub are all different For example SUB mysub SUB WriteRpt BASIC Subroutines are invoked with the BASIC CALL statement 9 6 GLOBAL sentence Data from BASIC subroutines can be shared through one of the following methods 1 Any variables referenced within the same program or file B refers to the same variable In other words all variable names are global to BASIC subroutines that reside within the same program 2 Any variable that is being used in different modules are separate sources unless they are defined by GLOBAL statement This is true even with variable of the same name or you can define local variables with the same name in separate source modules This feature of the manager names lets you write and compile separate BASIC subroutines that bind within an executable without worrying about possible conflicts between variable names When using GLOBAL statement it must be preceded by MAIN in the main module or SUB statement in subroutines otherwise the compiler would give an error of external inconsistencies The statement syntax is GLOBAL variables list The variable list is a list of BASIC variable names that refer to the same variable in all modules The list of variables is
21. BS_USERBUTTON 00000008H BS_AUTORADIOBUTTON 00000009H BS_OWNERDRAW 0000000BH BS_LEFTTEXT S 00000020H BS_MULTILINE 00002000H BS_VCENTER S 00000C00H Rem edit controls Type Edit ES_LEFT 00000000H ES_CENTER 00000001H ES_RIGHT 00000002H ES_MULTILINES 00000004H ES_UPPERCASE 00000008H ES_LOWERCASES 00000010H ES_PASSWORD 00000020H ES_AUTOVSCROLL S 00000040H ES_AUTOHSCROLL 00000080H ES_NOHIDESEL 00000100H ES_OEMCONVERT 00000400H ES_READONLY 00000800H ES_WANTRETURN 00001000H ES_NUMBER 00002000H Scroll Bar Rem Type ScrollBar SBS_HORZ 0000H SBS_VERT 0001H SBS_TOPALIGN 0002H SBS_LEFTALIGNS 0002H SBS_BOTTOMALIGN 0004H SBS_RIGHTALIGN S 0004H SBS_SIZEBOXTOPLEFTALIGN 0002H SBS_SIZEBOXBOTTOMRIGHTALIGN S 0004H SBS_SIZEBOX 0008H Rem List Box Type ListBox 163 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 LBS_NOTIFY 0001H LBS_SORT 0002H LBS_NOREDRAW S 0004H LBS_MULTIPLESEL 0008H LBS_OWNERDRAWFIXED 0010H LBS_HASSTRINGS 0040h LBS_USETABSTOPS 0080 LBS_NOINTEGRALHEIGHT 0100H LBS_MULTICOLUMN 0200H LBS_WANTKEYBOARDINPUTS LBS_EXTENDEDSEL 0800 LBS_DISABLENOSCROLL 1000H LBS_NOSEL S 4000H LBS_STANDARD OR WS_VSCROLL LBS_NOTIFY WS_BORDER OR OR OR WS_HSCROLL LBS_USETABSTOPS O U W LBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLES 0020H A S O U 0400H Rem Combo Box Type ComboBox C
22. Check the index only There is no checking of the data L List the contents of the indexes on screen N Do not try to rebuild the index And Try to rebuild the index if it is imperfect Q It runs in silent messages showing exclusively necessary B Rebuild the index from the data even when the index is well To build an index for data from another source 1 Organize the data in a file with each record separated by a newline character ASCII 10 2 Creates an indexed file with a different name with the desired key No need to add the data 3 Move your data file to the file Dat for indexed file created again with dcheck b isamfichero This will make your data file when building is fully indexed ISAM file H Only print the file structure without check it This option does not require exclusive access to the file X Displays the contents of each record as hexadecimal Or Prints a list of numbers that refer to the registration number to appear with indices This feature can be used with the q option to create a print filter quick If you find an error or if you use the b option removes Dcheck indices and reconstructed from the data The data is never destroyed in the process of reconstruction 12 9BSORT command Bsort classification is a very flexible tool designed to process selected items CET BASIC data files and list them in an orderly sequence It is available for use with all products CET Bsort u
23. Evento Descripcion Propiedad 1 Propiedad 2 Click con el bot n izq del rat n Item fila de la lista Sub item columna Cambio de estado Selecci n o Item fila de la lista 1 Check Box Doble click con el bot n izq del Item fila de la lista Sub item columna rat n Click con el bot n derecho del rat n Item fila de la lista Sub item columna Pulsaci n de una tecla Valor ver 1 w32Skeybd_event_down Click en el t tulo de una columna 1 Columna de la lista The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init In all dialogues that make up an executable should not be called more than once to the same function in this group Thus to define the event processing list controls three functions to be used Call w32ListGetEventsEx1 Call w32ListGetEventsEx2 Call w32ListGetEventsEx3 Este grupo de funciones reemplaza al grupo de funciones w32SetEventsn y w32ListGetEventsn Ejemplo SUB dlglEvent SELECT CET_EVTYPES REM Event notification save area REM evtstart CASE 15 SELECT CMDID CASE 400 Rem 400 es el ID asociado a la lista en la llamada a w32ListGetEventsExl Rem Notificaciones para la lista lis Rem eventos gt Numero de evento Rem 1_item gt Propiedad 1 Rem 1_sub gt Propiedad 2 SELECT evento CASE 1 Rem Click en un campo rem Msgbox Click en el campo amp str l_item amp amp strS 1_sub CASE 2 Rem Cambio de seleccion o bien cambio d
24. Joe Smith dim result 2 while 1 mat readnext 5 result if eof 5 then goto notfound if result 1 Joe Smith write 45 delete goto done ifend 129 Chapter 10 ODBC support wend notfound print Couldn t find Joe Smith done Note that writing an alphanumeric vacuum Although not used but the compiler will generate an error if the WRITE statement is worthless to write 10 5An example program The following program shows how you can choose by Browse source file select the table in columns with which they will work and take the data selected for display Note that B_ODBCERR environment variable can be set to one in W32APBLD w32 file to remove the ODBC error messages that may occur REM Permite hasta 20 nombre de tablas y columnas dim tables 20 2 col 20 3 rslt 20 REM Abre un snapshot en forma de entrada Escoge los ficheros REM fuente en el momento de ejecuci n open 1 ODBCSS input indexed tables REM Obtiene las tablas definidas para este tipo de datos mat read 1 TABLES tables REM Chequea el EOF EOF en las Tablas es un error if eof 1 msgbox No tables defined quit ifend REM Saca por pantalla las tablas en estos ficheros fuente print print Available Tables print for 1 1 to 20 if tables i 1 then BREAK print TAB 8 tables i 1 tables i 2 next i REM Deja que el usuario escoja que tabla desea trabajar print pr
25. S lo se notifica si no se est editando ninguna celda From 9 32m version the runtime system can process CETW32 special event number 15 by which they can detect the notifications generated by the compiler controls added as is the case of the Grid The value of the variable reserved CMDID contain the ID of the control that generated the event So the call to this function w32GridGetEvent well as associated functions and w32GridEventP2 w32GridGetEventP1 must occur within the subroutine Event filtering and event 15 and CMDID value corresponding to the ID that is associated with the grid in the creation by w32CreateGrid Requires CET grid dll file or later date 23 04 2003 Ejemplo SUB gridlEvent SELECT CET_EVTYPE REM Event notification save area REMOS evtstart CASE 15 Rem Eventos Especiales SELECT CMDIDS Rem 400 es el ID del control Grid asignado en w32CreateGrid CASE 400 call w32GridGetEvent grid addrof ev SELECT ev CASE 9 call w32GridGetEventP1 grid addrof p1 call w32GridGetEventP2 grid addrof p2 171 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 call w32GridGetText grid p1 p2 addrof txt texto F9 pulsado etxt e CEND CEND REM evtend CEND SEXIT RE RE The dialog is being initialized RE Set the initial contents and state of the list box s RE and other controls RE SUB gridlInit RE Initialize dialog save area REM inistart dis gridlHDLG
26. call cSetFocus di 200 call w32GetParent addrof padre call w32CreateGrid padre Lineas de la Factura 08541 schr 13 amp Versi n Beta 1 0 400 10 15 625 285 addrof grid call w32GridGetEventP1 grid addrof p1 Returns the first property associated with the last event occurred See w32GridGetEvent Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridGetEventP2 call grid addrof p2 Returns the second property associated with the last event occurred See w32GridGetEvent Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridGetItemCount call grid addrof row Returns the number of rows in the control grid is specified as the first parameter Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridGetRect call grid fil col addrof L addrof high addrof der addrof background Returns coordenas in pixels relative to the position of the grid the rectangle that bounds the cell defined by the row and column as the second and third parameters The return values define respectively the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the upper left corner and lower right corner of the rectangle Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridGetRow call grid addrof row Returns the row number belonging to the currently selected cell in the Grid Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridGetText call grid fil
27. determine the numerical range of advance Example Be associated Up Down control to an edit box with ID 100 in the dialogue dlge2HDLG It is intended to specify a range of 1 to 10 advance The code would be cSetFocus call dlg2HDLG 100 w32CreateUpDown call 1 10 addrof updown w32ListCheckBoxes call lis addrof return Add check boxes to each row of the list lis If you want to set this property to the list should call this function only once after the creation of the list with w32CreateList Nombre Descripci n Modificado Tama o Registros aE AKI FAMILIA ARTICULOS 27 06 2000 19 08 LaPR LINEA ALBARAN PR 28 06 2000 12 12 2KB 7 LPPR LINEA PEDIDO PRO 27 06 2000 19 08 2 KB 29 Y LTIC LINEA TICKETS 28 06 2000 12 19 26KB 794 V MESA MESAS 27 06 2000 18 54 5KB 30 PARA PAR METROS 28 06 2000 12 12 2 KB 9 PART PROVEEDOR ARTI 27 06 2000 19 08 2 KB iw call w32ListGetCheck lis fila addrof sel Check if the checkbox of a particular row of the list is marked lis Sel value will be O 1f not checked and nonzero if it is w32ListSetCheck call lis row status addrof return This function sets the state mark the checkbox of a particular row of the list lis The status value must be 0 to clear the check and to activate call w32GetFont addrof source addrof points addrof inclination addrof bold addrof italics addrof unde
28. fila Rem 1_sub gt Sub item de la lista columna SELECT evento CASE 4 Rem Click con el bot n de derecho en un campo call w32GetWindowRectEx lis addrof izq addrof alto addrof der addrof fondo addrof ret desx izq desy alto Rem Coordenadas relativas a la lista por eso se aplica desplazamiento call w32ListGetRect lis l_item l_sub addrof izq addrof alto addrof der addrof fondo addrof ret donde fondos desy call w32MenuPopup menus 1lis izqs desx donde addrof sel SELECT sel CASE 3 Call w32ListDeleteltem lis l_item addrof ret CEND CEND CEND REM btnend GOSUB dlgl BTNEND SEXIT Ole Rest Don Quijote 6 Og ms OY c Insertar 8 m 9 a c10 yK Eliminar 7 10 gt gt Opcion 1 Orci M s _ DO c1z Rest Don Qui 167 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 call w32SetWindowOrder control control_ref addrof ret Sets the control specified as the first argument will be next on the control tab order is specified as the second argument Should this second parameter is 0 the control will the first in the tab order of the dialog call w32TabStop Window control si_no Determines whether the control specified as the first argument will be able to be accessed by the user by pressing the Tab key If the second argument is 0 the control is no longer part of the list of controls that is crossed with the Tab key call w32TipUp
29. obj Width PageLength Integer Long Returns the length of the page in pixels CALL CALL cetObjectGetProperty obj PageLength ADDROF length MACRO PrinterPageLength obj length PageSizeY Integer Long Returns the page length in millimeters CALL call CALL cetObjectGetProperty obj PageSizeY ADDROF length MACRO call PrinterPageLength obj and PageSizeX Integer width Returns the page width in millimeters CALL call CALL cetObjectGetProperty obj PageSizeX ADDROF w MACRO call PrinterPageLength obj x Position Integer Position Actual relative vertical position virtual page in pixels CALL CALL cetObjectGetProperty obj Position ADDROF position MACRO PrinterPosition obj position AbsPosition Integer Position Actual absolute vertical position in pixels CALL CALL cetObjectGetProperty obj AbsPos ADDROF position MACRO PrinterAbsPosition obj position IsEmpty Full Empty Status line buffer 1 empty 0 not empty CALL CALL cetObjectGetProperty obj Empty ADDROF empty MACRO PrinterlsEmpty obj empty 227 Chapter 14 Implementation Notes WordWrap Integer JP Enables justification ownership level words if 1 No 0 CALL CALL cetObjectSetProperty obj WordWrap JP MACRO Printer WordWrap obj JP Notes 1 The sources are numbered starting from 1 in the order they are created by calling Font T
30. variable name that will contain the value of the number of events produced at each instant ptree ownership of the event The information available for each type of event is as follows Evento Descripci n Propiedad Click con el bot n izq del rat n Referencia al elemento Cambio de estado Selecci n Referencia al elemento Doble click con el bot n izq del rat n Referencia al elemento Click con el bot n derecho del rat n Referencia al elemento Pulsaci n de una tecla Valor ver w32Skeybd_event_down Expansi n de una rama Referencia al elemento The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init 157 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 In all dialogues that make up an executable should not be called more than once to the same function in this group Thus to define the event processing tree controls three functions to be used Call w32TreeGetEvents Call w32TreeGetEvents 2 Call w32TreeGetEvents3 w32DefineRegionn call father button addrof control addrof ix addrof 1 addrof dx addrof d Where n is a value from 1 to 9 Calling this function group allows a user to click with the left mouse button and drag it to draw a rectangle The feature allows you to specify a dummy button ID whose associated section is the code to execute when the user releases the button press left mouse button The last 4 parameters indicate the names of
31. 0 dataEntered 0 clear inves REM Desactiva los controles hasta que el numero de factura haya sido REM introducido gosub WaitForlnvoice The routines called with a GOSUB statement introduced in the last Access Area between REMs and usrend usrstart are clear ctrls REM Limpia todos los controles REM Primero los controles de edici n y luego las cajas combo for ctrl 101 to 122 CALL cSetCtrlValue inviHDLG ctrl next ctrl CALL cSetCtrlValue invi HDLG 701 CALL cSetCtrlValue invi HDLG 700 return 91 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 display ctrls REM Saca por pantalla todos los valores de control del registro ctrl 101 for i 1 to 22 CALL cSetCtrlValue inviHDLG ctrl rec i ctrl ctrl 1 next i REM Da valores al control combo con las claves CALL cSetCtrlValue invi HDLG 700 rec 23 return WaitForlnvoice REM Desactiva todos los controles excepto los de invoice Get Search REM New Cancel y Exit Primero los controles de edici n for ctrl 101 to 122 CALL cEnableCtrl invi HDLG ctrl 0 next ctrl REM Los controles combo CALL cEnableCtrl invi HDLG 700 0 REM El bot n linea elementos fichero CALL cEnableCtrl invi HDLG 201 0 CALL cEnableCtrl invi HDLG 202 0 REM Activa Get search new invoice call cEnableCtrl invi HDLG 206 1 call cEnableCtrl inviHDLG 200 1 call cEnableCtrl inviHDLG 205 1 call cEnab
32. 1 5D the first five characters of ASCII record sorted in descending order 1 5N the first five characters of the record converted to its numerical value 1 5ND the first five characters of the record converted to their numeric value and sorted in descending order Note that there is a special case when ordering an indexed file The registry key is concatenated to the data field before the records are sorted This implies that any specification up from the field indicating a data portion to be displaced by the key length This likewise implies that all options can be made normal on key Selection Specifications Bsort allows you to select the records in the input file based on the contents of the fields Only records will be sorted to fit the specified criteria The specifications of the selection criteria begin with the letter S followed immediately by the numeric field for binary files and the field descriptor as explained in the previous section Operator is used to indicate the relationship must have the data in the field on a constant before being selected Valid operators are EQ equal to NE other than GT greater than GE greater than or equal to LT less than LE less than or equal to 212 Chapter 12 Development Utilities The constants used in the comparison must be quoted so a quote can not be part of the element to compare Under UNIX the quotes have special meaning to the shell and therefore need to
33. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Z Hoy 19 03 2002 It has created a control to select the date allowing the user to specify a null date and then put the focus on el Annex Generic Window Styles Rem WS_OVERLAPPED 00000000H Rem Create an overlay window which normally has a title and a border WS_POPUP 80000000H Rem Create a popup Can not be used with WS_CHILDS WS_CHILD S 40000000H Rem Creates a child window control Can not be used with WS_POPUP WS_VISIBLE S 10000000H Rem Creates a window initially visible WS_DISABLED S 08000000H Rem Creates a window initially disabled WS_MINIMIZES 20000000H Rem Creates a window that is initially disabled To use just by the style WS_OVERLAPPEDS WS_MAXIMIZE S 01000000H Rem Creates a window of maximum size WS_CAPTION S 00C00000H Rem Creates a window that has a title bar implies the style WS_BORDERS Can not be used with WS_DLGFRAME WS_BORDER 00800000H Rem Creates a window that has a border WS_DLGFRAMES 00400000H Rem Creates a window with double border but no title WS_VSCROLL 00200000H Rem Creates a window that has a vertical scroll bar WS_HSCROLL 00100000H Rem Create a window with a horizontal scroll bar 162 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 WS_SYSMENU S 00080000H Rem Creates a window that has a control box in your menu bar titulo Se used only with windows title bar W
34. 16 result num1 value cend disp str result state Clear cmd 0 case key lt 16 100 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 REM a command key num1 value state Result1 disp value cmd key case key 17 REM the Clear Entry key disp case key 18 REM the Clear all key disp 0 state Clear otherwise MsgBox Calc unknown button cend REM Update the display each time a button is pressed call cSetCtrlValue calcHDLG 100 disp REM btnend GOSUB calc BTNEND EXIT The following changes have been made to initially position the cursor at the end of the text editor It shows the initial value 0 right justified as it would in a real calculator The error routine is stored in the last area of security SUB calclnit REM Initialize dialog save area REMO inistart state Clear REM set the focus to the edit control and remove the selection call cSetFocus calcHDLG 100 call cSetCaret calcHDLG 100 1 REM z iniend EXIT REM usrstart calcerr MsgBox Calc Error err str err line str erl quit REM usrend 7 18PROGRESS A dialog example with progress bar The PROGRESS program illustrates how a push of a button you can send to activate a dialogue without any user interaction At that time the dialog displays a progress bar process small black bars which increase in number as a symbol of the passage of time while the process is active or until the user c
35. 3 B_CETINC 3 7 4 B_CETLIB 3 7 5 B_BRTMDIR 3 7 6 Environment Variables related files and input output 3 7 7 B_CSHFCLOSE 3 7 8 B_FPATH 3 7 9 B_LIBFNTYP 3 7 10 B_LKPATH 3 7 11 B_REOPENS 3 7 12 Variables affecting the use and control of printing 3 7 13 B_FFPTR 3 7 14 B_MAPPRTn 3 7 15 B_PRINTERn 3 7 16 B_WINPRINT 3 7 17 Variables affecting the screen 3 7 18 B_DFLTBGC 3 7 19 B_DFLTFGC 3 7 20 B_SCRNOLINES 3 7 21 Variables that provide support THEOS 3 722 B_ lt c digo driver gt DRIVE 3 723 B_DOSTAB 3 7 24 B_EMULATE Chapter5 The W 32 integrated develop environment Index 3 7 25 B_OPTLOCK 3 7 26 B_THLOCK 3 7 27 B_THPON 3 7 28 B_THVAL 3 729 Generic Environment Variables 3 7 30 B_4DYEAR 3 7 31 B_DATEFORM 3 7 32 B_LANGUAGE 3 7 33 B_USER 3 7 34 B_ODBCERR 3 7 35 B_YR2000 Chapter 4 The framework 4 1 Introduction 4 2 The default windows 4 2 1 The file menu 4 2 2 The View menu 4 2 3 The Font menu 4 2 4 The Help menu 4 3 The framework default windows 4 4 Changing the default framework 4 5 Selecting fonts 4 5 1 Delete the Font menu 4 5 2 Choosing the sources within the Windows Administrator 4 5 3 Displaying the default toolbar 4 5 4 Viewing the status bar by default 4 5 5 Changing the default title in the main window 4 5 6 Changing the default menu bar 4 5 7 Adding specific messages for menu items
36. B_SCRNOLINES Load the number of lines to be displayed on screen The default is 25 unless BLEMULATE loaded in this case will be 24 3 7 21 Variables that provide support THEOS The use of the following variables will allow their w 32 programs run as if they were running under the operating system THEOS 3 7 22 B_ lt c digo driver gt DRIVE Turn on to affect the way we interpret the physical drive THEOS driver For example SET B_SDRIVE C TREND The following program can be used to access c trend dms data dms01 lib DMS drive S open1 LIB DATA DMSO01 amp DRIVE direct update Activating these variables change the default behavior is first find the file in the current directory then the path specified in B_FPATH 3 7 23 B_DOSTAB Select to LINPUT USING statements that return a value of 9 for the INP TAB character as low THEOS ago Otherwise the default is to ignore the TAB 3 7 24 B_EMULATE Loading this variable to 1 mimics several features of THEOS automatically activating the emulation related variables such as B_FFPTR B_GINVERT B_OPTLOCK B_THCONV B_THLOCK B_THPON and B_THVAL Enabling emulation attributes THEOS will screen control function as in THEOS THEOS file formats are recognized that INP values are as expected and that the escape character will become 27 Note that division by zero errors will be detected This is an illegal operation in C for good reason if you were a
37. Create a sequential output file D reclen Create an output file directly I reclen keylen Create an output file indexing Operating Notes 1 When the f desdeclave and t hastaclave or c counter is used in the same command line the copy starts at the record specified by desdeclave and ends when the counter value exceeds or when reaches the specified log hastaclave as the condition is reached first 2 When the r replace or m mix are not specified in the command line and the destination file exists the program will ask the user about the action to take Replace Merge Quit Replace Mix Out Press Desired Followed with Enter key Press the desired key followed by Enter 202 oS Chapter 12 Development Utilities 3 When you specify both my r option the m option is ignored 4 When the destination file does not exist and none of the options s d or i are defined the file is created with the same type key lengths and record the source file 5 When using more than two sources to specify the type of source file it will use the last option specified in the command line 6 When you use the m mixed and the key length of the source file or record is different from the destination file use bcopy target file specifications and lengths truncate or expand properly 12 3Bcreate command Bcreate utility can be used to create indexed and direct file or to delete the contents of an existing file If you plan to create files f
38. DOS or character lt linefeed gt under UNIX ASCII files are usually created with the CET BASIC PRINT statement Each record consists of fields adopting a fixed length so that the field start positions remain constant throughout the file Often trailing spaces are added to the fields in this type of record to maintain their position in it Output Files By default dump Bsort seeks records sorted in an existing direct file The output is directed to a sequential file when 1 the existing output file is a sequential file exists or 2 the input file is sequential and not use the limited output option L You can use the output option to change this behavior and to specify the file type to be used In that case the output file can be sequential direct indexed or the same type as the input file Bsort detect an error if there is no output file having used the exit option in the specifications Specifications of the sort key They should put an opening brace These instructions define the type of input field and the fields to sort When Bsort will order a binary file with the first option should be the letter B You can use a space to separate the character of the next option but do not allow a comma For example B 5 Field 5 in a binary format file or direct indexing B 500 a sequential file in binary format with a maximum record length of 500 bytes B 01 03 10 the first ten characters of the string in the third fiel
39. Edit field if cet_evparm1 201 OR cmdid 100 lt gt 1 OR cet_evparm1 0 exit ifend REM Get the edit field and get and parse the control type string REM defined in the first user defined property for the control call cGetCtrlValue ValHDLG CMDID ADDROF val select fn Parse ValPROPS fn Findldx CMDID 1 case INT REM Validate as an integer if val OR NOT NBR val msgbox Please enter an integer goto bad ifend exit case INTRANGE REM Validate as an integer range min max msg Please enter an integer between min and max if val OR NOT NBR val msgbox msg goto bad else if VAL val lt VAL min OR VAL val gt VAL max msgbox msg goto bad ifend ifend exit case STRINGLEN REM Validate as a string of max characters msg Please enter a string of max characters or less if val OR LEN val gt VAL max msgbox msg goto bad ifend exit otherwise exit cend bad REM If an entry is determined to be incorrect focus is set back to REM the field for re entry call cSetFocus ValHDLG CMDID exit 97 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 REM evtend CEND EXIT SUB Vallnit REM Local function gosub save area REM usrstart REM Find the index of the control with ID idx def fn Findldx idx for i 1 to ValCTRLS CNT if ValCTRLS i idx fn Findldx i goto fniend ifend next i msgbox Control STR idx was not found
40. Generic Environment Variables 3 7 30 B_4DYEAR Load this variable to 1 so that the DATE functions and work with 4 digit DATE 3 7 31 B_DATEFORM Charge 2 European or 3 International to change the default date format showing dates in American format MM DD YY The CET BASIC DATEFORM option is used to change the date format in the program 3 7 32 B_LANGUAGE Introduces two 2 characters that specify the language to force the function YESNO generate the appropriate text for the languages French FR German GE Swiss SW Finnish FD Spanish SP Portuguese PO or Italian IT The default is English EN 3 7 33 B_USER Check this variable to 1 2 3 autoexec bat in each single user to specify a network system This feature is most useful when a program needs to create a temporary file in a multiuser environment The following code segment illustrates how to create an indexed file with a unique name for each user The file is stored in the tmp Z driver from the remote server Bgetenv call addrof user b_user nomfich Z TMP WORK amp user CSI DEL amp nomfich CSI CREATE amp nomfich amp INDEX keylen RECLEN 100 10 OPEN 1 nomfich update indexed This will work similarly to a sequential file in this case instead of using the CREATE use OPEN with the option to write the file OUTPUT or EXTEND option to concatenate the file 3 7 34 B_LODBCERR Put the value one to h
41. German GE Swiss SW Finnish FI Spanish SP Portuguese PO or Italian IT The default is English EN B_ODBCERR Put the value one to help you get on screen error messages that may occur when accessing files through ODBC w 32 B_YR2000 Check this variable with the last two digits of the year that will be interpreted as 20XX This feature allows you to have dates of 1900 and 2000 without having to use a four digit notation For example suppose you have no data prior to January 1 1925 In that case it could do B_YR2000 24 This would cause the judgments DAY 01 01 24 and DAY 01 01 2024 were identical Using this example the following dates would be interpreted as 01 01 00 01 01 2000 31 12 24 31 12 2024 01 01 25 01 01 1925 31 12 99 31 12 1999 B_CREQTAB In the dialog box moves to the next control pressing ENTER B_OLDGETENV Allows reading and writing of any environment variables either reserved or entered by the user Rem The variable B_ OLDGETENV 1 must be active Rem in WINDOWS directory W32APBLD w32 call cForceExit Call Bgetenv addrof value B_USER Msgbox Value B_USER amp value 14 Chapter 1 Installation guide Rem Now change the value of b_user Call Bputenv B_USER 2 B_MAXROWS y B_MAXCOLS In programs that do not use graphical dialogs you can change the number of rows and columns respectively through the values assigned to these variables Default text screens CE
42. If you make a call CALL to these functions within your BASIC program the compiler directly include this library provided he makes the following OBW32 o pgmnuevo pgmnuevo b Imyobj 3 5 8 Line numering Ln The line numbering option is used to delete the lines number verification Otherwise it will fail if the line number for BASIC statements are out of order or are invalid 38 Chapter 3 The W 32 compiler 3 5 9 Only compile obj c The c option can use to compile source programs ending after generating an object module If this option is omitted the module intermediate object is deleted when the program link Linke For example the following command will end once pgmnuevo obj generate the file OBW32 c pgmnuevo b The following command will compile the C program bpgm b cpgm cy the BASIC program will end after generating cpgm obj and bpgm obj within the current directory OBW32 c cpgm c bpgm b If you are going to compile programs in C language the compiler invokes OBW32 Microsoft C To use this feature requires version 8 0 or higher 3 5 10 Especify the exe file name o nom_ejecutable The o option can be used to create an executable program with a specific name For example the following command will compile the BASIC program pgmnuevo by pgmnuevo exe produce the executable Pgmnuevo OBW32 or pgmnuevo b If you omit this option the default name will be assigned to the executable will cetwin exe The following compile
43. Obtiene la posici n actual del rat n lo cGetRadioGroup Obtiene el radio bot n seleccionado de un Ll grupo de radiobotones cGetScrollPos Obtiene la posici n actual de una barra de Li Scroll cInputQ Introduce un c digo de tecla dentro la cola Ka de entrada cLBoxAddString A ade un string al final de una caja de UN listado cLBoxDelString Borra un string de caja de listado cLBoxlnsString Inserta un string en una caja de listado cLBoxSetSel Determina el string seleccionado en Limita los caracteres de una caja de listado cLBoxTabStops Establece el n mero de paradas en el movimiento del tabulador cLBoxBoxTopIndex Determina el primer elemento que debe aparecer en la lista cMaxSize Redimensiona la ventana a su tama o m ximo e e PA ee Aceptar Cancelar os NS nueva localizaci n e CMoveDIBWindow Mueve una ventana DIB a una nueva localizaci n cOnWin32s Chequea sobre qu tipo de Windows est rodando cOpenBrowser Muestra una ventana de selecci n de Abrir Archivo COpenDIBWindow Abre una nueva ventana para mostrar un fichero de mapa de bits cPassword Pide clave de acceso en cualquier parte del programa 120 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions cProcessStat_ Chequeaelstatus de un proceso arrancado 9 cSaveBrowser___ Muestra una ventana tipo Salvar como e cSelectFont_____ Cambia al fuente especificado e cSendBinClick Env a un evento de pulsaci n de
44. The Windows Framework described in this chapter 2 4 The W 32 IDE The Application Builder w 32 has a graphical development environment W32APBLD exe that has multiple uses for convenient development of their applications While this program you can create Projects to build test and maintain your application executable Source files using a text editor especially designed for writing for long programs The debugger is also available to expedite the debugging phase User Interfaces GUI that consist of a collection of windows that will give you a much more visual for your application Due to the variety of features it offers has been explained in three separate chapters The Integrated Development Environment w 32 w 32 Debugger and Editor w 32 Dialogues The following screen is an example display format illustrating some of the features that will be explained in the chapter w 32 Dialogues Editor Mantenimiento de Art culos 3 x Familia C digo N CUBIERTOS 2I C digo de Barras 08 Nombre Famila 23 N COMENSAL J Art culo al peso Nombre N CUBIERTOS re ins Imagen gt gt gt 2 Stock 0 0 C Elab 2 Tipo de IYA 2 Factor St 01 00 Tipo Art culo c digo Unidades Descripci n Editar C Compuesto pa 7 Borrar C Materia Prima Producto Terminado Agregar Precios Ptas Euros Proveedor Tarifa 1 0 00 1 00 Fecha ltima Compra Tarifa 2 0 00 2 00 Precio de Co
45. al cuadro de dialogo con la siguiente llamada a Rem rem w32GetParent Call cSetFocus dlglHDLG 200 Rem call Rem call call call call call call call Cali call call call call call call call call Obtener la referencia al dialogo Solo es necesario llamar a esta funcion una vez al inicio del dialogo w32GetParent addrof padres Obtener la referencia a cada control indicando w32GetWindow padre 701 addrof c701 rem w32GetWindow padre 504 addrof c504 rem w32GetWindow padre 101 addrof c101 rem w32GetWindow padre 800 addrof c800 rem w32GetWindow padre 801 addrof c801 rem w32GetWindow padre 900 addrof c900 rem w32GetWindow padre 901 addrof c901 rem w32GetWindow padre 300 addrof c300 rem w32SetCtrlColorl padre c701 255 0 0 1 0 0 w32SetCtrlColor2 padre c504 1 0 0 255 255 w32SetCtrlColor3 padre c101 128 0 0 1 0 0 w32SetCtrlColor4 padre c800 255 0 255 1 0 w32SetCtrlColor5 padre c801 128 0 128 1 0 w32SetCtrlColor6 padre c900 0 0 255 1 0 0 w32SetCtrlColor7 padre c901 0 0 128 1 0 0 w32SetCtrlColor8 padre c300 0 128 0 1 0 0 150 su ID Caja Combo Importe A o Facturas presupuestos Por fecha Por importe List Box 0 0 0 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 REMOS iniend call w32CreateListH padre x y ancho alto addrof lis This function has the same interpretat
46. and uses Layout Align Buttom alignment of buttons to arrange the buttons in a straight line which is flush with the bottom It is important to emphasize the effect of the groups arranged vertically with respect to the horizontal If you select a group of three buttons next to each other in a horizontal row and uses left alignment the editor will use the button that is further to the left as a guide and move the other buttons so that the left edge of the controls be aligned You have three buttons one on top of another Use the command Edit Undo undo and start over again 7 9 2 Centered This group of commands can be used to focus one or more controls horizontally or vertically in the dialogue box Note that a group of multiple controls is considered a single unit and be centered The space between the individual controls will not be affected 7 9 3 Using the Same Size After adding a group of similar controls to make the appearance of the dialog box controls could be improved if they had the same size In this case use the command Layout Make Same Size make the same size to resize the selected group and make it the same size as the control is in the top left If you want the new size is one of the other controls in the group then move this particular control to the top left corner temporarily After making all the controls of the same size re position it in the right place 7 9 4 Tab order Command Tab Layout order sort of
47. as shown taking into account the uppercase and lowercase The name of the file to create or delete can be in any format DOS or THEOS For example CALL Bcreate data nomfi indexed keylen reclen 350 11 CALL Bcreate indexed reclen nomfi datos keylen 350 11 Both commands created data nomfi indexed as a file with a key length of 11 and a record length of 350 The following example illustrates how to use Bcreate to clear the contents of a file Note that the file must be closed before deleting its contents CALL Bcreate cp data nomfi clear 13 2 3 Berase Berase is designed to delete a file without having to execute the judgment CSI with the DOS command DEL In any case the file must be closed before it can be deleted The statement syntax is CALL Berase filename The file name can be formatted DOS or THEOS If the file is indexed both Idx as the Dat will be deleted 13 2 4 Brename Brename function is designed to eliminate the execution of the judgment CSI with the DOS command RENAME In any case the file must be closed before being renamed The statement syntax is CALL Brename fichero_original fichero_nuevo The file name can be formatted DOS or THEOS If the file is indexed both Idx and file Associated dat be renamed at once 13 2 5 Bcopy Bcopy function can be used to copy a file without having to resort to a judgment call CSI DOS COPY command through a CSI The names of the files can be formatted in DOS
48. be preceded by a slash backslash 1 If the data field to compare with the constant is defined as numeric then the constant is converted to digital format for comparison The OR keyword is used to indicate the beginning of a record selection criteria alternative If omitted default AND applies when using multiple selection criteria The following specifications are used to select records by way of example S4 1 1 EQV A MV the first character of the field 4 is an A S6 EQ 1 CA the data in field 6 is equal to CA S9 1 3N LT 100 the value in the first three characters of the field 9 is less than 100 Although the file format may be necessary to indicate that the first records nnn 1 255 in the input file will be ignored This feature is especially important when the header records are used to control the operations of the BASIC program Note that Bsort not read an indexed file in key order so this option should not be used with this type of files The management phase After they are established and verified the sort parameters Bsort reads the input file and select records according to the specifications if specified record selection specifications The records are then loaded into the memory available to your organization If the total number of records takes up more space than available memory creates a temporary file on disk If the option is specified working directory to the working file will be created in tha
49. be specified on the command line For example OBW32 r myuser See chapter Windows Manager for more information on how to use the features of resource files 3 5 14 Track code trace T rastrea sub The T requires OBW32 to include the line number of trace when compiling a program containing the ON ERROR statement For example OBW32 T or miprogrm miprogrm b The t option is also used with the name of a subroutine C In the following example misub c is bound within the BASIC program miprog exe so that is called automatically after each BASIC statement O Tmisub OBW32 miprog b myprog misub C Note that this feature is useful if you are compiling your programs from the command line Under Windows Workgroups The Integrated Development Environment includes its own source code debugger that can be used to simplify the process 39 Chapter 3 The W 32 compiler 3 5 15 Ux basic U This option is used to indicate that all data files used in the program are opened read and written in compatibility mode with UX BASIC When this mode is specified the program files written from BASIC w 32 can later be read by UX BASIC programs and vice versa Using this option is equivalent to entering the judgment OPTION Matio 0 at the beginning of the program and open each file with the option UX 3 5 16 Version number opction V The V option is used to display the version of the compiler and its serial number on the screen e g OBW32 V 3 5 1
50. bot n e cSetCaret Establece la posici n del cursor en un control de edici n o en una caja combo cSetCheck Establece el estado de una caja de comprobaci n o de un radio bot n cSetCtrIText Establece el contenido de un control est tico etiquetas cSetCursor Fija el cursor para la pr xima operaci n de entrada cSetEditText Establece el contenido de un control de edici n introducir en un editor de texto cSetScrollPos Establece la posici n de la barra de Scroll cSetScrollPage Establece la pagina de valores de una barra de scroll cSetShowRange Establece los valores m nimo y m ximo de la barra cSetShowEditWrap Activa o desactiva la inclusi n de caracteres de saltos de l nea en un control de edici n multil nea cShowMainWin Hace visible o invisible la ventana principal de la aplicaci n cShowVersion Visualiza la versi n de todos los componentes del sistema de ejecuci n cSizeAppWindow Establece un tama o determinado en la ventana principal de la aplicaci n cStringInputQ Introduce un cadena dentro del buffer de entrada cToolBar Carga una nueva barra de herramienta de mapa de bits cWaitCursor Visualiza o quita un cursor tipo reloj de arena cWinExec Ejecuta una Aplicaci n Windows 121 Chapter 9 Basic subroutines Chapter 9 BASIC subroutines 9 1 Introduction Development System Win 32 CET application lets you compile a BASIC program that calls external BASIC subrouti
51. box cGetLBoxString hDlg ID INDEX ADDROF STR Get selected text associated with the index value INDEX of list box control specified by ID and return it to the variable STR cLBoxTabStops hDlg ID STOP Sets tab stops every STOP characters cLBoxTopIndex hDlg ID TOP Sets the first visible item list box to TOP rate If you are also using a call to cLBoxSetSel make sure you make a call to cLBoxTopIndex after cLBoxSetSel changes because the higher value of the index 7 10 6 Radio buttons controls cGetCheck hDlg ID ADDROF STATE Gets the state of the control specified by ID and introduces it into the variable STATE If the control is proved the value is 1 otherwise it is 0 cGetRadioGroup hDlg ID ADDROF SEL Returns the ID of the currently selected radio button from the group with the specified ID and enter it into the variable SEL The return value will be zero if no button is not checked This will be possible only when the user has not made any selection and not set the initial state property checked for one of the buttons in the group cSetCheck hDlg ID STATE Sets the state control with the ID value into the variable STATE If STATE equals 1 will initially be tested If the value is 0 then the button can not be proven No other button in the group will be affected by this function The general purpose cSetCtrlValue routine can be used to set the state of a button checked while checki
52. cDIBWindowInfo call hdle addrof x addrof y addrof w addrof h cDIBWindowInfo call handle addrof x addrof y addrof at addrof h where handle refers to the window descriptor DIB information he wants xy returns the position of the upper left column and row of the window a h returns the width and height of the window cDIBWindowTop This routine is used to set the specified window to the beginning DIB of the window stack The CALL statement syntax is cDIBWindowTop call handle Where handle descriptor specifies the DIB window to be displayed as the first window of the stack See cOpenDIB Window function to find out how the windows are used to display DIB graphic files in bitmap format of Microsoft Windows cDisplayInfo This routine is used to obtain the resolution and number of colors in the display The CALL statement syntax is cDisplayInfo call addrof x addrof y addrof colors 106 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions Where xy is the horizontal and vertical resolution eg 640x480 that are using the device colors 1s the number of colors available This value is returned as bits per spot The value 4 indicates that they have 16 colors and 8 there are 256 A value of indicates that the monitor is monochrome Note that the value returned informing the driver s color depends on the particular video adapter being used Report that sometimes we have found that a color monit
53. call ADDROF handle path title x y a h Where handle 1s the descriptor of the DIB window This descriptor should be used to reference the window within other function calls DIB p ej cDIBWindowsTop path 1s the full path name location of the file dib or bmp to show title 1s the string to be displayed as the window title X y are the column and row upper left of the new window a h 111 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions are the width and height of the window If these values are zero the window will be the same size as the bitmap For example REM opens the file 1 tmp foto bmp in a 256x256 window size REM in locating 0 0 screen with the title Graphic Window 1 CALL cOpenDIB Window ADDROF dibwin tmp foto bmp Graphic Window 1 0 0 256 256 The return value as a descriptor of the window must be used to reference this window into the other functions that operate on Windows DIB Note Windows DIB not explicitly closed by the application will be closed on exit They will not open or when you make a LINK CHAIN cPassword This function is useful when you want to protect specific parts of your application The statement syntax is cPassword call addrof pwd cProcessStat This routine can be used to find the status of a process that has been started with a call to cCreateProcess The syntax of this statement is CALL cProcessStat handle ADDROF stat where handle It is
54. campo rem Msgbox Click en el campo amp str l_item amp amp strS l_sub CASE 2 Rem Cambio de seleccion o bien cambio de casilla de verificacion rem Msgbox Ha cambiado el item amp str l_item call w32ListGetSelltem lis addrof item if item lt gt 1 then call w32ListGetText lis item 0 addrof text addrof ret call cSetCtrlValue dlglHDLG 100 text ifend CASE 3 Rem Doble Click en un campo sgbox Doble Click en el campo amp str l_item S amp amp str l_sub CASE 4 Rem Click con el bot n de derecho en un campo sgbox Click con bot n derecho en el campo amp str l_item S amp amp str 1_subs CASE 5 Rem Se ha pulsado la tecla sgbox Tecla amp str l_item CASE 6 Rem Click en la cabecera de la columna sgbox Click en columna amp strS 1_sub call w32ListSortItems lis 1_sub 0 1 addrof ret CEND CEND REM btnend GOSUB dlgl BTNEND SEXIT SUB dlglInit REM Initialize dialog save area REM inistart call w32GetParent addrof padre call w32CreateListH padre 10 195 475 180 addrof lis call w32ListGetEventsl padre 1lis 250 addrof evento addrof l_item addrof 1_sub REM iniend call w32EditENTER indice hand IDboton addrof tecla The call to this function allows the user to validate the information entered in any edit box a dialogue by pressing the ENTER key so that the focus goes to next control This special behavior only a
55. can mix them in order to increase the readability of the variable names In dlgCET which causes the button to close the dialog and is defined as GLOBAL dlgCETENDBTN Prefix b The source file is the dialogue that you can modify in order to process the events that occur in the dialogue clicking a button selecting an item in a list box according to the particular application It is important to note that this file does not contain information about the visual characteristics of the dialogue that is information that serves to represent the dialogue or to establish its mode of operation Therefore you could open the box the HDI and make changes while you open the source file the B in another editor window The only source file lines that belong to a specific dialogue are the names of BASIC subroutines So whenever the prefix name of dialogue dialogue must update the editor using the command File Rewrite HDI and B in order to restore the balance between the two files dialogue For general information about using BASIC subroutines see Subroutines BASIC chapter of this manual The source file of the dialogue is organized into the following parts Includes top file extension Idh using the editor with a include statement If ownership of the dialogue not make the controlling variables GLOBAL Global variables do not BASIC controls then the variables you want to use BASIC and global must be defined here before the include
56. change the menu Help About and display information from your application 1 Go to the section in the file menu cetuser rc and note that the menu POPUP amp Help displayed MENUITEM amp About Development System w 32 appl Change the text so that it appears the name of your application 2 The section contains the dialog caption or title for the window and the text lines are displayed in the dialog box called IDD_ABOUTBOX DIALOG The lines can be modified are CAPTION About Apli W 32 Development System LTEXT STBN w 32 Applied Development Version 8 5 n nCopyright 251 CET Software Inc from 1986 to 1995 N All rights reserved When you edit this text should be careful Characters that do not fit in the window will be truncated Note also how the line feed character n is used to position the text in the dialog box 1 251 is a special character that can be used to display the symbol of property rights copyright 4 5 9 Changing the title of a message box w 32 W 32 programs automatically display some system information in a message box as it appears when you exit the program By default the title of the box is the name of the program The title can be changed to make it more meaningful to the user in section STRINGTABLE String Table file cetuser rc Default lines are PRELOAD STRINGTABLE DISCARDABLE BEGIN AFX_IDS_APP_TITLE END The null character can be changed to the name of your application If you do take ca
57. col addrof text Returns the contents of the cell in the grid defined by the row and column as the second and third parameters Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridInsertColumn call grid position Inserts an empty column at the specified position as the second parameter 172 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridInsertItem call grid position Inserts an empty row at the specified position as the second parameter Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridIsHilighted call grid addrof si_no Returns a zero if it is enabled to shade the entire row when you select a cell belonging to it See also the documentation of the function w32ShowHilight Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridProtectCell call grid fil col protect Protect or unprotect the cell of the grid defined by the row and column specified depending on whether the value of the last parameter is 0 or 1 When a cell is protected not allowing you to change the content and this is signaled by a special background color Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetAllowColResize call grid resize Allows or does not allow the user resizes the columns depending on whether the final parameter value is 0 or 1 By default if the user is allowed to change the column width Requires CET grid
58. composed of a simple scalar variable name and or names of matrices tables preceded by the MAT keyword If you are going to define several variables to be shared they can be specified in different lines GLOBAL or all in one line with commas separating variable names For example a GLOBAL typical sentence would be GLOBAL GVAR MAT MYARRAY ANYSTG 1 MAT XSTG Note that a table should be sized by either DIM or COMMON statements before moving to a BASIC subroutine For example consider the main program and the subroutine following three variables in this shared GLOBAL Values and Table CNT ARRAY are allocated in the main routine and are passed to the subroutine SumArray which will add the number of elements CNT 10 elements in this case and returns the result in AnSWR These variables are exactly the same in both programs and occupy the same addresses REM REM MAIN B filed under Main Program REM MAIN GLOBAL CNT ARRAY MAT AnSWR DIM ARRAY 10 FOR 1 1 TO 10 ARRAY 1 1 NEXT CNT 10 CALL SumArray PRINT The answer is AnSWR END REM REM Subroutine SUM B file with the file REM SUB SumArray GLOBAL CNT ARRAY MAT AnSWR AnSWR 0 FOR I 1 TO CNT AnSWR AnSWR ARRAY 1 NEXT EXIT 123 Chapter 9 Basic subroutines To summarize the most important thing to remember when using variables within programs that call BASIC subroutines are e Each variable is
59. de listado para el control combo GOSUB select an item SUB lineInit Added code to this subroutine to initialize the list box with the existing lines The Update and Cancel buttons are disabled when there are no lines REM Saca por pantalla las l neas en la caja de listado Existen 50 l neas con REM 7 campos que comienzan en rec 24 for item 1 to 50 Lineltems item fn GetFromRec item next item call cAddLBoxContents lineHDLG 300 MATADDROF Lineltems REM La primera vez en el di logo para una nueva factura el primer elemento se REM selecciona autom ticamente Los siguiente elementos deber n ser seleccionados REM manualmente if newFlag lt gt 0 and dataEntered 0 CALL cLBoxSetSel lineHDLG 300 1 CALL cLBoxTopIndex lineHDLG 300 1 gosub select an item else REM Desactiva los botones de Actualizaci n y Cancelaci n call cEnableCtrl lineHDLG 200 0 call cEnableCtrl lineHDLG 201 0 ifend The following code is inserted between REMs and usrend usrstart end of file REM El formato del alfanum rico de la caja de listado es el n mero de elemento el n mero REM de serie el producto descripci n cantidad costo y total Esta funci n toma un REM elemento de la matriz del registro y lo formatea como un alfanum rico de la caja de REM listado toma un argumento el n mero de l nea def fn GetFromRec num REM Los elementos de linea comienzan en rec 24 y tiene 7 campos idx 24 num 1
60. displaying the item Exit Exit on the menu The following example defines a menu with three main types popup menus File Find Customer and Add Customer This menu is the default menu and using the identifier IDR_ MAINFRAME Note that ID_APP_EXIT is a special identifier for the option to exit the program MENU PRELOAD IDR_MAINFRAME DISCARDABLE BEGIN POPUP amp File BEGIN MENUITEM SEPARATOR MENUITEM E amp xit ID_APP_EXIT END POPUP Find Customer BEGIN MENUITEM On amp name ID_WINSUB1 MENUITEM On amp phone ID_WINSUB2 49 Chapter 4 The framework END POPUP amp Add Customer BEGIN MENUITEM amp New ID_WINSUB3 END END Note that the w 32 gives full control in response to an event your Windows program as if it were a menu selection For example you may at one time disabling a calling option cEnableltem so that it can not be selected The text appears in gray instead of black CEnableltem Another call to be executed to allow selection During the execution of a program there may also be times when you want to display a different menu altogether This can be done with a function call cNewmenu Please refer to the next chapter for more information on these special functions menu 4 5 7 Adding specific messages for menu items A special feature in the resource file allows you to add a short message to describe the purpose of any of the menu items These messages appear in the status bar when the item is hig
61. dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later call w32GridSetBkColor grid r v y Sets the background color of the cells in the grid 1 value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are 0 255 Requires CETgrid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetCellBkColor call grid fil col r v y Sets the background color of the cell in the control grid defined by the row and column specified as the second and third parameters r value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are 0 255 Requires CETgrid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetColMaxChars call grid column max_char The last parameter sets the maximum number of characters allowed the user to enter in the cells corresponding to the column of the grid that is specified as the second parameter In any case never be allowed to enter more than 150 characters in a cell Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetColsNumbered call grid auto_numerar Autoenumera or columns depending on whether the value of the last parameter of the grid is 1 or 0 The default behavior is that the columns are not autoenumeren so that you can specify the title of each column by w32GridSetText function indicating t
62. enable or 0 to disable For example REM Enable radio button menu item associated REM ID_WINSUB4 CALL cCheckltem 4 1 cChoiceList This routine displays a search dialog in a list and allows the user to select an item and press the OK button or double click on an item The items are sorted automatically before displaying the window Use the cChoiceListNS whether to display an unordered list Although the list can have up to 15000 elements in practice the limit is on a 2000 depending on the speed of your computer The CALL statement syntax is cChoiceList call title mataddrof elements addrof selection Where title specifies the string to be displayed as the window title elements is the string table to be displayed in the list of options Note that the function displays a list of items as many as the maximum size of the table sized chains or until it is an element of the empty table selection chain is selected from the list of options A null string is returned if the operator selects Cancel For example to enter a number of elements and create a list box INPUT j Y DIM element j FOR i 1 TOj element 1 line STR 1 NEXT I title STR List Items CALL cChoiceList title MATADDROF element ADDROF selection PRINT You selected selection CLEAR element cChoiceListNS This routine operates similarly to cChoiceList and displays a list box with dis
63. example OBW32 or main principal b subl b sub2 b It is also possible to compile each module separately and link them together as OBW32 c subl b OBW32 c sub2 b OBW32 or main principal b sub obj sub2 obj When working with the integrated development environment to develop your application automatically compile W32APBLD being unnecessary to recall the grammar of this command By default always use the c flag in all BASIC source programs 9 3 BASIC subroutines BASIC subroutine statements differ from conventional CET BASIC statements on two things Each statement begins with a dollar sign e With the exception of EXIT and CLEAR judgments are not enforceable Instead report the compiler to treat the module and the sentences that constitute a particular way The sentences are MAIN Indicates this module is the main routine SUB Indicates this module is a subroutine GLOBAL Provides a list of variables that are global to all subroutines Clear clears all variables and dimensioned tables inside the subroutine except those defined with GLOBAL EXIT Exits a BASIC subroutine 9 4 MAIN sentence The MAIN must be the first statement in the main module The syntax is MAIN Since only one module the main module that use the MAIN judgment of all modules that form the application The main module is the segment of the program under which the program starts 122 Chapter 9 Basic subroutines 9 5 SUB sentence
64. fnerrs fetch_row_and_lengths mysql errno lt gt 0 then goto free 0 if mysqlrow 0 then goto free 0 print for field 0 to fieldss 1 call cetmysgql fetch_field_value mysqlrow lengths field addrof PrRRrRRReE H O O 3004 U A aO Oo O S a a a Noa OOOO A GO GOOO OOGOGOGOLG OGOOGO GOOG e if fnerrs fetch_row_value mysql errno lt gt 0 then goto free print FieldName field yy Le waluese TJT next field PLREPRPREREPPRSPPRERERPRRRRN RRAPRRRO0 O 00 wait 1 goto fetch 120 1210 free 122 1230 call cetmysgl free_result mysqlres 124 call cetmysql stat mysql addrof stat addrof errno if fnerrs stat mysql errno lt gt 0 then goto close print print Estadisticas print stats 1250 close 1260 1270 call cetmysgql close mysql 1280 quit 2 9 13 Installing and configuring the MySQL server 2 9 13 1 Installing the MySQL Server MySQL binaries for different operating systems are available on the web page of MySQL www mysql com We recommend downloading the version 4 0 which is also recommended by MySQL for new development itself During the development of this module was used version 4 0 10 gamma There is a need for emulation InnoDB ISAM files so select the server configuration that includes InnoDB 27 Chapter 2 Overview Please follow the instructions on the Web page to download and install the server The server can be installed in any di
65. focus on the relevant cell of the grid instead of passing the focus to the next control on the form or dialog 2 Advanced Edition of the cells in the grid when you press the spacebar 3 Correction of errors in the corresponding cell positioning by pressing ENTER Call w32GridSetColumnAlign grid column alignment Align all cells in the grid column you specify The third argument values may be 0 Align Left 1 Alignment centered 2 Right alignment Requires Seller CETGRID DLL dated 8 15 05 or later w32IsEnabled call control addrof enabled Determines whether a control is enabled or not The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Control Control identifier It must be the value returned by the function w32GetWindow 191 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Enabled Returns 1 if the control is enabled w32IsVisible call control addrof visible Determines whether a control is visible or not The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Control Control identifier It must be the value returned by the function w32GetWindow Visible Returns 1 if the control is visible w32FolderSpace call rutacarpteta addrof size addrof ret Returns the total size of all files in a folder and all subfolders Requires CETExt dll file dated 18 06 2005 or later Example call w32GetFolderSpace C cetbin addrof size addrof ret w32ListView call father nele options title
66. for each of its major programs The compiler will allow you to easily work w 32 this way After making any changes to those that appear in this chapter use OBW32 to recompile resource files For example Create OBW32 r miusua miusua res Create OBW32 t miven miven obj Tell the OBW32 command which is used for the compilation of their programs how to use Framework lik ndolo into the executable You must use the wo to replace the default file cetwin obj by choice Use the wr to replace the default file cetwin res by eg OBW32 0 tst tst b Use cetwin res and cetwin obj OBW32 0 tst wr miusua tst b Use miusua res and cetwin obj OBW32 wo o tst miven tst b Use cetwin res and miven obj OBW32 tst wo o wr miven miusua tst b Use miusua res and miven obj 46 Chapter 4 The framework In the following sections we will discuss how to delete the default fonts menu and select the desired source We will also see the use of toolbars and menu bars changed at your convenience without having to change the source programs 4 5 Selecting fonts This section shows how to use the routine cSelectFont to choose the source from within your application rather than choose from the font menu The selectable sources vary depending on the ANSI fixed sources you have your system Therefore it is possible to document all parameters necessary to select different fonts W 32 must use fixed width fonts since the program must be able to determine where and how to
67. for example if a check box must be checked pass 1 and if not 0 Other controls can be set as follows Control Type Value The contents of an edition alphanumeric The state checkboxes either 1 checked or 0 not verified Radio buttons status either 1 checked or 0 not verified Scroll Bars The numerical value of the current position of a String Combo box default selection cSetFocus hDlg ID Sets input focus to the control with the specified ID cShowCtrl hDlg ID STATE Shows or hides the control with the specified ID value If STATE is 1 the control will appear The control will be hidden and off is zero if STATE 7 11 Dialog source files Dialogues Editor generates the necessary code to display the controls according to how their properties are defined the code detects events as the click of button and returns the values of interactive controls Two files are created automatically when you save a dialogue or a display format These are Function File Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 prefix idh The file header contains all the code that represents and dialogue processes Not modify the file Idh otherwise the editor will be unable to load the dialog By default each interactive control is defined as global within this file The names of the global variables are created by concatenating the prefix of dialogue with the BASIC variable name The sentences are not sensitive to case sensitive so you
68. format This operation is usually done when you press a button that has enabled the property to dialogue See the code that handles the button press Exit case 204 INVOICE example program which is documented at the end of the chapter cFormBtnClick VAL Send an event defined by the user as the click of a button to the currently active form For example you can have a menu item that invokes a new format If the user selects an item this function can be called from handler ID_WINSUB cetwin b is inside which is the default to tell the active format to save and exit with CMDID VAL made BtnClick within the subroutine If there is no active form the call is ignored cGetCtrIText hDlg ID ADDROF TEXT Gets the value of a static text Text areas are the contents of static text controls the title of a control group and tag command buttons check boxes and radio buttons An empty String is returned for any other control cGetCtrlValue hDlg ID ADDROF STR Find content and introduces interactive controls on STR This routine returns all values as alphanumeric The command buttons text and controls group always return an empty String The return values for other controls are Returns Control Type Edit control content The check boxes selected state is well 1 checked or 0 not verified Radio buttons selected status is good 1 checked or 0 not verified Scroll Bars The numerical value of the position as a Strin
69. in bitmap format of Microsoft Windows cNewMenu This routine is used to display a new menu The syntax is cNewMenu call menu Where menu is an integer from 1 to 50 that specifies the menu ID For example the ID value is 2 for IDR_MENU2 50 for IDR_MENUSO and 1 for the default menu IDR_MAINFRAME For example REM Load a new menu associated with IDR_MENUS CALL cNewMenu 5 REM returns to the initial menu associated with IDR_ MAINFRAME CALL cNewMenu 1 When you start your application the initial menu displayed is the one associated with the identifier IDR_MAINFRAME If you require multiple menus you can define them in the Rc using predefined identifiers to IDR_MENUS50 IDR_MENU2 go cNewMenu be called to load a new menu at any time during program execution To return to the initial menu make another call by menu 1 See chapter Framework Windows for details about the use of menus in a Windows application cOnWin32s COnWin32s routine can be used to determine whether the current system is rolling under Win32s Windows 3 1 or Windows for Workgroups The syntax is cOnWin32s call ADDROF flag Where flag has a value of one if you are shooting under Windows or Windows for Workgroups or zero if it is rolling under Windows NT or 95 cOpenBrowser 110 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions This routine can be used to display a dialog box browser open file and return the program to the selection made by the use
70. includes the following steps Analyze the ISAM file with the utility bsqlconv Dividing the ISAM file or in two or more files if necessary or Create tables in the database emulator and records within the table _cet_files_ Export data file or a file isam utility running extended texts blist or Import data from a text file to a MySQL table 29 Chapter 2 Overview 2 9 15 1 Tools 2 9 15 1 1 bsqlconv utility The utility has been specially written bsqlconv to assist in the transfer of data isam gt mysql The command line is bsqlconv f from_key t to_key c counter lt file_name gt file_name Specifies the name of the file in a DOS or THEOS format For example either of the following names may be used to list cp data custname Acpidatalcustname or cp data custname cp data custname f from_key Scans from check desdeclave to hastaclave key indexed file or the registration number in a direct file By default starts from the beginning t to_key reaching analyzes the file hastaclave without including it By default reaches the end of file c counter Specifies the number of records to be analyzed v shows oftware version The utility reads a file records indexed within a predetermined range of keys and analyzes the structure of each record The main reason the utility is to detect inconsistencies in the format of the records Only files with the same format in different registers can be transparently convert
71. int or keylen Table or char 100 Or Key char 100 Record or char 255 Define both the name and the type of the field as primary index 2 9 14 1 Example configuration script The sample script w32init sql MySQL configuration supplied with the module The script creates a database called w32 and an empty table _cet_files_ table within this database The script does not create a new user it is not necessary for the example configuration You can use the root user to check the file access emulation However for the actual work we recommend that you create a specific user for CET BASIC applications and allow this user to access only emulator database The main reason for this is that the user name and the password file on your w32app w32 The easiest way to create a user is running the utility MYCC To run the script start the utility mysql as root mysql host lt host gt user root password lt password gt and run w32init sql sript mysql gt source w32init sql Query OK 0 rows affected 0 01 sec Query OK 1 row affected 0 00 sec Database changed Query OK 0 rows affected 0 00 sec Query OK 0 rows affected 0 00 sec Note that the script will destroy the database w32 if any Please be careful when you run the script if you already have some files imported from the database 2 9 15 Moving ISAM data files to MySQL tables The method of transferring data from a file into a table isam MySQL
72. message icon anchotexto flags selec_unica selpordefecto addrof selection addrof return Function that can be invoked from a program in graphical mode or in text mode and that with a single line of code to create a visual list of format options Grid lines check boxes The user can choose one or more of the elements that will be passed as arguments to the function in the string options with the delimiter character Also you can specify the dimensions of the section of text that can be included in the dialogue the default selections are punctuated dialogue and icon The function will return the button pressed by the user as well as a string with a sequence of 1 and 0 to indicate the user s selections It runs the following line of code until the input is complete Requires CETExt dll file dated 18 06 2005 or later The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father Return value w32GetParent function if text mode programs specify 0 nele Number of elements contained in the list of options Maximum allowed 5000 options string with all the options that are displayed in the list separated by the delimiter character Title Title of the window Message Message to be presented to the user Icon numeric value associated with the icon is displayed in the dialog The possible values are 16 shows the critical message icon 32 shows the warning icon question 48 shows the warning icon 64 shows th
73. n cEnumPrinters Obtiene informaci n de las impresoras disponibles cFontValues Devuelve los valores de un fuente font seleccionado cForceExit Sale del programa sin un cuadro de mensaje tipo Aceptar cGetCursor Obtiene las posiciones actuales de columna y fila del cursor 117 cMessageBoxOkC cMoveAppWindow cMoveDIB Window cNewMenu cOnWin32s cOpenBrowser COpenDIB Window cProcessStat cSaveBrowser cSelectFont cSetCursor cShowMainWin cShowStatusBar cShowToolBar cShowVersion cSizeApp Window cStatusText cStringInputQ cToolBar cWaitCursor cWinExec Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions Visualiza un cuadro de mensaje con Aceptar Cancelar Desplaza la ventana de aplicaci n a una nueva localizaci n Mueve una ventana DIB a una nueva localizaci n Muestra un men nuevo Chequea sobre qu tipo de Windows est rodando Muestra una ventana de selecci n de Abrir Archivo Abre una nueva ventana para mostrar un fichero de mapa de bits Chequea el status de un proceso arrancado Muestra una Ventana tipo Salvar como Cambia al fuente especificado Fija el cursor para la pr xima operaci n de entrada Hace visible o invisible la ventana principal de la aplicaci n Esconde o muestra la barra de estado Esconde o muestra la barra de herramientas Visualiza la versi n de todos los componentes del sistema de ejecuci n Establece un tama o determinado en la ventana principal de la aplicaci n M
74. of the list lis Item Index of the item in the list Column Index of the column which defines the field belonging to the item item whose text you want to set The resu value is nonzero if the call has been executed successfully w32ListGetText call lis item column addrof text addrof ret Retrieves the value of the text text for a given sub item of the list lis Item Index of the item in the list Column Index of the column which defines the field belonging to the item item whose text you want to retrieve Ret value returns the retrieved string length w32ListGetSelltem call lis addrof item Retrieves the index of the list element lis selected by the user On error 1 is returned call w32ListSetSelltem lis item addrof ret Sets the item item lis list as the selected item of the same Ret value is nonzero if the call was successfully executed C digo Descripci n 3102 CALAMARES 3103 CALAMARITOS 3104 JIBIA 3105 PULPO FRITO ES 3201 VIEIRAS GRATINADA 141 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 call w32ListGetItemCount lis addrof cuantos Retrieves the number of items in the list lis w32ListFindItem call lis key addrof where Retrieves the index of the list item lis the value of the field sub item O is equal to key The value 1 is returned if the search is not successful w32ListSetColor call lis r v y Se
75. on a control and thus improves performance call w32CreateWindowH father ID type style estiloex title x y width height addrof control 161 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 This feature allows you to create controls at runtime WINDOWS various types The meaning of the parameters is as follows Father referring to the dialog must be the value returned by w32GetParent ID number to be used to identify the control to be created It s the same identify using standard controls W32 CET Type is a string that identifies the type of control to create Some examples Edit Button SysDateTimePick32 See appendix to this function Style determine the style that will be in control Usually contains 1 or more constants specified below to which is applied the OR operator EstiloEx determines the extended style that will be in control Usually contains 1 or more constants specified below to which is applied the OR operator Title is the initial value of text to display the control if applicable Control reference to the control that has been created Ejemplo call w32CreateWindowH padre 106 SysDateTimePick32 WS_BASE OR WS_TABSTOP OR WS_GROUP OR DTS_SHOWNONES WS_EX_CLIENTEDGES 470 60 300 30 addrof r106 call cSetFocus dlglHDLG 106 g 24 09 2001 y septiembre de 2001 lun mar mi jue vie s b dom 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
76. or Jpg using cetJPEG function while running an application w 32 This feature allows you to view photos logos and other graphics in a window within the same program 2 8 ODBC support The easy connection to open databases in English ODBC Open Database Connectivity is a standard created by Microsoft that provides transparent access from your applications to a large number of database systems and file managers ODBC drivers available for MS Windows include file system administrators eg dBase Btrieve Database administrators eg FoxPro Paradox and MS Access and SQL servers like SQL Watcom SQL and Gupta It is possible to give full support to all relational databases through ODBC drivers existing MS SQL Server Oracle Informix Sybase and others To use ODBC in a program you must have DOBC driver installed correctly on your system and data source configured according to the documentation for the driver So w 32 program allows the user to specify a data source or open source directly via the OPEN statement 19 Chapter 2 Overview Administrador de or genes de datos ODBC A Controladores DSN de usuario Trazas 21 xi Agrupaci n de conexiones Acerca de DSN de sistema DSN de archivo Origenes de datos de usuario dBASE Files dBase Files Word DBASEJOB Excel Files FoxPro Files Word MS Access Database Visual FoxPro Database Visual FoxPro Tables Nombre Controlador Agregar Quitar
77. or THEOS format If the target file does not exist it is created with the same specifications as the source file The CALL statement syntax is 216 Chapter 13 Routines performed in C CALL bcopy Fichero_fuente Fichero_destino Note that this function does not have all the features offered by the command of the same name see the previous chapter 13 2 6 Bfilestat This function is used to determine the existence of a file or directory The syntax is CALL Bfilestat filename ADDROF state The parameters are defined as filename The file name must be in DOS or THEOS If the file is indexed the extension Idx or DAT should be specified eg data test idx It s been a string returns a directory D R to a file or null if the filename does not exist Note that Bfilestat function has been available in the past as filestatus The latter function is also supported but only recognizes DOS file format 13 2 7 Bgetcwd y Bchdir Bgetcwd function is used to get the current working directory CWD Bchdir is used to change the CWD current working directory It is important to note that this change is permanent The statement syntax is CALL Bgetcwd ADDROF cwd CALL Bchdir cwd 13 2 8 Bindinfo This function can be used to obtain information about open files indexed The syntax is CALL Bindinfo channel addrof counter addrot reg addrof key where channel Is an integer variable or constant that rep
78. parameters and left determine the coordinates relative to the dialog box in the left corner where the menu is displayed The return value is the identifier ID of the menu item that the user selected w32MenuDestroy call menu addrof ret Destroy all references to menu and all its submenus is specified as a parameter This feature is intended to free up memory 166 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Ejemplo de funciones de men s contextuales SUB dlglInit REM Initialize dialog save area REM inistart call w32CreateMenu addrof submenu call w32MenuInsertItem submenu 6 0 Opcidn 1 addrof ret call w32MenulInsertItem submenu 7 0 Opcidn 2 addrof ret call w32CreateMenu addrof menu call w32MenuInsertItem menu 1 0 Insertar addrof ret call w32MenuInsertItem menu 2 2 addrof ret call w32MenuInsertItem menu 3 0 Eliminar addrof ret call w32MenuInsertItem menus submenu 1 Mas addrof ret Rem ancho 13 alto 13 call w32MenuItemBitmap menu 3 eliminar bmp addrof ret call w32MenuItemBitmap menu 6 insertar bmp addrof ret call w32ListGetEvents2 padre lis 250 addrof evento addrof l_item addrof 1l_sub REM iniend SEXIT SSUB dlglBtnClick REM Button Click save area REM btnstart SELECT CMDID CASE 250 Rem Notificaciones para la lista lis Rem evento gt Numero de evento Rem 1_item gt item de la lista
79. pgmnuevo b as cetwin exe OBW32 pgmnuevo b 3 5 11 Preprocessor and preprocessor only P y PO If the Microsoft C Compiler is within a directory pointed to by the PATH environment variable all C preprocessor commands can be included such as define macro substitution and conditional compilation with if The processor C can be invoked with the P If you specify the PO only run the pre and the result is stored in a file with the same name as the source file with the extension I This feature also allows variables that can be defined and assigned within the command line as follows OBW32 P DABC Ddef xyz pgmnuevo b This command is equivalent to entering the following lines at the beginning of your source file pgmnuevo b define abc define def xyz The C preprocessor is a special feature that is addressed separately in the Language Reference Manual CET BASIC 3 5 12 Report Rpaso The report option is available for debugging purposes when you need to know the exact command line used in each step OBW32 The letters following are the options to display the different steps of OB W32 RB compilaci n BASIC RC compilaci n C RA Ensamblador RL enlace 3 5 13 Resource r nombre The resource option is used to compile a resource file with the specific name nombre rc modified within a file with the same name and extension Res Since only the r option is used to compile resource files the extension is assumed Rc and should not
80. print method type Bat Both methods are described in Notes Implementation B_WINPRINT 1 3 7 17 Variables affecting the screen 3 7 18 B_DFLTBGC Load the value of the default background color use a program that when executed 42 Chapter 3 The W 32 compiler During the initialization process the Framework will verify the value of this variable in W32APBLD w32 file If this variable is not loaded 1 see a black background before any color you use your program If you use a background color in your program we recommend loading this variable with the same color this will prevent discoloration often undesirable If you do not use color in your program the gray will give a totally Windows This can be done by setting the variables of foreground and background to black and white ie the values 0 and 7 respectively To display a gray background SET B_DFLTBGC 7 For more details on using color see COLOR statement in Chapter Features Color and Line Drawing Manual CET BASIC Language Reference 3 7 19 B_DFLTFGC Load the value of the foreground color for the same reason as discussed in the previous paragraph we recommend loading this variable with the same value you use in your application program For example the following variable will cause the foreground color is black B_DFLTFGC SET 0 For more details on using color see COLOR statement in Chapter Features Color and Line Drawing Manual CET BASIC Language Reference 3 7 20
81. printed is passed as a parameter to the file Bat 1 will be replaced by the filename After modifying the file cetprnt1 bat check printing process any text file as config sys entering CETPRNT1 Y CONFIG SYS The last step you must take is to generate a file Bat for each printer that has 14 9 2 Printing text in Windows printers not compatible with MS Dos There are some printers are not compatible with MS DOS to solve this has created a tool that converts plain text into text graphic w32prt exe To make this program functional must have the following variables The Area of CET established as follows e Variables in w32app w32 B_WINPRINT 0 B_PRINTERORIENT H Orientation V H VIRTUAL B_PRINTFSIZE 10 Font Size And there must be w32prt exe w32prtl exe CETPRNT1 BAT CETBIN directory 14 9 3 GRAPHICS PRINTING WITH WINDOWS SOURCES 14 9 3 1 CBEPrint dll class file classes e Printer The Printer class provides simplified access to the Windows print spooler 95 NT 14 9 3 2 Class Printer Buffer line and word level justification The print object remains in the line buffer all text sent by Text or calls TextAt The line buffer is printed when a call to NewLine or when it reaches 1 n in the input text Tf the length of the text to be printed is greater than the width of the page the print object may discard the rest of the line or continue it in the beginning of the next line In the latter case the justification is per
82. property The user defined properties displayed by clicking the right mouse button A dialog box called dlgCET example is stored in the default directory cetlib samples Because this dialog uses very different controls is used in one of the next sections to illustrate the different features that are available To see the dialog run CETDEMO or use the menu command Test Controls after loading the file into the editor dlgcet idh 7 8 1 Check Box The check boxes are typically used to allow the user to select from a group of options either all some or none can see the status of the box for display The check box control can have two states checked and unchecked which is the default When the program is run the user can select a check box by clicking anywhere within the control in the box or in the title Once elected the state of the control varies If it was not chosen will be and vice versa The active test box being used appear with a dotted line around the title The control is being used which has been more recently with the TAB key or has been stuck with the mouse This feature will be explained in the Source File Dialog The check box controls were used in the dialogue shown here dlgCET b Di logo de Ejemplo x TF Opci n 1 7 Opci n 2 To add a check box click the control menu and you will see a box with an arrow pointing to the upper left corner This is a special cursor called drop that can be moved to any positi
83. selected item shows the properties dialog editor All controls have the following properties in common Property Value Effect Initial String data Initial Alphanumeric The data that appears by default when the dialog is drawn on the screen If not specified the default the control is initially empty Max Chars number characters max Limit of characters that can be entered BASIC Variable EDIT102 alphanumeric variable that can be used in a BASIC program to reference the data after the variable has been defined with GLOBAL Control ID 102 ID value associated with the control In addition to the properties standard of interactive controls that was explained in the beginning of this section you can define a maximum number of characters that can be entered into an edit control When the default value 0 is used the maximum number is determined by the width of the control If the property 70 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 hscroll Auto is active then you can enter an unlimited number of characters There is probably a number but this is very high An edit control can be either single or multiple lines The default line is simple Within dlgCET b has created a line edit control simple so that the operator can enter a file name See the box shown in the previous section The following properties are enabled only for single line controls Property Value Effect Auto hscroll on input automatically produce a horizontal s
84. sequence that follows the focus can be used to change the order in which the Tab key to move between make controls when the dialog box is displayed By default the tab order is the order in which the controls have been progressively added Because the first two of a new dialog controls are always OK and Cancel buttons these will come first in the tab order To change the order select the Layout Tab order menu By default each interactive control screen will appear with a small window in the upper left corner Number appears in each window that indicates the position in the sequence control of the focus To change the sequence click on each window starting with the control you want to take the first place in the sequence of focus If you want to leave control in the same order you must click on the window until I get the proper position If you get confused just go out and start again Exit To enter any keyboard character Press the ESC key to exit this mode If you want to include text and group controls in the tab order set the menu command before selecting the command Layout Tab Although a text control or group can not be passed with the Tab this feature allows you to use these controls to establish a mnemonic shortcut for interactive control that has no label associated with it Simply give the text control mnemonic value make precede the character within the text with a amspersand and the focus will move to the next edit control in
85. software w 32 of CET 1 2 Requeriments The Application Development System w 32 CET is available both as Development System RunTime Development the platform is recommended for Windows 9x 2000 XP or NT running on a 486 or higher with at least 168 MB of RAM It takes about 32 MB free hard drive space For RunTime system we recommend Windows 9x 2000 XP or NT running on a PC 386 or higher with at least 8 MB of RAM 1 3 Distribution software All is avaliable at http www omegasystems com and http www cet software com 1 4 Installation of Application Builder CET W 32 To install the Application Development System w 32 CET enter the basic Cet CD in the CD ROM open the folder cet932u Installer and run Setup exe The setup program will ask the directory to use for storing executable w 32 CET We recommend that you accept the default directory that is shown c cetbin CET Executable Directory Gg x The CET W32 Application Builder Development System will be installed into the following directory If you would like to install it into a different directory drive use the browse list below Destination Directory C CETBIN E 932 932m G alex Archivos de programa E asd b416r E bin Ec xl cee The SETUP program also provides a directory that will be used to store components w 32 Seller CET We recommend using the default directory c cetlib CET Library Directory xj The CE
86. subprojects Typically w 32 programs consisting of a set of individual programs are called via CHAIN RUN Although the projects are created to give a single executable called programs can be added as subprojects to facilitate application maintenance For example suppose that the program does a CHAIN mainprog exe to subprog exe Then you should follow the procedure below to add it as a subproject 1 Create a project to mainprog exe 2 Create a project to subprog exe Highlight Create Empty Project if the program will use the same menu and toolbar icon etc mainprog exe In this case add the compiled resource files the Obj and Res that should be in your project directory called mainprog bld Otherwise the project would need to have its own copy of the resource files cetwin by cetuser rc 3 Reopen the project you created for mainprog mainprog prj Use the Add Files add files and selecting the file subprog prj in dialog The menu Build has a special command Build Subproyects When used W32APBLD will show a message that you are checking dependencies If the file dates are subsequent to the executable the subproject will be rebuilt If the executable is later date the program will continue checking another subproject if any Selecting the command Build Rebuild All Sub Proyects all subprojects will be rebuilt regardless they are current In this case no user interaction is required 58 Chapter 5 The W 32 integrate
87. tables and to import the data However both scripts use the same file name and table example Open the script file with any text editor and replace all example for example1 for example in the file and example1 sql example2 dentro example2 sql file You can also replace the field names by others more meaningful For example if the first field is used to record the customer s name replace Fld1 for CustomerName etc Be careful while editing files do not change as applicable a single quote double and inverse 2 9 19 Exporting indexed ISAM data files to text files The utility expanded blist is used to export data from indexed files to text files isam The new option e in the command line utility Blist makes creating a file with a format to be imported into the MySQL database with the LOAD DATA statement Remember that you need to create two files using the key Record1 as cutoff 32 Chapter 2 Overview blist exampl t Recordl gt examplel txt blist exampl f Recordl gt example2 txt 2 9 20 Creating MySQL tables and data imports First you must move the text files of the exported data to the computer where the MySQL server You should put the files in the location used by the LOAD statement within files Sql Bsqlconv Default utility uses the C tmp but you can change it to whatever you suits more to your setup Start the utility mysql as root and put w32 as the default database If all parameters are
88. text editor and create a simple program called tst b that contains the following line print hello world 3 4 Compiling a program with W 32 OBW32 Compilation Manager is a program that calls the compiler multipurpose default BB 16 links linka program with the required libraries and creates an executable Windows 32 bit Exe There is a flag available to invoke the 32 bit compiler to use under Windows 95 or NT OBW32 operates similarly to the DC the C language compiler UNIX This is the syntax supported and maintains compatibility between products CET BASIC for Windows DOS and UNIX 36 Chapter 3 The W 32 compiler OBW32 syntax shown below Note that brackets indicate that an item is optional The names of program source files and or modules are objects to indicate italics are variable and must be entered by the operator Names can be in any order and in case sensitive Windows does not distinguish file names are case sensitive OBW32 flags pgm B pgm C PGMs A PGMs O PGMs Flags is any valid combination of options or flags used to control the operations of the compiler Enter OBW32 no parameters and show the supported options and their role on the screen The following example will use the 32 bit compiler to create an executable file named pgmnuevo and with the default extension Exe Note that the executable program name is followed immediately by the o option Pgmnuevo Obw32 or pgmnuevo b pam Is the name of the executab
89. the directories above The server creates these directories should User Control yourself Open the command line window and start the MySQL server for the first time mysqld max console The server creates the space for InnoDB data and draw some message while doing this InnoDB The first specified datafile c ibdata ibdata1 did not exist InnoDB A new database has been created 011024 10 58 25 InnoDB Started Open the second command line window and use the utility mysqladmin to shut down the server mysqladmin user root shutdown Install the server as a Windows service and start it mysqld max install net start mysql 2 9 14 Configuration File Access emulator 28 You should then set up users and database Although everything can be done with the mysqladmin utility is easier to use the Control Center to do so Please refer to the MySQL documentation and MYCC for details You should create Chapter 2 Overview Anew database for use by the emulator Call it what you want This name will be referenced in the variable B_MYSQL A new user with guaranteed access to the emulator database The user name and the password must be referenced in the variable B_MYSQL Anew table _cet_files_ in the newly created database The table may be of any type The type MyISAM is recommending This table must contain the following columns Or Name char 255 Or Type char 1 unsigned int or reclen unsigned
90. the file menu has only one command Exit Selecting out during the normal execution of a program equivalent to a keypress interrupt ALT F4 Unless an ON ERROR routine or ON INTERRUPT available to intercept the interrupt a message box appears showing Interrupted Program Program interrupted Otherwise when you leave it will display the message Exit Application Application Output In both cases you need to press OK to continue The message boxes are commonly used in Windows and will be covered in detail in the next chapter It is important to note that these special message boxes have been added because the typical Windows programs close the windows before leaving not allowing you to see the latest things that have been written on the screen See cForceExit role in the next chapter if you want to remove this behavior 4 2 2 The View menu The View menu has two commands Toolbar Toolbar and Status Bar State Bar The toolbars show a series of buttons that are quick ways to access the menu commands These buttons appear just below the menu By default there are two buttons one for the command Font Select Select Source and one for Help About Help About To design your own buttons and keys to abbreviations of your own command menu function CToolBar see in the next chapter The status bar is an area at the bottom of the screen which is used to display status messages how are the hints menu commands or toolbar The toolbar to
91. the installation the program will ask you how to adjust your autoexec bat to ensure your w 32 CET function properly During compilation the Application Development System w 32 CET depends on the contents of the environment variables PATH LIB and INCLUDE to determine where the components of the system In these variables must enter specific directories during the installation process For example if you used the recommended directories by default update your autoexec bat adding c cetbin defining the existing PATH and LIB and INCLUDE variables INCLUDE directory should be loaded as drive lt PATH lib gt INC where lt PATH lib gt is the same as the LIB directory SET PATH C CETBIN SET LIB C CETLIB SET INCLUDE C CETLIB INC If you have a copy of DOS product in this system make sure that it is the directory containing the files of MASM DOS used by the product rather than the cetbin in the list of directories in the PATH variable Otherwise the assembly will fail when you run your program See section Environment Variables Compilation and Execution in Chapter w 32 Compiler for more information on how to load other variables necessary to run your application For versions of Windows based on NT technology the environment variables are modified in the System window Advanced and clicking the button Environment Variables all from the Control Panel Path variable is amended by adding the directory in which you install
92. the mouse 7 A control input has lost focus because the user selected another control The next ID receive the focus control is passed through CET_EVPARM1 This ID value will be zero if the following control is not part of the dialogue The user could have triggered another application by clicking its window If you are validating input fields you should always ensure that the following control is a Cancel button before notifying the user of an invalid entry 8 It has made a selection of Combo box with a simple mouse click 9 The list of a combo box is displayed This event is useful when you want the user to enter a value or enter it in the list down or find an existing one In that case you can check the value entered by the user according to this value alter the elements of the dropdown combo box Because when any changes occur in an edit control generates an event number at a time you can add code to check and format the data at that time In that case the global variable contains the value CMDID ID of the edit control In our example the following function gets the current value of the multiline edit control within dlgCET by returns to the variable dlgCETFILENAME cGetEditText call dlgCETHDLG 101 ADDROF dlgCETFILENAME This feature allows you to validate the contents of a control character by character without waiting for the user to select another control For example suppose you create a dialog with an edit control
93. the perimeter In the status bar status displays information about the selected control Your ID number which will be explained later position top and left coordinates and size height and width 7 3 1 Moving a control To move a control first position the cursor inside the selected area When the cursor changes to a four way arrow you can move the control to a new location in one of the following ways 1 Clicking the left mouse button and dragging the control A dotted rectangle appears to help you move or relocate 2 Using the arrow keys to move the selected control in a specific direction This is the recommended method to control more precisely the position of the controls When you re done deselect the control clicked on an empty area in the window 7 3 2 Resizing a Control To resize a control select it and move the cursor over one of the resizing buttons When a two way arrow click and drag to resize You can also resize a control by pressing CTRL and an arrow key In any case tap outside the control to complete the operation The command Grid Layout Size mesh size is used to change the increment to be used when a control is resized with the arrow keys The default size is 5 pixels The resize a control with the mouse is always limited to 5 pixels regardless of the selected scale of the time While moving or resizing controls by dragging with a mouse or using an arrow key the size and position of the controls wil
94. the return parameter will contain the current value thereof Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridGetEvent call grid addrof event Returns the number of events that generated the grid and w32GridEventP2 w32GridGetEventP1 functions should call ahead to get the value of the first and second property of the event that just occurred Below is a table of values Evento Descripci n Propiedad 1 Propiedad 2 1 Pulsaci n de F7 Fila actual Columna actual 2 Pulsaci n de F2 No se notifica est reservado para editar 3 Pulsaci n de F3 Fila actual Columna actual 4 Pulsaci n de F4 Fila actual Columna actual 5 Pulsaci n de F5 Fila actual Columna actual 6 Pulsaci n de F6 Fila actual Columna actual 7 Pulsaci n de F7 Fila actual Columna actual 8 Pulsaci n de F8 Fila actual Columna actual 9 Pulsaci n de F9 Fila actual Columna actual 10 Pulsaci n de F170 No se notifica est reservada por WINDOWS para activar men s 11 Pulsaci n de F71 Fila actual Columna actual 12 Pulsaci n de F72 Fila actual Columna actual 13 Se ha iniciado la edici n de Fila Columna una celda 14 Ha concluido la edici n de una Fila Columna celda 15 Pulsaci n de Suprimir Fila actual Columna actual 16 Pulsaci n de Insertar Fila actual Columna actual 17 Pulsaci n de Inicio Fila actual Columna actual 18 Pulsaci n de Fin Fila actual Columna actual 19 Pulsaci n de Cursor Arriba 1 Columna actual S lo se notifica cuando se es
95. the text Valid values are 0 255 miliseg Number of milliseconds to display the splash screen When specifying 0 is displayed until the user clicks the mouse over it Return defaults to 1 if the user clicked on the screen or 64 if timed example call w32Splash 0 csi gif Autorizado a Asesoria Narbona amp chr 13 amp Numero de serie 123 456789 130 180 Tahoma 11 255 0 0 10000 addrof ret 195 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Autorizado a Asesoria Narbona Numero de serie 123 456789 call w32GridSortItems grid columna alfanum orden addrof ret Sorts the elements of a grid based on the values and types of the fields in the specified column grid at grid reference returned by the function w32CreateGrid Column Column grid to sort by Starting from 1 alphanumeric O alphanumeric sort 2 and 3 numeric sort sort by date order 1 up and 2 down Ejemplo L neas de la Factura 08541 de la Factura 08541 C digo Descripci n Unid Precio Fecha ma 9687250 VARIO CASE P SISTEMA VAS C TAP 1 886 4 9314132 DESTORNILLADOR EXAGONAL T 3 0 1 76 1 9388380 VAINA SUJECION DESTORNILLADOR 1 215 7 9368532 AVELLANADOR PARA USS VAS 171 7 9388357 EXTRACTOR PARA USS VAS 9497191 TORNILLO USS VAS 6 2 30 T CPTO 9497192 TORNILLO USS YAS 6 2235 TAN 9497193 TORNILLO USS YAS 6 2 40 TAN 9497194 TORNILLO USS VAS 6 2 45 TAN 9497195 TORNILLO USS AS 6 2 50 TAN MANNA AL MAMMA MI TAIAN AR
96. these changes Once you are satisfied with the operation of its program model create or convert your next login dialog At this point you should use the Copy Paste Copy Paste to copy code quickly or inserting include 62 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 statements of the model to new dialogue format This process is simplified if you open several windows simultaneously with different codes in the editor The code of your original source file can also copy and pasted into new files include easily In that case we recommend that you delete the line numbering The advantages of using this product are essentially two Windows applications are performed with user interfaces that look and function the way that the user prefers Applications are made highly structured event driven easy to maintain Now off you go 7 3 The dialog editor w 32 The w 32 dialog editor is invoked from the integrated development environment running the W32APBLD exe cetbin from the directory or by selecting the item from the menu group application builder w 32 CET CET w 32 Application Builder Note for Windows versions 2000 or higher because of problems with the product W32 W32APBLD not allow proper compilation when it is called from a command window This problem does not occur under Windows 9X or NT Note that although this chapter is not intended as a tutorial we recommend that invokes the editor and go attempted to test the features as th
97. these files in the compilation process Force to Rebuild All recompile all project files although these have not been modified All Dependences Update Update all dependencies when find a include statement look for files in the folder BASIC type files and updates certain dependencies Use this command to add new units after the project is built Execute the Project the Project Run Run the project If win32app detects that a file has been modified since the last time you built the project comparing dates then displays a message asking if you want to upgrade the project Build the subproject Subproyects automatically opens and executes the command Build the Project Rebuild All Subproyects Automatically opens each subproject and run the command Rebuild the Project Whenever a file is compiling or building a project a dialog box appears to indicate that the operation is being performed If this operation is successful you will return to the editor window without displaying any message However if errors are detected W32APBLD w32errorfile edit the file to show the list of all those mistakes Note that the dialog has compiled project to minimize and cancel buttons If you minimize the build it will be in the background and when finished the program will automatically reset If you cancel the compilation the program will end after the command is executed the current command This option will not abort the command 5 7 Create
98. to help you learn how to create new projects to its existing executable programs e Use projects basic concepts e Create projects e Add files to project e Build and maintain projects See the next chapter for more details w 32 debugger and dialog editor w 32 Note for Windows versions 2000 or higher because of problems with the product W32 W32APBLD not allow proper compilation when it is called from a command window This problem does not occur under Windows 9X or NT 5 2 Use Project Basics W32APBLD you to build projects to simplify the creation debugging and maintenance of their applications You can make use of these benefits with existing applications created from the command line When you create a new project the environment shows a project tree where each file type is represented as a folder and hanging from them such files belonging to the file you created For example the file types are BASIC dialogues Object etc This is a convenient way to get an overview of your project When you create a project there are various menu options available so you can build one or more files or build your project and generate an executable file W32APBLD keeps the names DI xj location and date of each of the files Each time you run your project the program will ask you to recompile the files that have changed The basic concept of a set of files that make up a project is the dependency between them For example when y
99. to the first DATA statement or another DATA statement as specified line number When using the BASIC subroutines observe the following behavior e AREAD statement reads only through the data in the module in which it is located e ARESTORE statement can only refer to the DATA statement in the same module 9 11 3 COMMON sentences The COMMON statement is a powerful executable statement which adds a set of variables to the existing list of common variables During a CHAIN or LINK this list of common variables will be matched with the variable list s statement s of the program called COMMON When using the BASIC subroutines it is advisable to use the COMMON statement except in the main module MAIN If you want to share variables with other modules use the SQL GLOBAL 9 11 4 User defined functions A user defined function specified by the DEF statement is recognized only by the module in which it is defined 126 Chapter 10 ODBC support Chapter 10 ODBC support 10 1 Introduction The connectivity of open database ODBC is a standard created by Microsoft to allow transparent access from applications to a wide range of databases and file management systems There ODBC drivers in Microsoft Windows within the file handle eg dBase Btrieve database managers eg Fox Pro Paradox and MS Access and SQL servers as Watcom SQL and SQL Gupta Relational databases such as MS SQL Server Oracle Informix and Sybase ODBC drivers als
100. values of ID you can use These are 115 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions 0 is a value known as SEPARATOR used to add space between buttons 500 is the ID associated with menu Source ID_FONTS_SELECT 501 ID associated with the menu Help About ID_APP_ ABOUT 502 ID associated with the Exit menu ID_APP_EXIT 503 ID associated with the Toolbar menu ID_ VIEW_TOOLBAR 504 ID associated with the State Bar menu ID_ VIEW_STATUS_BAR The separator does not consume any buttons but adds separating buttons so they can be grouped into roles If using SEPARATOR increase the number of buttons Num with the number of these separators used as this argument defines the size of the matrix btn The sample code shown below loads a new toolbar with three buttons and a separator between the second and third buttons REM Load a toolbar with 3 buttons and separator REM between buttons 2 and 3 Bmid argument 2 is associated REM with IDR_TOOLBAR2 which should be added to the file Re REM and associate it with a file Bmp represent its buttons DIM btn 4 btn 1 121 btn 2 2 btn 3 01 btn 4 34 REM Hides the tool bar before replacing CALL CToolBar 2 4 MATTADDROF btn Note See chapter Framework Windows for information on how to make a toolbar appear every time you run your program cWaitCursor This routine is used to display a cursor type hourglass waiting This normally is used to inform the user to wait whil
101. w32BLook call index button rutaimagen_on rutaimagen_off rutaimagen_push width height addrof imagen_on addrof imagen_off addrof imagen_push The call to this function allows you to associate different images to a button for each of the following situations e The mouse is positioned over the button area imagen_on e The mouse is not positioned over the button area imagen_off e The user has pressed the button imagen_push Requires CETExt dll file dated 09 12 2007 or later The interpretation of the parameters is as follows index integer value between 1 and 50 button reference to the button Value obtained with w32GetWindow rutaimagen_on Route of the image to display when the mouse is over the button It can be any graphic file jpg gif bmp rutaimagen_off Route of the image to display when the mouse is not over the button It can be any graphic file jpg gif bmp rutaimagen_push Route of the image to be displayed when the user hold the button It can be any graphic file jpg gif bmp 187 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 width Width in pixels of the images to be attached to the button high height in pixels of the images to be attached to the button imagen_on reference to the associated image when the mouse is over the button This reference allows release resources occupied by the image w32DeleteObject invoking function imagen_off reference to t
102. w32EditENTER w32EditENTERn although its use is not inconsistent set Note 2 Although the most obvious use of this feature is to edit controls can also be used with list controls List Box Ejemplo SUB dlglEvent SELECT CET_EVTYPE REM Event notification save area REMOS evtstart CASE 15 Rem Eventos Especiales a adidos en tiempo de ejecuci n SELECT CMDIDS CASE 100 SELECT teclal00 CASE 112 Rem Tratar la pulsacion de la tecla Fl CEND CASE 101 SELECT teclal01 CASE 33 Rem Re Pag CASE 34 Rem Av Pag CEND CEND REM evtend CEND SEXIT SUB dlglInit REM Initialize dialog save area REMOS inistart Rem poner el foco en un boton cualquiera 200 p ej para hallar la referencia al cuadro de dialogo Call cSetFocus dlglHDLG 200 Rem Obtener la referencia al dialogo Solo es necesario llamar a esta funcion una vez al inicio del dialogo call w32GetParent addrof padre Rem Obtener la referencia al control de edici n con ID 100 Call w32GetWindow padre 100 addrof ed100 Rem Obtener la referencia al control de edici n con ID 101 Call w32GetWindow padre 101 addrof ed101 Rem Proceso de enter para id 100 y 101 call w32EditENTEREx 1 ed100 100 addrof teclal00 call w32EditENTEREx 2 ed101 101 addrof teclal01 REM iniend call w32ListGetEventsExn padre lis ID addrof evento addrof paraml addrof param2 Where n is a value from 1 to 9 Calling this function group c
103. when creating the bar minimum value is O and the maximum is 100 w32ProgressSetStep call hand step 139 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Sets the step increment for a progress bar The step increment is the amount by which the progress bar increases its current position when calling w32ProgressSteplt function Default to create the step sweep provides increased to 10 w32ProgressSteplt call hand Advances the current position of the progress bar in a step increment and redraws the bar to reflect the new position When the position exceeds the maximum range this function resets the current position to the progress indicator start again from the beginning w32ProgressSetColor call hand 1 v y Sets the color of the progress bar control r value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are 0 255 p Progreso Ejemplo Create prj call w32CreateCalendar x y ancho alto addrof cal LL Fecha de Cierre de Ejercicio febrero 2000 enero febrero marzo abril mayo junio julio agosto septiembre octubre noviembre vie s b dom Create a calendar control inside the window that has focus The return value is necessary to refer to the timing in the rest of the functions that operate on the same Ejemplo Create prj c
104. which identifies the adapter WINDOWS Desc Model Description Network Adapter Mac Address MAC Address of the adapter IP IP address associated with the adapter Mask Netmask Ret O indicates error w32MenuCheckRadioltem menu ini end sel addrof ret Allows a group of mutually exclusive options menu and select one being marked with a radio button The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Menu is the menu handle Must be the value returned by w32CreateMenu Ini menu item identifier initial clustering End menu item identifier end of the pool Sel the group element to be selected Must be a value between initial and end Ret 0 indicates error w32MenulInsertItemEx call menu id type text check desh addrof ret Add a menu item to the end of With the possibility of being checked at all or disabled The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Menu is the identifier of the menu to which you add the item Must be the value returned by w32CreateMenu ID ID that is associated with the menu item It is intended to help determine the selection made by the user In case the input is in turn a submenu the value of this parameter must be the same identifier Type is a value between 0 and 2 which determines the type of entry being inserted 0 The item is a selectable item inserted normal 1 The item to be inserted is itself another menu submenu 198 Cap tulo 11 CAL
105. 0 to 699 Combo boxes 700 to 799 Check boxes 800 to 899 67 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 Radio buttons 900 to 999 All dialogs and display formats consist of a set of one or These values produce no control ID conflict with the values associated with menu commands ID_WINSUBn ID Control values are processed separately when in the specific section for client code generated by the BASIC program editor dialog See section Source File Dialog All controls also have a set of ten user defined properties that appear when you click the right mouse button These properties can be used to enter information specific to the particular control There is an option that lets you change the labels for these fields example Campo Etiqueta Ejemplo 1 File source cp data custname 2 Font field 10 3 Name costo 4 Format N 5 Upper lower case 6 Required entrance Y si 7 Mask HHHH HH 8 Ask message introduzca la cantidad pedida The dialog editor loads the information defined in these properties in a matrix which is accessible when you need to draw on the screen validate or format a data in a specific control The procedure to use controls and their properties will be explained in detail in the Source File section of the dialog Adding controls to a dialog is a simple three step procedure simply e Choose a menu control e Move the cursor to the desired position and click to select the control e Double Click on the form control to enter their
106. 0000080H SS_NOTIFYS 00000100H SS_OWNERDRAW 0000000DH Rem Botones BS_PUSHBUTTON 00000000H BS_DEFPUSHBUTTON 00000001H BS_CHECKBOX 00000002H BS_AUTOCHECKBOX 00000003H BS_RADIOBUTTONS 00000004H BS_3STATE S 00000005H BS_AUTO3STATE 00000006H BS_GROUPBOX 00000007H BS_USERBUTTON 00000008H BS_AUTORADIOBUTTONS 00000009H BS_OWNERDRAW 0000000BH BS_LEFTTEXT S 00000020H BS_MULTILINES 00002000H BS_VCENTER 00000C00H Rem Controles de Edicion ES_LEFT 00000000H ES_CENTER 00000001H ES_RIGHTS 00000002H ES_MULTILINES 00000004H ES_UPPERCASE 00000008H ES_LOWERCASE 00000010H ES_PASSWORD 00000020H ES_AUTOVSCROLL 00000040H ES_AUTOHSCROLL 00000080H ES_NOHIDESEL 00000100H ES_OEMCONVERT 00000400H ES_READONLY 00000800H ES_WANTRETURN 00001000H ES_NUMBER 00002000H Rem Barra de Scroll SBS_HORZ 0000H SBS_VERT 0001H SBS_TOPALIGNS 0002H SBS_LEFTALIGNS 0002H SBS_BOTTOMALIGN 0004H SBS_RIGHTALIGN 0004H SBS_SIZEBOXTOPLEFTALIGN 0002H SBS_SIZEBOXBOTTOMRIGHTALIGN S 0004H SBS_SIZEBOX 0008H Rem List Box LBS_NOTIFY 0001H LBS_SORT S 0002H LBS_NOREDRAW 0004H LBS_MULTIPLESEL S 0008H LBS_OWNERDRAWFIXED 0010H LBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLES 0020H LBS_HASSTRINGS S 0040H LBS_USETABSTOPS 0080H LBS_NOINTEGRALHEIGHT 0100H LBS_MULTICOLUMN S 0200H LBS_WANTKEYBOARDINPUT 0400H LBS_EXTENDEDSEL S 0800H LBS_DISABLENOSCROLL 1
107. 000H LBS_NODATA S 2000H LBS_NOSEL 4000H LBS_STANDARD LBS_NOTIFY OR WS_VSCROLLS LBS_USETABSTOPS OR WS_BORDER OR WS_HSCROLL OR call wW32MAPISendMailMultipleFiles tema contenido direccion_destino nombre_destino numero_ficheros mataddrof ficheros addrof ret Enables sending email without user intervention attaching many files as desired The syntax is Subject Subject of e mail Content email content Direccion_detino e mail address beginning with SMTP eg SMTP job omegasystems com Nombre_destino Alternative name to specify the person for whom the e mail 185 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 numero_ficheros number of files attached It can be O or more files matrix files with the relationship that you want to attach ret return value A value other than 0 indicates error Example dim files 2 files 1 c cetbin Brestore log files 2 c cetbin install log w32MAPISendMailMultipleFiles call Log Files Attachment 2 log files SMTP job omegasystems com Job Rodriguez 2 mataddrof file addrof ret msgbox str ret w32SetCtrlColorStatic call father rt vt at rf vf af The call to this function allows you to set the text color and background of all static texts text radio button check box and group boxes of a dialogue The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father reference
108. 1 to indicate that you want to use a transparent background for that control vf component value V green background color of the text Valid values are 0 255 af value component blue background color of the text Valid values are 0 255 The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init In all dialogues that make up an executable should not be called more than once to the same function in this group Thus for defenir controls the color of three functions to be used 149 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Call w32SetCtrlColor1 Call w32SetCtrlColor2 Call w32SetCtrlColor3 Some of the color combinations for the most common 0 0 0 black Yellow 255 255 0 Dark Yellow 128 128 0 Red 255 0 0 Dark Red 128 0 0 Magenta 255 0 255 Dark Magenta 128 0 128 Blue 0 0 255 Dark Blue 0 0 128 Cyan 0255255 0128128 Dark Cyan Green 0 255 0 Dark Green 0128128 Grey 192 192 192 Dark Grey 128128128 White 255 255 255 Example Be assigned the following definition of colors to various controls of a dialog Criterios del listado WV Facturas Por fecha A o 98 Y Presupuestos C Por Importe TA m EJFECTIVO V ISA Cliente CLIENTE a gt l acne El fragmento de c digo a ejecutar ser a SUB dlglInit REM Initialize dialog save area REM inistart poner el foco en un boton cualquiera 200 p ej para hallar la rem referencia
109. 2 autoexec bat config sys 378KB 575bytes 161 bytes The parameter files return the number of files that have been copied The parameter month return the number of messages processed O 1 on error example call w32MAPIReadMail c correo activanet es addrof files addrof ret call w32DestroyWindow handle Deletes the control created by the function call w32Create Calendar Progress List Animationl Ejemplo print ats 1 1 Backup call w32CreateAnimation 1 15 150 50 addrof ani call w32AnimationOpen ani file avi addrof ret call w32AnimationPlay ani addrof ret wait call w32AnimationStop ani addrof ret wait call w32DestroyWindow ani print at 1 1 End Backup wait call w32ListEnsure Visible lis item addrof ret Specifies that the line item from the list lis must be visible This function will move the vertical scroll control if necessary 143 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 w32ListGridLines call lis addrof ret Displays grid lines dividing the list lis Cod Descripcion a 02 N COMENSAL 03 CAFES 04 CAVAS 05 CERVEZA 06 BRANDY 07 GINEBRAS 08 COMENTAR 09 LICORES 10 RON 11 VINOS TINTOS 4 gt call w32ListClearGridLines lis addrof ret You void grid gridlines on the list lis w32CalendarSetSel call cal year month day Sets the selection calendar created with lime w32CreateCalen
110. 2GetWindow value obtained This procedure avoids the need to put the focus on a control and thus improves performance w32BMultilineH call button This function is identical except w32BMultiline is added to the initial parameter to specify the reference button w32GetWindow value obtained This procedure avoids the need to put the focus on a control and thus improves performance w32BLoadImageH call button file width height addrof Picture This function is identical except w32BLoadImage is added to the initial parameter to specify the reference button w32GetWindow value obtained This procedure avoids the need to put the focus on a control and thus improves performance The return value is a reference to the image that can be deleted to free memory via w32DeleteObject function w32BFLoadImageH call button file width height addrof Picture This function is identical except w32BFLoadImage is added to the initial parameter to specify the reference button w32GetWindow value obtained This procedure avoids the need to put the focus on a control and thus improves performance The return value is a reference to the image that can be deleted to free memory via w32DeleteObject function w32ComboGetCurSel call combo addrof sel Returns the index of the item that is selected in the combo box whose reference is passed as the first argument In case no item is selected returns a value of 1 w32ComboRese
111. 2keybd_event V asc V call w32Skeybd_event_up 18 rem Liberar ALT call w32keybd_event E asc E CEND REM btnend GOSUB dlgl BTNEND SEXIT call w32BMultiline Allows specifying multiple lines of text in a button The focus should be located previously on the same w32B3D call Displays a button in its normal state of 3 Dimensions The focus should be located previously on the same w32BFlat call Displays a button in its pressed state The focus should be located previously on the same w32GetDiskSpace call unit addrof area addrof ret Returns the total drive capacity in bytes Returns 0 on error w32SetFont call source points position bold italic sub strikeout Sets the font of any control in which the focus is located The orientation parameter designates the degrees of inclination of the text The last 4 parameters take value 1 to enable and 0 to disable attribute w32CreateProgress call x y width height continuous vertical addrof hand Create a progress bar in the window that has focus Continuous parameters and vertical can take values 1 or 0 to enable or disable the corresponding feature The return value is necessary to refer to the bar in the rest of the functions that operate on the same w32ProgressSetRange call hand min max Sets the maximum and minimum values for the progress bar and redraws hand to reflect the new range By default
112. 32 32 o pgmnuevo pgmnuevo b 3 5 2 Generate assembly code as output S The S can be used to inform the compiler generate ends after the assembly language program For example the following command generates compiled pgmnuevo by end when pgmnuevo asm within the current directory OBW32 S pgmnuevo b Assembler Program output format is Microsoft MASM 3 5 3 Define a symbol Ds mbolo When your BASIC program contains a C preprocessor statement such as ifdef this option is used for a given value the preprocessor symbol This feature is explained separately in the Language Reference Manual CET BASIC 3 5 4 Select line error The can be used to specify how the error messages displayed in execution When used displayed ERL current line number within the source file that caused the error In any case the default is to display the number of the last line that was successful This option is particularly handy when a BASIC program contains statements with and without line numbers For example the following code with ERL 120 end if not included Otherwise ERL will be equal to 2 100 X 01GOTO 120 LINEAMAL PRINT 1 X 120 GOTO L NEAMAL 37 Chapter 3 The W 32 compiler 3 5 5 Float text editor Zi This feature can be used to pass text based programs to Windows programs with little or no modification of BASIC code note that this feature can not be used under Windows for Workgroups This flag must be specified at c
113. 4 Never write any information in a file or remove it from the screen cetwin obj This will ensure that no information can be updated from two places at once 5 Otherwise their programs could redraw the screen when you select a menu item If you update the screen since his departure cetwin obj file could mix with their programs For example suppose you have the following code within the routine cetMouseMove cGetMouse call ADDROF row ADDROF column cGetCursor call row column print Hello World This code will trace the position actual mouse move the cursor to that position and draws the string Hello World This could cause strange effects if this code is executed while the main program screen out data 53 Chapter 5 The W 32 integrated develop environment Chapter 5 The W 32 integrated develop environment 5 1 Introduction The Application Builder w 32 has a graphical development environment w32apbld exe that has multiple uses for convenient development of their applications While this program you can create e Projects to compile test and maintain your application executable e Source files using a text editor especially designed for writing for long programs The debugger is also available to expedite the debugging phase e User Interfaces GUI that consist of a collection of windows that will give you a much more visual for your application The information in this chapter is organized into the following sections
114. 7 Windows Objects wo nombre This option is used to suppress the default file w 32 links or linka during compilation called cetwin obj If you have a copy that has been modified using the procedures shown in Chapter Framework then use the file you specified in the option In the following example the first command will create an object file with the name miwin obj The second command will link the file without the Obj into the executable test exe OBW32 c miwin b OBW32 o test test b wo miwin 3 5 18 Windows resources wr nombre The compiler automatically be linked to the file cetwin res Framework to generate 32 bit programs with certain characteristics specific to Windows The file containing these features can be found in a modified resource file called cetuser rc If a copy of the file has been modified cetuser rc using the procedures of Chapter Framework then this option can be used to indicate that the file with the specified name should be linked into the executable In the following example the first command will compile a new resource file called miusuario res The second link the resource file into the executable tst exe Note that the Rc and Beef are assumed by default and should be omitted from the command line OBW32 r miusuario OBW32 wr miusuario o tst tst b 3 6 Environment variables used by the compiler Environment variables are used to pass additional information to the compiler or to modify the behavior
115. ARA SAMA N Le 378 8 376 8 378 8 378 8 376 8 Ny bP eB PNM He em 24 06 2005 Aa 26 06 2005 MN 27 0 2005 K 28 0 2005 K 29 06 2005 30 6 2005 MJ o o7 2005 M o2 o7 2005 3 3 3 For the grid of figure could use the following call management SSUB gridlEvent SELECT CET_EVIYPES REM Event notification save area REM evtstart CASE 15 Rem Eventos Especiales SELECT CMDID Rem 400 es el ID del control Grid que le hemos asignado en w32CreateGrid CASE 400 call w32GridGetEvent grid addrof ev SELECT ev CASE 24 196 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 call w32GridGetEventP1 grid addrof p1 call w32GridGetEventP2 grid addrof p2 Rem Se ha hecho click en un encabezado linea superior if p2 lt gt 0 if p2 lt 3 or p2 gt 5 then al 0 if p2 3 or p2 4 then al 2 if p2 5 then al 3 call w32GridSortItems grid p2 al 1 addrof ret ifend call w32GridGetEvent grid addrof evento Returns the number of events that generated the grid and w32GridEventP2 w32GridGetEventP1 functions should call ahead to get the value of the first and second property of the event that just occurred Using CETGRID dll version dated 11 06 2004 or later you can get a new notification that was added to detect keystrokes that combine with Control Evento Descripci n Propiedad 1 Propiedad 2 33 Pulsaci n de Ctrl Tecla Valor de la tecla empezando por 1 0 Ejemplo SSU
116. App Builder CET_W 32 User guide Index Chapter 1 Installation guide 1 1 Introduction 1 2 Requeriments 1 3 Distribution software 1 4 Installation of Application Builder CET W 32 VD OS 1 5 Windows Environment variables 1 6 Variables de entorno de Cet 1 7 Key protection activation 1 8 MACADDRESS CET Protection 1 9 Verifying the Installation under Windows 1 10 Web site 1 11 Versions Chapter 2 Overview 2 1 Introduction 22 The base language 2 3 The W 32 environment 2 4 The W 32 IDE 2 5 Subroutines BASIC 2 6 Mouse support 2 7 Viewing graphic images 2 8 ODBC support 2 9 MySQL 2 9 1 2 9 2 2 9 3 2 9 4 2 9 5 2 9 6 2 9 7 2 9 8 2 9 9 2 9 10 2 9 11 2 9 12 2 9 13 2 9 14 2 9 15 2 9 16 2 9 17 2 9 18 2 9 19 2 9 20 2 9 21 2 10 CET W 32 Library 2 10 1 Introduction New features Non supported features References Working with MySQL data base Files indexed emulation Configuraci n File access methods and formats File names Files and block records Natives APIs Example of Using native APIs CET BASIC programs Installing and configuring the MySQL server Configuration File Access emulator Moving ISAM data files to MySQL tables Example Creating ISAM file to conversion Analyzing the isam file Exporting indexed ISAM data files to t
117. AppTitle call Sample App Builder w 32 Program INVOICE call INV1 call cForceExit quit Although you may want to open and close the data files you need from within the main program we suggest that any other process is done in the source file for the format In another case a flash appear each time you stop to re format the text based Windows application main program 7 14 2 The visual format source file The format stored in dlginv b uses the following input screen for the invoice information invoice Ownership of the dialogue not make the controls global global controls do not is enabled for all display format processing was done from within your source file using the values of ID checks It took only a few global variables to pass information to and from subroutines format source file dlginv b and the source file of invoice lines dlgline b and the main program All these statements GLOBAL defined before xl Factura 2 Obtener Buscar Nuevo Archivo Cancelar Salit ELIO Enviado a Compa ia tossa aaalllt Contacto a Calle YT Calle cP ce TLF TL m Vendedor PO No T rminos Vencimien Facturado Enviado No Tarjeta Nombre Modo Tarjeta Comentarios TOTAL PA Carga Tasa TIE REMOH Dialog invi V2 3 REM 1ststart GLOBAL mat rec REM the invoice record array GLOBAL docModified REM used to check changes in record GLOBAL newFlag REM used in the line
118. B gridlEvent SELECT CET_EVTYPE REM Event notification save area REM evtstart CASE 15 Rem Eventos Especiales SELECT CMDID Rem 400 es el ID del control Grid que le hemos asignado en w32CreateGrid CASE 400 call w32GridGetEvent grid addrof ev SELECT ev CASE 33 call w32GridGetEventP1 grid addrof p1 Msgbox Ha pulsado CONTROL amp ucaseS chr 64 p1 amp call w32CreateStaticClassEx padre addrof evento Create a new control class called CETStaticLinkEx for dialogue or Form View is passed as the first argument Once the call can be created using the function controls w32CreateWindowH Link and specifying the type of control CETStaticLinkEx The controls show a hand like mouse pointer when the user is placed on them Cursors dll Seller is required When the user clicks on the control will generate a special event and the number 15 CMDID reserved variable will take the value of the ID of the control that was specified as the second argument in the function w32CreateWindowH also variable specified as the second argument of this w32CreateStaticClassEx function worth 1 w32StaticSetImageH call control image 20 20 addrof Return Associates a static image control or Class CETStaticLink so that instead of showing the text shows the image file that is indicated as second argument to the width and height in pixels indicated as third and fourth arguments respectively Ejemplo SUB hotlIni
119. BASIC None of the codes in the lt line principal gt programs which may include hundreds of lines of BASIC had to be modified The EXIT is used to replace each of the explicit statements CHAIN s back to the main menu and the COMMON statement is replaced with a GLOBAL Being added a CLEAR to clear all other variables and arrays in the subroutine 9 11 Differences cet basic conventional programs BASIC subroutines are designed to allow the compilation of the modules separately and be linked with an executable while requiring only small changes to the existing application of CET BASIC 125 Chapter 9 Basic subroutines During execution there are some statements CET BASIC acting differently when they were compiled into the program of separate modules The following sections deal with these differences 9 11 1 Error handling Importantly each BASIC subroutine performs its own error handling Each subroutine where an error could occur a sentence begins with ON ERROR GOTO This also applies to the interrupt processing and the key locking system 9 11 2 RESTORE y READ with the DATA sentences Normally the READ statement when not accompanied by a file number read through a list of data specified by the DATA statements Each READ hereinafter use the next item in this list consists of data each program DATA statements The pointer pointer of the next data item can be changed using RESTORE This statement can turn back to pointer
120. BS_SIMPLE 0001H CBS_DROPDOWN 0002H CBS_DROPDOWNLIST 0003H CBS_OWNERDRAWFIXED 0010H CBS_OWNERDRAWVARIABLE 0020H CBS_AUTOHSCROLL S 0040h CBS_OEMCONVERTS 0080H CBS_SORT 0100H CBS_HASSTRINGS 0200H CBS_NOINTEGRALHEIGHT 0400H CBS_DISABLENOSCROLL 0800H Styles Rem Date Time Picker control Type SysDateTimePick32 DTS_TIMEFORMAT S 0009H Rem control displays time date time DTS_SHOWNONES 0002H Rem It indicates that the user is allowed to specify no value for the date time by uncheck the check box that is displayed in the same call w32DTPSetSel control nulo ano mes dia hora min seg addrof ret Sets the value assigned to a control date and time The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Control control identifier Date Time Return value w32CreateWindowH Null indicator that establishes whether to specify a null value If this parameter is assigned a value of 1 disables the control content if you are assigned a O control content is active according to the values of the following parameters The year value must be a 4 digit number call w32DTPGetSel control addrof year addrof month addrof day addrof time addrof min addrof s addrof ret Gets the value specified for the control date time The return value is 0 if the content is not disabled call w32EditGetLineCount control addrof few Returns the number of
121. Clears the value Alphanumeric index INDX list box cLBoxInsString hDlg ID STR INDX Insert new element alphanumeric before the index value INDX Put INDX to 1 if you want to add the final alphanumeric list box In any case there shall be no classification cGetLBoxSelection hDlg ID MATADDROF RESULTS Gets the current selection box control specified by ID listings and enter index values within the entire matrix RESULTS Because the number of selected elements in the array is always within the element 1 we can speak of him as the counter field Thus the values selected alphanumeric indices start from item 2 77 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 If the list box selection is simple the default the array is sized to 2 When selecting one of the selection elements the first element of the array will have value 1 and the selected element index value stored in the second element of the array When using a multiple selection list box the size of the array is determined by the number of items selected Your program will need to loop counter based on the field The array element 1 to find the index values of each of the selected items If no selection is made the first element of the array will have zero value and the second element is empty no matter what type of list box being used cLBoxSetSel hDlg ID SEL Sets as selected text highlighted to the index value SEL and this will be the last visible text in the dialog
122. Clk GLOBAL MROW MCOL MOUSEDOWN SELANCHOR REM Llamado cuando se hace doble click con el bot n izquierdo MOUSEDOWN 0 CALL cGetMouse addrof mrow addrof mcol CALL clnputQ 3005 1 rem MOUSE DBLCLICK EXIT SUB cetRBtnDClk REM Llamado cuando se hace doble click con el bot n izquierdo REM No utilizado en este ejemplo EXIT SUB cetMouseMove GLOBAL MROW MCOL MOUSEDOWN SELANCHOR REM Llamado cuando se mueve el bot n izquierdo if mrow gt 0 and mcol gt 0 and selanchor gt 0 and mousedown lt gt 0 CALL cGetMouse addrof mrow addrof mcol if row lt gt mrow or col lt gt mcol mrow row mcol col call cInputQ 3006 1 rem MOUSE MOVE ifend ifend EXIT 52 Chapter 4 The framework In order to pass the values of the variables GLOBAL your BASIC program you can add the following sentences at the beginning of the program MAIN GLOBAL MROW MCOL MouseDown SELANCHOR Variables MROW MCOL MouseDown SELANCHOR are used to determine the position of the mouse when the event was detected and save in SELANHORY so that the cursor can be repositioned after the transaction has taken place chosen variables ROW and COL indicate the initial position of the entry field The main program one that contains the sentence MAIN also has to define mouse events Large numbers have been used to make it easier to distinguish between keyboard input and mouse MOUSE DBLCLICK 3005 MOUSE MOV
123. DRIVE C TREND The following program can be used to access c trend dms data dms01 lib DMS drive S open1 LIB DATA DMS01 amp DRIVE direct update Activating these variables change the default behavior is first find the file in the current directory then the path specified in B_FPATH B_DOSTAB Select to LINPUT USING statements that return a value of 9 for the INP TAB character as low THEOS ago Otherwise the default is to ignore the TAB B_EMULATE Loading this variable to 1 mimics several features of THEOS automatically activating the emulation related variables such as B_FFPTR B_GINVERT B_OPTLOCK B_THCONV B_THLOCK B_THPON and B_THVAL 13 Chapter 1 Installation guide Enabling emulation attributes THEOS will screen control function as in THEOS THEOS file formats are recognized that INP values are as expected and that the escape character will become 27 Note that division by zero errors will be detected This is an illegal operation in C for good reason if you were allowed the program may produce incorrect data without there being any notification B_OPTLOCK When set to one will cause the READNEXT and function as in READPREV THEOS after a RESUME These sentences will run without moving the pointer to the file registry retrying reading If a record is locked and this variable is not set CET BASIC will read the next record or earlier when running a RESUME B_THLOCK Enabling
124. Destino sRuta addrof retorno This feature allows you to upload a file from a local medium to an FTP server Requires CETFTP DLL have the file in the working directory Rem CETFTP DLL File must be in the directory of the executable Returns 0 crt print clear print at 1 1 gordo jpg Sending file sServidor ftp omega st es sUser seba omega st es sClave omega Bgetcwd call addrof sDonde sDonde sPath amp asd pdf sDestino var www html things asd pdf print at 1 1 Sending file amp sPath print at 1 2 In amp sDestino w32FtpPut call sServidor sUser sClave sDestino sPath addrof return Msgbox conclude with return amp str returns call MATADDROF listatamanos addrof return w32FtpFilesInfo server user password path MATADDROFffiles MATADDROF dates MATADDROK sizes addrof retorno Gets an array with the list of files and subdirectories preceded by the string D belonging to a particular directory to an FTP site Besides other two arrays are returned with dates in format YYYY MM DD HH mm ss and sizes in bytes of the files Dll is required cetftp dated 22 06 2010 or later The site s root directory must be specified with the string Arrays that are passed as arguments must be sized previously The return value can be 1 Operation completed successfully 1 Error in operation
125. E 3006 MOUSE DOWN 3007 MOUSE UP 3008 The mouse support is automatically created in the dialog vantanas or display formats created with the dialog editor See chapter Dialogues Editor w 32 for more information about how to handle mouse events 4 5 12 Special considerations when using windows There are some important considerations to keep in mind when using the Windows features The menu selection and mouse events can occur at any time during the execution of a program When a user changes to a menu item the Framework automatically calls a subroutine cetwin obj This is an asynchronous event similar to a hardware interrupt that can occur while running a line of code An improper calculation may result if the program is currently accessing a global variable this change suddenly due to the execution of an event We suggest you use the following rules to prevent such problems occurring 1 Disable temporarily any menu item that may interfere with the normal data takes 2 Use signaling variables flags traffic light which means you can check verification variables GLOBAL cetwin obj and shared with your program have changed If you have spotted a change you can copy the shared variable within a single variable to which only you can access your program 3 Only run code from file to configure cetwin obj state of its program But all that is processing the information data files variables etc it from your application
126. ENUITEM Select ID_FONTS_SELECT END 3 Compile a new resource file called miusua res using modifications to miusua rc OBW32 r miusua 4 Rebuild your application using this resource file not the default cetwin res specifying the name and code wr as follows OBW32 wr o tst miusua tst b From now on the menu font does not appear in any BASIC program to compile the file using miusua rc 4 5 2 Choosing the sources within the Windows Administrator The file contains the subroutine cetwin obj cetPreInit that is called when initializing Windows Manager Any statements in this subroutine will be executed before the first line of code in your program run If you plan to use a particular font in your application we suggest you change this file to select the source and stop its program files as they are Modify the file cetwin obj 1 Copy the source code in the directory cetwin b working with a different name copy cetlib cetwin b tst miven b 2 Modify the copy of cetwin b to use the Terminal font point 9 which is the default This is done by removing the comment to the next statement in the subroutine cetPreInit the beginning of the file REM call cSelectFont Terminal 12 400 0 255 49 If you want to use another source enter the display settings with a call to cFontValues See the procedure explained in the previous section 3 Compile the modified program OBW32 c miven b 47 Chapter 4 The framework Now compil
127. ETBIN 3 7 3 B_CETINC Indicates the location of the runtime components cet Default is current directory cetlib 1 INC B_CETINC CACETLIBUNC 3 7 4 B_CETLIB This variable indicates the location of components cet win Default is current directory c cetlib B_CETLIB CACETLIB 3 7 5 B_BRTMDIR This variable indicates the location of the system running WIN CET Default is current directory c windows system B_BRTMDIR C WINDOWS SYSTEM 3 7 6 Environment Variables related files and input output 3 7 7 B_CSHFCLOSE Load this variable to 1 to close all files before running a sentence CSH CSI This variable is subject to the default which is not close open files 3 7 8 B_FPATH Load this variable to the list of directories where different locations will pick the OPEN statement before launching a file not found error B_FPATH supports a string of up to 253 characters Separate each path with a semicolon symbol For example if the file question to be opened BASIC first searches the current directory If this file is not in this directory and loaded B_FPATH variable as below then the program will try to open the file D FPA question B_FPATH D APF Note that if the variable is loaded B_FPATH search will be conducted for all open files except SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT mode In this case the runtime system will always look for the file in the current directory 3 7 9 B_LIBFNTYP Load this variable to 1 so that the file na
128. EXC VAC T FLOJO MEC E Partida 003 M3 EXC ZANJA MEC C AGO E Partida 004 M3 EXC POZOS MEC C AGt E A Cap tulo 02 CIMENTACI N Y ESTRUCTURAS B Fartida 001 m3 HORM LIMPIEZA HL 10 E Partida 002 PARTIDA NUEVA E Partida 003 m3 ahsjdhksdhkgj E Partida 004 m3 H ARM H 200 20 J Cap tulo 03 SANEAMIENTO Y OTROS call w32TreeExpand tree ref addrof ret Expand the branch element referenced by ref so that their children are visible w32TreeEnsureVisible call tree ref addrof ret Specifies that the element tree tree ref must be visible This function will move the vertical and horizontal scroll control if necessary w32TreeDeleteltem call tree ref addrof ret Deletes the element referenced by ref tree 156 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 w32TreeDeleteAllItems call tree addrof ret Clears all tree items tree w32TreeSetColor call tree r v y Sets the text color of tree tree items 1 value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are O 255 w32TreeSetSel call tree ref addrof ret Sets the element tree tree ref as the selected item of the same w32TreeGetSelltem call tree addrof ref Returns the reference of the currently selected item in the tree tree w32TreeGetItem call tree ref
129. II 214 Chapter 12 Development Utilities This section illustrates some typical commands for sorting records in ASCII UNIX environment The equivalent command in a DOS environment could use a backslash at the start of the file names and not required to enclose a single quote character in a selection specification Example 1 In this example the file is sorted Testfile is a sequential file and each record contains a single string of 40 characters in length Bsort Testfile Out 40 1 4 The records would be sorted by the first four characters Each full registration Testfile be written to a sequential file called Out Example 2 The following command isamfile order records one indexed file key with a length of 4 and a record length of 40 Since this is an indexed file before the operations take classification is concatenated to the registry key data fields Bsort Isamfile Out 5 9 L1 4 Bsort sort the records in the input file using the first four characters of the data field and write the registry key to a file named index Out APPENDIX Error Messages The Bsort error messages are recorded in lib Bsort_err UNIX or lib bsort err DOS While for the operation is not required Bsort file error this should be in the directory lib whether to display error messages The following is a listing of the contents of the error file Insufficient memory Unable to open file 0 Can not cr
130. ILLADOR EXAGONAL T 3 0 9388380 VAINA SUJECION DESTORNILLADOR 9388532 AVELLANADOR PARA USS VAS 9497193 MESE gt Color de Celda 9497194 TORNILLO Uss Opci n 2 Seleccione el men grid para testear las opciones 400 Evento 25 Cambio de Fila P1 7 P2 2 400 Evento 24 Click en Encabezado P1 5 P2 0 Ocultar Deshabilitar 400 Evento 13 Inicio de edici n EXTRACTOR PARA USS VAS 400 Evento 29 Click con el boton derecho PLS P2 2 E Cancelar Al Ejemplo Grid prj call w32GridDeleteAllItems grid Deletes all rows in the grid control referenced by the first parameter Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridDeleteColumn call grid col Deletes the column grid starting from 1 is specified as the second parameter Can not delete column 1 Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridDeleteltem call grid temp Delete the grid row starting from 1 is specified as the second parameter Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridEditCurCell call grid Starts editing the currently selected grid cell The user can start editing any cell by pressing F2 or double clicking on the character of the cell where you want to position the cursor Quick Edit a Another possibility to modify the contents of a cell is passed to type a value b If the cell selected then press the space bar adds a space and place the cursor at the end of the tex
131. L 98 aa File Help CETDEMO A sample dialog that illustrates how to use a number of different types of controls A sample order entry program that uses a form view to get general Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 invoce information and a dialog box to get the line item details CALC A program that runs a 5 function calculator to illustrate command button processing main SUPRINT A sample dialog that may be adapted to display the printers wailable to a cific user call cAppTitle W 32 App tyr een Se re 4 A i that the ODBC facility An ODBC dri Builder Demo Programs ODBC Gant be installed before ocd Pee read on detabasa E call cForceExit call w32dlg REDRESS re ater lero och car chose quit QUIT The subroutine w32dlgBtnClick has been modified to process the selection of the command buttons Note that each time you press a button with the mouse to run one of the example programs making a call to a function that minimizes the main application window before the start of the process chosen To start the example that has been chosen cCreateProcess function is used this function can determine when the user leaves the program example and terminates the process in order to restore the main window which was minimized This process is performed in the subroutine Status SUB w32dlgBinClick REM Button Click save area REM binstart select cmdid case 201 call cAppWindowMin call cCreateProcess addrof hdle cetdemo
132. L CALL cetObjectExecute obj End 0 MACRO PrinterEnd obj Cancel Cancels document 223 Chapter 14 Implementation Notes CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj Cancel 0 MACRO PrinterCancel obj Font NombreFuente size style Sets the font for text output NombreFuente String The name of the source Size Large Font size Style String one or more of the styles B old I Talic U nderline Bold Italic Underline CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj Font NombreFuente size style 3 MACRO PrinterFont obj NombreFuente size style FontColor Number R V A activates the font color the original color value is 0 0 0 black Number integer number of source R integer value of R red color Valid values are O 255 V integer value of component V green color Valid values are 0 255 A integer value of component A blue color Valid values are 0 255 CALL call CALL cetObjectExecute obj FontColor num r v at 4 MACRO call PrinterFontColor obj num r v y Text String prints a text string starting at the current cursor position String The text string can contain the following escape characters Backslash N newline F end of page R right alignment L left alignment C centered VJ justified VO 9 Source Selection Calll CALL cetObjectExecute obj Text string 1 MACRO PrinterText obj s
133. LG 100 call cSetEditText lineHDLG 101 call cSetEditText lineHDLG 102 call cSetEditText lineHDLG 106 call cSetEditText lineHDLG 107 call cEnableCtrl lineHDLG 200 0 call cEnableCtrl lineHDLG 201 0 call cSetFocus lineHDLG 300 exit case 201 REM Bot n cancelar REM Limpia los controles de edici n desactiva los botones de Actualizaci n REM y Cancelaci n y establece el focus de nuevo en la caja de listado call cSetEditText lineHDLG 100 call cSetEditText lineHDLG 101 call cSetEditText lineHDLG 102 call cSetEditText lineHDLG 106 call cSetEditText lineHDLG 107 call cEnableCirl lineHDLG 200 0 call cEnableCtrl lineHDLG 201 0 call cSetFocus lineHDLG 300 exit case 203 REM Bot n de retorno REM Si es un nuevo registro activa un flag para indicar que ya se ha REM introducido Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 REM un dato en la l nea de pantalla Esto se hace REM para que el programa conozca que esto estaba aqu de antes REM en caso de que volvamos al di logo de l nea if newFlag lt gt 0 and dataEntered 0 then dataEntered 1 cend SUB lineEvent The code that has been added in this subroutine is used to detect that an item in the list box has been selected The code that processes the selection is in the reserved area at end of file case 2 REM Procesa una selecci n de la caja
134. LS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 2 The item to be inserted is a separation line unselectable Text Text string to be displayed in the entrance Check If 1 put a check box to the left of the item Desh If 1 disables the element Ejemplo Rem Creaci n del menu contextual call w32CreateMenu addrof submenus call w32MenuInsertItem submenu 6 0 Opcion 1 addrof ret call w32MenulInsertItem submenus 7 0 Opci n 2 addrof ret call w32MenuInsertItem submenu 8 0 Opcidn 3 addrof ret call w32CreateMenu addrof menus call w32MenuInsertItem menu 1 0 Insertar addrof ret call w32MenuInsertItem menu 2 2 addrof ret call w32MenuInsertItem menu 3 0 Eliminar addrof ret call w32MenuInsertItem menu submenu 1 Mas addrof ret call w32MenuInsertItemEx menus 4 0 Permitir modificar 1 0 addrof ret call w32MenuCheckRadioItem menus 6 8 6 addrof ret Al mostrar el menu anterior con la funci n w32MenuPopup el resultado es el siguiente Insertar if i Eliminar E F e Opcion 1 v Permitir modificar Opci n 2 Opci n 3 call w32EncryptFile origen destino clave addrof ret Encrypts a file source text and as a result is generated and encrypted file destination For the algorithm used key passed as a third argument If ret is 0 is that something went wrong Requires CETCrypt DLL file or later date 21 04 2004 w32DecryptFile call s
135. Or the unit code predating the filename The file path can be fully qualified as pos cp data file or relative to the current directory using File Any other name will be interpreted as a file naming described in THEOS For example the following statement indicates a description of THEOS file and will cause the program to create the file txt bill OPEN 1 factura txt OUTPUT SEQUENTIAL If the file you want to open is really factura txt and refers to the current directory the sentence should have been OPEN 1 Factura txt OUTPUT SEQUENTIAL 219 Chapter 14 Implementation Notes 14 5The Appli default search sequence cation Builder Builder W 32Application behaves like Windows programs Cundo seek an executable The search sequence is 14 6The By default a The directory where the calling program is executed The current working directory The Windows or Y Windows system The directories set in the PATH Directories within the variable set B_LKPATH number of open files n application can open up to 64 files at once Forty eight of these can be opened as indexed ISAM Note that the more open files your system will need more memory See chapter Compiler w 32 if you have questions about memory requirements 14 7CSI CSH sentences The sentences CSI CSH should run only in 16 bit programs These statements should be replaced with a call to cWinExec or cCreateProcess when developing 32 bi
136. Paste If this option is used no statements will be generated In that case you should manually enter these statements to all global variables that are used in the main program or in other dialogues in both the main file and in the file dialogs This procedure is explained in the section examples of source files Dialogues 7 8 Defining controls All dialogs and display formats consist of a set of one or more controls some controls can be simply labels The menu controls Control and the corresponding toolbar contain commands that are used to introduce specific controls Then there are the following commands Command Function Test check to check the design and operation of the dialogue without having to compile the program The dialog will automatically take three dimensional appearance that is common to all Windows applications Select Select to exit the selection process For example if you selected combo box from the menu by mistake immediately go back to the menu and choose Select to exit this operation Delete delete Deletes the selected control dialogue The delete key Del can also be used to remove a control The rest of the menu items can be used to introduce specific controls The controls available can be divided into two types static and interactive A static control does not allow operator input Text and controls are static group An interactive control by the user accepts an entry or selection All controls have a
137. QL server Call cetmysgql init_command mysql commands addrof errno Read options specified file instead of my cnf call cetmysql read_default_file mysqls files addrof errno cetmysql read_default_group mysqls groups addrof errno mysql_ping cetmysql ping Check if the connection to the server is active mysqls addrof errno msi query NO implementada use real query mysql_real_connect call cetmysql real_connect Try to establish a connection to a database engine MySQL is running on the specified host mysql host host user users Chapter 2 Overview passwd passwd db db ports unix_socket unix_socket flags addrof errno mysql_real_query cetmysql real_query MySQL executes the statement specified mysqls query addrof errno mysql_select_db call cetmysql select_db Select the specified database such as the database current connection Ag addrof errno mysql_shutdown No implementada mysql_stat call cetmysgl stat Returns a string containing A statistical information related to the mysql ec addrof stat activity on the server addrof errno mysql_store_result cetmysql store_result You must call this function whenever a query to retrieve data mysql addrof mysqlres addrof errno mysql_thread_id Not implemented mysql_thread_safe Not implemented Mysql_use_result c
138. REM Bot n de salida REM Detecta cuando ha cambiado un dato y avisa al usuario que REM el registro deber a ser actualizado o bien cancelada la operaci n REM antes de salir if docModified msgbox You have a modified record in progress chr 10 Select either File or Cancel first exit ifend REM Limpia el flag dlg de exit app y termina el formato call cForceExit call cEndForm inviHDLG exit CASE 205 REM Bot n nuevo REM Crea una nueva factura Primero establece el flag modificado del REM documento y limpia los controles de edici n Entonces copia el REM nuevo n mero de factura al control de combo docModified 1 newFlag 1 gosub clear ctrls call cSetCtrlValue inviHDLG 701 STR newlnvoice REM Establece los valores por defecto para algunos controles Estos REM pueden tambi n haber sido establecidos en las propiedades de REMcontrol CALL cSetCtrlValue inviHDLG 115 NET 10 CALL cSetCtrlValue inviHDLG 700 UPS BLUE REM Inicializa el nuevo registro a adiendo al primer campo REM el n mero de l neas para cada l nea mat rec num 1 for i 24 to 373 step 7 rec i STR num num num 1 next i REM Llama la rutina para introducir la factura y entonces establece REM el focus al primer control de edici n gosub Enterlnvoice call cSetFocus inviHDLG 101 exit CASE 206 REM Toma el bot n REM Toma un registro existente Primero limpia el flag del documento REM m
139. S_MINIMIZEBOX 00020000H Rem Creates a window that has a minimize button WS_MAXIMIZEBOX 00010000H Rem Creates a window that has a maximize button WS_GROUP S 00020000H Rem Specifies the first control of a group of controls in which the user can move from one to another with the cursor keys It is understood that all controls created after the first control that do not have defined this style in the same group The next control is created with the style WS_GROUPS starts the next group ie a group ends when the next begins WS_TABSTOP S 00010000H Rem The user can access this control using the tab key WS_BASES WS_CHILD WS_VISIBLE OR Styles Rem basic building controls Extended Window Styles Rem WS_EX_CLIENTEDGES 00000200H Rem Specifies that the window has a border with the enhanced edge Rem static controls Type Static SS_LEFTS 00000000H SS_CENTER S 00000001H SS_RIGHT 00000002H SS_ICON 00000003H SS_BLACKRECT 00000004H SS_GRAYRECT S 00000005H SS_WHITERECT S 00000006H SS_BLACKFRAME S 00000007H SS_GRAYFRAME 00000008H SS_WHITEFRAMES 00000009H SS_SIMPLE 0000000BH SS_LEFTNOWORDWRAP 0000000CH SS_NOPREFIX 00000080H SS_NOTIFY S 00000100H Buttons Rem Type Button BS_PUSHBUTTON 00000000H BS_DEFPUSHBUTTON 00000001H BS_CHECKBOX 00000002H BS_AUTOCHECKBOX 00000003H BS_RADIOBUTTONS 00000004H BS_3STATE S 00000005H BS_AUTO3STATE 00000006H BS_GROUPBOX 00000007H
140. T 10 This is selection 10 SECONDS 1 This is the second selection 1 SECONDS 2 This is the second selection 2 SECONDS 3 This is the second selection 3 This is selection 2 This is selection 4 MULTI 1 This is multi selection 1 MULTI 2 This is multi selection 2 MULTI 3 This is multi selection 3 MULTI 4 This is multi selection 4 MULTI 5 This is multi selection 5 MULTI 6 This is multi selection 6 MULTI 7 This is multi selection 7 MULTI 8 This is multi selection 8 MULTI 9 This is multi selection 9 10 MULTI 10 This is multi selection 10 REM Ahora invoca el di logo llamando a la subrutina BASIC CALL digCET REM Chequea para ver si el di logo fue cancelado y saca por pantalla el REM mensaje REM apropiado Un di logo cancelado devolver bien ID 1 si el di logo REM fue cerrado REM del men de sistema o ID 201 cuando el bot n de cancelar fue REM seleccionado IF dlgCETENDBTN 1 MSGBOX Dialog canceled from the system menu QUIT ELSE IF dlgCETENDBTN 201 MSGBOX Dialog canceled with the Cancel button QUIT IFEND IFEND REM Saca los resultados del di logo por consola 85 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 PRINT PRINT The state of the disable check box was dligCETDISABLE PRINT PRINT The contents of the filename edit control is dlgCETFILENAME PRINT REM Saca por pantalla la caja de listado d
141. T W32 Application Builder Development System will be installed into the following directory If you would like to install it into a different directory drive use the browse list below Destination Directory CACETLIB 932 E 932m E alex amp Archivos de programa amp asd E b416r bin i e zj Corel Chapter 1 Installation guide This document is a tool for developers who want to build an installer for your software incorporating the necessary files CET BASIC as part of the installation Thus the developer could make a single installer for their own software without the customer or the developer himself have to make the process of installing the software on each machine CET runtime separately This document was written for version 9 31a w 32 but has notes on other versions I CETBIN The CET runtime installer sets by default C 1 CETBIN as target directory but should be able to run on almost any other directory Most parts of the runtime CET is housed in that directory Developer may want to install the software application in the same directory as CET runtime components thus avoiding the need to create a new directory on the user s computer bcheck exe bcopy exe bcreate exe blist exe brun err butil err butil err butil msg cbeprint dll added on version 9 30 cetauth exe cetkprnt exe cetprnt1 bat cetrt dll dcheck exe runw32 exe IL WINDOWS The CET runtime installer does not i
142. T W32 can show 24 rows and 80 columns of characters if you change this setting to use a font kind which show the full number of rows and columns For example if you set the following values in the environment variables file B_MAXCOLS 133 B_MAXROWS 26 You must use a font that can display 132 columns and 25 rows B_DOTEQCOMMA From 9 31 u version Allows you to press the point on the numeric keypad is dispatched the keyboard buffer 1 7 Installation of drivers dongle or keys Protection w 32 for Windows NT 2000 XP There are two types of dongles as the destination of the same USB Parallel The difference is in the installation For parallel dongles port If you are compiling and or running programs under Windows NT you must install the drivers of the Key Protective CET No special drivers are required under Windows 9x The drivers of the protection key are included in the installation CD in the Drivers Driver Pills NT 2000 For USB dongles port You just have to install the drivers located on the CD in Drivers Driver usb tablet and then put in your port 1 7 Key protection activation For paralels dongles 1 Download the driver from the direction http www omegasystems com utiles ntdrvr exe 2 Run the self extracting downloaded to decompress the Sentinel 3 From the folder where you unzipped the Sentinel run SETUPX86 EXE then enter the menu functions to press Install Sentinel Driver 4 Fo
143. The creation parameters CREATE PARMS column The information returned by TYPES is only required for advanced operations on the source files as add new tables or columns The following example shows how to use the keyword TYPES It is assumed that the source file supports up to 30 types dim type 30 9 mat read 1 types type print print Data Types print For 1 to 30 if type i 1 then goto endtype print type 1 1 type 1 2 type 1 3 type 1 4 type 1 5 print type 1 6 type 1 7 type 1 8 type 1 9 wait next 1 endtype SOOO SV ON ONES 209 SNO ES COLUMNS Returns all table names of the columns in the specified table Three values are returned for each column the name the precision of the field the field type Requires REQUERY source files to ensure that all records are updated No information is returned to the program A SQL SELECT statement can also be used to select a number of columns in a specific table The SELECT statement can contain many options Maximum length of 2048 characters The simplest form is SELECT FROM lt table gt columns gt name gt lt numcol gt where Column name is either a list of column names separated by the comma or an asterisk to select all columns table is the name of the table to which you
144. The show argument determines how it will be displayed the application Valid values are 1 in a normal window 2 in a window icon minimized 3 in a maximized window full screen Once the application is finished control returns immediately to the calling program See function in programs W32DEMOS examples to see how it works and could also use the cProcessStat Since CSH CSI are designed to run MS DOS commands you can run Windows applications using CSI Currently it can be done under Windows NT but not under Windows 116 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions Also note that you can use to launch executables cWinExec DOS under Windows NT but the argument show work differently If a file is created Pif with the property windowed then the values will be 1 As anormal window 2 As a window icon minimized 3 As anormal window The argument showing no effect on a DOS program that runs from a file Bat Refer to implementation notes in the appendix for more information on using the CSI sentence See Annex implementation notes statements about the use of CSI CWallPaper This routine can be used to display an image as wallpaper in the main application window The image must be available in a format Windows bitmap ie BMP or DIB The syntax is Call cWallPaper path x y w h Where Path Is the full path name of the file Dib or Bmp to be displayed X Y Are the column and row of the uppe
145. a la copia de seguridad m pA critorio E a Disco de 3 4 2 C en marivi en Puesto3 H 2 Manuales en Omega M 2 Cettest en Omega T ES Mis documentos gg Entomo de red Mi Malet n a m Am Cancelar call w32BrowseForFolder padre Seleccione el directorio destino para la copia de seguridad addrof texto addrof ret call w32FileCopyProgress padre origen destino addrof ret Copy all the files specified by the string source destination directory dialog showing the progress of the copy The parent parameter is the reference to the active application window It must be the value returned by the call to w32GetParent If the extension of the files specified in the source parameter is Will copy all the files and subdirectories complete structure The parameter ret return a nonzero value if the user canceled the copy or if an error occurred w32FileDeleteProgress call father source addrof ret w32FileRenameProgress call father source destination addrof ret w32FileMoveProgress call father source destination addrof ret w32ListFindItemPartial call lis string position addrof where Lets find rows of a list control from a specified position whose field number O begins with the string specified as a parameter The syntax is lis ID list control string text to be searched Position row numb
146. acter_set_name mysql addrof name 760 print conjunto de car cteres name 770 780 call cetmysql real_query mysql query addrof errno 790 if fnerrs real_query mysql errno lt gt 0 then goto close 800 810 call cetmysql info mysql addrof info 820 print Info info 830 840 call cetmysql store_result mysql addrof mysqlres addrof errno 26 Chapter 2 Overview 850 if fnerr store_result mysql errno lt gt 0 then goto close 860 870 call cetmysql num_rows mysqlres addrof rows 880 call cetmysql num_fields mysqlres addrof fields 890 print Resultado mysqlres filas rows Campos fields 900 print 910 920 dim FieldName fields 930 940 print Campo Tabla Campo Def Tipo Lon MaxL Dc Flags 950 for fieldnum 0 to fields 1 960 call cetmysql fetch_field_direct mysqlres fieldnum addrof nameS addrof table addrof def addrof types addrof length addrof max_length addrof lags addrof decimals 0 print using RRRRRRRRRRR LLLLLLLLLLL LLLLLLLL ttt FEE TF HARAN fLieldnum table name def types length max_length ecimal flags 80 FieldNameS fieldnum 1 name 90 next fieldnums 0 wait 0 fetch 0 call cetmysgl fetch_row_and_lengths mysqlres addrof mysqlrow ddrof lengths addrof errno 0 if
147. addrof text addrof index Text and returns the index internal value belonging to the element referenced by ref w32TreeGetParent call tree ref addrof padre_en_arbol Returns a reference to the parent of the element referenced by ref w32TreeGetChild call tree ref addrof son Returns a reference to the first child of the element referenced by ref w32TreeGetNextSibling call tree ref addrof brother Returns a reference to the next sibling of the element referenced by ref w32TreeGetEventsn call father tree button addrof etree addrof ptree Where n is a value from 1 to 9 Calling this function group can point to the tree controls system on which events generated by the user want to be notified The feature allows you to specify a dummy button ID whose associated section is the code to execute when an event occurs on the tree The last two parameters indicate the names of the variables that will hold at each instant information on the type of event occurred and its property The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father referring to the dialog box The value returned by the call to w32GetParent tree control identifier tree The value returned by the call to w32CreateTreeH button a value between 200 and 299 that designates the ID button number real or fictional whose associated section in SUB BtnClick subroutine code is executed when events occur etree
148. ahoma 13 0 0 0 0 0 Rem En cualquier otra seccion del dialogo se podra cambiar la fuente o cualquier otro atributo del control simplemente especificando ed100 como referencia del mismo en la funcion deseada w32ResizeWindowH por ejemplo REM iniend w32ResizeWindowH hand x y ancho alto addrof retorno Change the position and size of the control referenced by hand The following four parameters must be specified in pixels and indicate respectively the horizontal and vertical position of the left corner and the width and height that are assigned to the control w32CreateImageH call hand file x y width height addrof ret Draws an image Bmp whose full path is specified in the parameter file in the control referenced by hand Example Show the image stored in the file at position logo bmp 15 10 DLG1 dialogue with 270 pixels wide and 135 high pixles SUB dlglInit REM Initialize dialog save area REM inistart Rem poner el foco en un boton cualquiera 200 p ej para hallar la referencia al cuadro de dialogo Call cSetFocus dlglHDLG 200 Rem Obtener la referencia al dialogo Solo es necesario llamar a esta funcion una vez al inicio del dialogo call w32GetParent addrof padre call w32CreateImageH padre logo bmp 15 10 270 135 addrof ret REM iniend call w32EditENTERn hand IDbotonESC Where n is a value from to 9 Calling this function group al
149. al mysql_free_result 11 cetmysql free_result Frees memory used by a result set mysqlres mysql_get_client_info LL l get_client_info Returns information about the client version infos mysql_get_host_info 11 cetmysql get_host_info Devuelve una cadena describiendo la conexi n mysql addrof infos mysql_get_proto_info cetmysql get_proto_info Returns the protocol version used by the connection mysql addrof info mysql_get_server_info cetmysql get_server_info Returns the server version number mysql addrof info mysql_info cetmysql Devuelve informaci n de la consulta ejecutada m s recientemente mysql addrof Chapter 2 Overview mysql_init call cetmysgl init Initialize MySQL estrcutura addrof mysql mysql insert id mysql lis dbs Not_implenented use SHOW DATABASES mysql_num fields Call cetmysql num_fields Devuelve el n mero de columnas de un conjunto de resultados mysqlres addrof fields mysql_num_rows cetmysql num_rows Devuelve el n mero de filas de un conjunto de resultados mysqlres addrof rows mysql_ options Connection Time in seconds call cetmysql opt_connect_timeout mysql timeouts addrof errno Use compressed protocol client server call cetmysql opt_compress mysql addrof errno cetmysql opt_named_pipe mysql addrof errno Command to execute when connecting to MyS
150. al page specified does not match the physical page or any of the coordinates is lt 0 then the virtual page is equal to the physical page Left Integer absolute horizontal coordinate of the upper left corner in pixels Top Integer absolute vertical coordinate of the upper left pixel Width Integer virtual page width in pixels Height Integer Height of the virtual page in pixels 225 Chapter 14 Implementation Notes CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj VirtPage Left top width height 4 MACRO PrinterSetPage obj Left top width height PrinterResetPage obj DrawLine DesdeX DesdeY HastaX HastaY width style Draws a line between two points DesdeX Integer Horizontal position absolute starting point DesdeY Integer absolute vertical position of the starting point ToX Integer Horizontal position absolute destination point Toy Integer Vertical position absolute destination point Width Integer Line width in pixels Style Integer Line Style 0 solid line 1 Stripes 2 Points 3 Raya point 4 dash dot dot CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj Line DesdeX Desde Y HastaX HastaY Width Style 6 MACRO PrinterDrawLine obj DesdeX Desde Y HastaX HastaY Width Style DrawBox Left Top Width Height AnchuraLinea Style Draw a rectangle Left Integer absolute horizontal coordinate of the upper left corner Top Integer absolute vertical coordinat
151. all cetmysql use_result mysql addrof mysqlres addrof errno 2 9 12 Example of Using native APIs CET BASIC programs In the distribution includes the mysqlapi b program Compile the program mysqlapi b bl and run mysqlapi _cet_files_ If the variable is set correctly B_MYSQL the program connects to the MySQL server and draw on screen the contents of the table _cet_files_ Spend any table name to the program If the table name does not exist or 1f the program encounters any errors the screen will bring a message and exit the system The program uses existing definitions in the variable B_MYSQL for the MySQL host name user name the password of the user and the database The program expects the name of the table to be treated to be passed through the command line 10 def fnerr msg mysql errno 20 30 fnerr errno 40 50 if errno lt gt 0 60 call cetmysql error mysql addrof errors 70 print msg error errno errors 80 ifend 90 100 fnend 110 120 table cmdarg 1 25 Chapter 2 Overview 130 if len cmdarg 1 0 140 msgbox Uso mysqlapi lt nombre tabla gt 150 quit 160 ifend 170 180 call Bgetw32 ADDROF b_mysql B_MYSQL 190 print B_MYSQL b_mysgl 200 if LEN b_mysql 0 210 msgbox B_MYSQL no est definido 220 quit 230 ifend 240 250 host 260 user 270 passwor
152. all w32CalendarGetSel cal addrof a o addrof mes addrof dia Fecha de Cierre de Ejercicio Ex febrero AUNI m gt lun mar mi jue vie s b dom 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 23 Eb 25 2 3 9 10 Hoy 07 02 00 3 4 10 11 Retrieves the currently selected date in the calendar cal call w32CreateList x y ancho alto addrof lis 140 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Create a list report within the window that has focus The return value is necessary to refer to the list in the rest of the functions that operate on the same call w32ListInsertColumn lis titulo ancho alinea posi addrof ret Inserts a column in the list lis Title title associated with the column that appears in the header of the list Width column width in pixels Aligns Alignment of text entered in that column O Left 1 Center 2 Right Posi Index of the new column Starting at 0 Ret Returns the index of the new column or 1 on error Ejemplo Create prj Descripci n Unidades call w32ListInsertItem lis texto item addrof resu Inserts a new item in the list lis Text Text element associated with the field column 0 Item The index of the new item Starting at 0 Resu Returns the index of the new item 1 on error w32ListSetText call lis text item column addrof resu Sets the text value of a given sub item
153. alling cEnableMainWin The statement syntax is cShowMainWin call state Where state is an integer value either the value to make the main window visible or set to 0 to make it invisible Note that when you invoke a format with a call to the subroutine CALL the format will always be visible A call to cShowMainWin 0 in the last line of dialogue routine after a call to cShowForm and before EXIT lets you go from one format to another without displaying a text based window during the transition If the first thing your application is calling a format then you should add the sentence call cShowMain 0 in the subroutine cetwin b cetPreInit in the file The main window can also hide before showing a dialog In that case the dialog is visible and centered on the main window will remain invisible cShowStatusBar This function can be used to display or hide the status bar When the status bar is visible the window is automatically resized to fit the screen The CALL statement syntax is cShowStatusBar call status Where state is an integer that can be or 0 to hide the status bar to display or 1 You should use this feature in all application programs especially if you have used the cStatusText If this is the case we recommend that you call this function from the cetwin b file you are using A case in which only needs to make a call when you want to hide is cShowStatusBar cShowToolBar This function is used to display or
154. alog Di logo de Ejemplo q x Un Control de texto de line simple para introducir un nombre de archivo Usa el boton examinar para buscar el archivo desde una ventana You can add other buttons to their dialogues In dlgCET example a button labeled Browse was added so that the operator can enter a file name in the edit control specified by selecting an item from a File Browser window Open open file Note that the first character in the label Browse is underlined so that the button can be selected with a shortcut key The label was introduced as 8 Browse Each time a button is selected the dialog program detects the event and calls the subroutine BtnClick with the global variable CMDID with the ID of the button This allows you to add specific code to check the ID and conditionally run the appropriate operations This process is explained in detail in the source files of the dialogue 7 8 4 ContEdit text An edit control is used to read an input by the user Recognizes all as usual editing keys such as Delete Insert Backspace Beginning and End If another line is introduced automatically performs the bleeding of words and move the words that do not fit down the next line To add an edit control click the menu item corresponding controls and release the mouse button at the position you want to place the control When you press the left mouse button the word value is displayed above the control A double click on the
155. am E Ends at the finish line Renumbering given on the command line When omitted the default is the last line of the program U Removes all line numbers from the source file Renumber Note that portions of a file can cause that these lines are moved to preserve the previous numerical order The options can be in any order given that the parameters associated with these options should be in correct order For example the following command lines renumbered all fuente by file the result of its output goes to file dest bak Brenum to fuente b des bak The following examples all produce the same results fuente b be renumbered from line 200 to line 300 The new lines renumbered begin with the number 600 and will increase to 5 on 5 The result goes to xfuente bak Fuente b Brenum xfuente bak NIBE 600 5200300 Brenum fuente b b 200 e 300 n 600 1 5 xfuente bak Brenum n600 be 5 200 300 fuente b xfuente bak 12 7CETLNK32 command CETLNK32 the program used to create a library of object files that can linkarse the main program using the library flag The syntax is cetInk32 lib out libreria lib fich1 obj Obj library Specifies the file name bookstore to create filel Specifies the name of the object file to include in the library Indicates that all object files the current working directory must be included in the library Both examples miobjlib lib create a library called the current working file cetlnk32 lib
156. an be used to get the values to pass cSelectFont to change the current font It requires no arguments The CALL statement syntax is call cFontValues For example PRINT Any text or line graph to show LINPUT to CALL cFontValues END Run the program once compiled and select the desired font from the Font menu All values requiring routine cSelectFont be shown by a dialog box This procedure was discussed in detail in section Changing defaults Framework Windows in the previous chapter cForceExit This routine is used to force the program to end without displaying the OK button in the message box Takes no arguments The CALL statement syntax is call cForceExit When it reaches the END statement the default action is to display a message box and wait for the operator to click on OK If you call cForceExit before running an END statement will cause the program to exit immediately and close the window cGetCursor This function is used to get the current position of the cursor column and row The return values are relative to the current window The CALL statement syntax is cGetCursor call ADDROF row ADDROF column Where row returns the row or coordinate column returns the column or coordinate x cGetMouse This function is used to return the mouse position in screen coordinates are relative to the window The statement syntax is cGetMouse call ADDROF row ADDROF column Where row returns the curre
157. an point to the system controls whose list of events generated by the user want to be notified The function allows you to associate an ID to list events to distinguish this control has occurred The last three parameters indicate the names of the variables that will hold at each instant information on the type of event occurred and its properties This instruction implements the same functionality as w32ListGetEventsn except that the event notification is done differently to prevent some unwanted effects of change in focus that occurred sometimes when you used 177 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 the previous version Requires 9 32ma version from which the runtime system to process the event CETW32 special number 15 by which it can detect additional notifications The value of the variable reserved CMDID contain the ID of the control that generated the event The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father referring to the dialog box The value returned by the call to w32GetParent lis control identifier list The value returned by the call to w32CreateListH ID value that designates the list ID Event variable name that will contain the value of the number of events produced at each instant Param1 the first property of the event It returns 1 if not applicable Param2 the second property of the event It returns 1 if not applicable The information available for each type of event is as follows
158. an to create an edit control text for each item 3 Run W32APBLD and select the Import Dialog Template from the File menu You can click the Browser button to find the file Txt easier The default extension is Txt The file will be converted and charged with default properties dialog All items will be converted to text labels controls The Settings command in the View menu can be used to modify the conversion process to use the next time you run the Import Dialog Template The properties of the Dialog from Text Template are PROPIEDAD EFECTO Conversion pairs This property can be used to convert one character to another S Use the comma to separate elements decimal conversion pair eg FROM TO and use a semicolon to separate multiple pairs Example 93 32 91 30 String separator The default is to use three blanks as separator two text elements A blank character is represented by b For example if you specify in this property b b b will be assumed that each text element will end with a colon followed by three spaces Edit Control This property makes adding a text editor after each text control label Fixed font This property will make a fixed font is used in all text controls When you turn your screen into a dialog you can change all the properties of the controls as well as normal dialogue 7 7 Defining a dialogue or a display format W 32 dialog editor lets you create display formats and dialogue boxes A dis
159. and thus improves performance w32ChooseColor call father 1 g b addrof network addrof green addrof blue addrof ret Displays a dialog box so the user can select a color or define your own custom colors which are stored in successive calls to this function is performed within the same instance of the program 2 a 204 Rojo fia2 Sat 114 Verde a ColorlS Lum fi 27 Azul 1 Color x Colores b sicos Definir colores personalizados gt gt Aceptar Cancelar The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father is the reference to the main window active must be the value returned by w32GetParent The following three parameters determine the color that will show up as selected when this dialogue 1 value of the red component of the color Valid values are 0 255 g value of the green component of the color Valid values are 0 255 b value of the blue component of the color Valid values are 0 255 The following three parameters determine the color that the user has chosen network value of the red component of the color Valid values are 0 255 green value of the green component of the color Valid values are 0 255 blue value of the blue component of the color Valid values are 0 255 Ret if the user pressed OK this parameter is set to 1 w32DeleteObject call Object This function has the effect of freeing memory objects mostly
160. arance of the menu and its associated toolbar contains a variety of commands that can be used to correct defects in the appearance and operation of the format The commands are organized by category in the menu Are covered here in the same order 7 9 1 Alignment The controls align one at a time adjusting is normally a difficult task and takes a long time The first group of commands can be used to precisely align a group of controls selected according to the following rules If only a control has been selected these commands are grayed out on the menu command Effect Left alignment aligns a group of controls arranged vertically so that it will be flush with the leftmost 74 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 Align Right Aligns a group of controls vertically arranging them so that they will be flush with the far right Upward alignment horizontally align the controls under which it is more upwards Down Alignment will align controls horizontally according to who is further down Depending on how they are arranged controls can be difficult to use the method to select controls rodeo individuals who want to align In this case click on one of the controls you want Then hold down the CTRL key and click on the other you want to add to the group Clicking on the currently selected control will delete the rest of the group For example suppose you have three or four groups of texts and edit controls all in the same row Select the entire row
161. are accessing Numcol 1s the number of columns that was selected MAT READ to not use a SELECT statement the correct usage is READ 5 O0 SELECT FROM Authors NumCols Added a new keyword RESULTCOLUMS for READ statements After being successfully executed a SELECT statement you can use this keyword to get a description of colomnas have been selected Column returns three values the name the precision t the type of the column For example READ 1 SELECT FROM SECTION NumCols DIM col NumCols 3 128 Chapter 10 ODBC support MAT READ 1 RESULTCOLUMNS col After any SELECT statement will be positioned at the beginning of the recordset We have added four new keywords to the READ statement to improve mobility through the records MoveFirst is positioned before the first record the first record becomes READNEXT MoveLast is positioned behind the last record READPREYV returns to the last record MOVE num Moves to a position relative to the current position Negative values mean travel backward A zero value causes no change EOF is returned if moving backward principle is reached or if moving forward end is reached Starus Returns an index of the current record The first record is record 0 If EOF will return the value 1 If you could not determine the index return 2 Note that if you make a MoveLast and then does MovePrev or MOVE 1 the current record is the last record but because ODBC STATUS retur
162. argument to run the program compiled with version 8 14 For example 64 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 client cetsd When you leave the image you want to capture press ALT PAGEDOWN at once and then the image is stored in a file called cetsd001 txt If they were more of a screen that were caught then be stored in files cetsd002 txt cetsd003 txt etc These files are crushed in a new execution The text files are stored in the current working directory If the application changes the working directory during execution then you have to look for files Note that any graphic character that were used to create boxes on the screen will not display graphics as characters in the text editor Add a control group if you want to create the same effect in the new window that you design 2 Edit the image file This step is optional but is used to make modifications For example if you want to change the labels If you plan to use keys in the program before after 1 Company amp Company Importantly default W32APBLD uses three spaces as field separator text therefore in the following example consider three items and give rise to three label controls 1 Company 0 1 Company 0 Although it is very easy to delete extra controls in a dialog we suggest you use the property Pairs Conversion Becoming then to convert extra characters such as brackets to blanks before the file is converted We recommend it especially if you pl
163. ase One drawn text introduced by LINPUT information and finally closed the window to continue Under Windows this will typically with a dialog box Whether you are working with a display format or a dialog box the dialog editor generates a BASIC program that can be modified later 2 5 Subroutines BASIC Development System w 32 CET provides special statements that can be used to link linkar program modules that call BASIC subroutines within a single executable For example the head of a subroutine has the following format SUB module name SUB defines a subroutine that can be called from the main from other subroutines BASIC or BASIC There are two rules for sharing BASIC variables Any variables referenced within the same module or program source file B refers to the same variable This is evident Any variable that is used in two modules of different sources are different unless defined by global judgment This will be true even if two variables have the same name The variables that either are completely independent module unless specifically defined as global allows you to write and compile separate BASIC subroutines and then link them linkarlas in a single executable without having to worry about possible collisions between variable names separate modules Thus new sentences are introduced as GLOBAL BASIC to define global data CLEAR to clear all variables and dimensioned string tables and EXIT is used to
164. ase called w32 que must already be created _cet_files_ Table must also be created in the way explained above 2 9 17 Creating ISAM file to conversion In the example we use an indexed file with the first two records in a different format than the rest of the file First create the file with Bcreate bcreate example keylen indexed reclen 100 20 Then write data to the file using the following program in BASIC CET open 1 example update indexed 30 Chapter 2 Overview rem escribe los registros iniciales cada registro contiene un campo num rico y otro entero write 1 0001 1234 5678 1234 write 1 0002 8765 4321 8765 rem escrib l resto del fichero con registros que contienen un campo alfanum rico otro entero y el ltimo num rico for i 1 to 9 write 1 Record STRS 1 Record number amp STRS 18 i 100 15 i 1111 1111 next i close 1 List the contents of the file using the blist command blist example 23222 example Indexed Key Length 20 Record Length 200 ass OO Oa 1234 5678 1234 0002 8765 4321 8765 Recordl Record number 1 101 1111 1111 Record2 Record number 2 202 2222 2222 Record3 Record number 3 303 3333 3333 Record4 Record number 4 404 4444 4444 Record5 Record number 5 505 5555 5555 Record6 Record number 6 606 6666 6666 Record7 Record number 7 707 7777 7777 Records Record number 8 808 8888 8888 Record9 Re
165. atures available 218 Chapter 14 Implementation Notes Chapter 14 Implementation Notes 14 1 Introduction This section has been created to cover the generic information you need to deploy a Windows w 32 The application window size and location When running a program w 32 this entire window used by default The starting position is x 0 and y 0 in coordinates relative to points You can change this position by passing the argument wposX Y within line arguments when you run the program For example the following command opens a window starting at position 100 50 points test wpos100 50 The initial size can be changed using the command line option vsizeX Y To facilitate the concept of points pixels remember that a character displayed in the default font courier 9 points is about 8 points wide and 13 points high 14 2El Default PIF file Each time you run a DOS command from within Windows by default the command will run DOS full screen mode although you can always press ALT ENTER This also applies to programs w 32 running MS DOS commands through CSI CSH When you call DOS normally tends to produce a flash because the screen is cleaned to remove the program in a DOS window When the program ends you will see another flash due to the reverse process To avoid this flash change the default Windows to run DOS programs in a hidden instead of using the entire screen This is done using the PIF editor to modif
166. atures explained in this chapter In this example the information entered in the dialogue is passed to the main program and there is printed on the screen The program is fully explained cetdemo b and so we have included below MAIN REM Un programa ejemplo que saca por pantalla una caja de di logo REM multifunci n REM Las siguientes variables globales definen los controles en el REM di logo GLOBAL dlgCETENDBTN GLOBAL digCETFILENAME GLOBAL digCETOPT1 GLOBAL digCETOPT2 GLOBAL digCETDISABLE 84 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 GLOBAL MAT digCETSINGLE GLOBAL MAT digCETMULTI REM Las siguientes variables globales estan definidas para pasar el REM contenido de la caja REM de listado al di logo y permitir al programa determinar qu conjunto REM de alfanum ricos REM a saca por pantalla en la caja de listado de selecci n sencilla GLOBAL MAT FIRST GLOBAL MAT SECOND GLOBAL MAT MULTI GLOBAL USESECOND REM Dimensiona la matriz de caja de listado DIM FIRST 10 SECONDS 3 MULTI 10 REM Inicializa el flag de la segunda matriz a falso e inicializa los REM elementos de la caja de REM listado USESECOND 0 FIRST 1 This is selection 1 FIRST 2 FIRST 3 This is selection 3 FIRST 4 FIRSTS 5 This is selection 5 FIRST 6 This is selection 6 FIRST 7 This is selection 7 Y FIRST 8 This is selection 8 FIRST 9 This is selection 9 FIRS
167. before they appear on screen When using this feature it is important to remember that the index values of the selected item will probably not match the array index and initial Although you can use the function to return the alphanumeric cGetlBoxString today it has been selected we suggest that it is easier to use the BASIC MAT SORT to sort alphanumeric matrix before initializing the contents of the list box This procedure will simplify your code because both index values are always the same When you add a list box control remember that your content is not set in the dialog editor This control must be initialized in the BASIC source code In the dialogue example this is done with a subroutine call dlgCETINIT cAddlBoxContents The current alphanumeric must be removed by the screen are in cetdemo b main program file Dialogue example also illustrates how the current contents of the list box can be changed at run time by clicking the special button Next designed for this purpose Special functions are also available to add delete and insert an item into the list at the time of execution All these features are explained in detail in the section of the source file dialog 7 8 7 Radio buttons A radio button looks like a check box with a circle While the check boxes are separate controls that may be enabled or disabled independently radio buttons are defined as a group so that only one may be selected simultaneously If a radio button in a grou
168. beled Disable Enable Off On around the checkboxes It has created a control group without tag around text controls editing and button controls that ask the operator to enter a filename 7 8 6 Listboxes A list box is similar to a combo box except that the user can not enter a reciprocating element The user can select either nothing or one or a group of elements of the list Dialogue dlgcet example uses two list boxes one for easy selection and another to make a multiple selection of items The selection list box shown below simple with the Next button can be used to draw on screen the next set of options 71 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 x Pulsando sobre el bot n siguiente se mostrar Siguiente el siguiente elemento de la lista de selecci n simple Lista Sample Line 1 simple de Sample Line 2 selecci n Sample Line 3 Sample Line 4 The list box controls accept an array of alphanumeric a virtually unlimited number of items the screen takes the elements in a list of up to 15000 elements and allows the user to select By default the list box will have a vertical scroll bar The properties of the sample list box may be established as follows Property Value Effect LBOX300 BASIC Variable The variable that can be used in a BASIC program to reference the data after the variable has been defined with GLOBAL Control ID ID 300 The value associated with the control Sorted on Sorted Sorts the items before t
169. box No se permiten las unidades de red CASE 5 Msgbox No se permiten las unidades de CD ROM CASE 6 Msgbox No se permiten los discos RAM CEND ifend w32keybd_event char char This function can be used to enter a character in the input buffer as if it had been entered by the operator Char The character you want to enter Char The character s ASCII code 137 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 w32Skeybd_event_down key This function can be used to simulate a keypress Key One of the following values BACKSPACE 8 TAB 9 RETURN 13 SHIFT 16 CONTROL 17 ALT 18 PAUSA 19 BLOQ MAY 20 ESCAPE 27 ESPACIO 32 AV PAG 33 RE PAG 34 FIN 35 INICIO 36 CUR IZQ 37 CUR ARR 38 CUR DER 39 CUR ABJ 40 INSERT 45 SUPR 46 0 a T9 48 57 Identicos a los valores ASCII tata tz 65 90 Identicos a los valores ASCII Teclas de funci n Fl a F12 112 123 w32Skeybd_event_up key This function can be used to simulate the release of a key w32Move Window titulo x y width height addrof retcode Change the position and size of the last open window whose title equals title Retcode Zero indicates error w32RemoveDirectory dir addrof retcode This function deletes the specified directory The directory must be empty Retcode Zero indicates error w32SetForeground Window titulo addrof retocode Active window set as the last open window whos
170. cetuser rc the cetbin default the name of the new project located in the directory local If the name of the project and the executable are the same need to change the names of the resource files in order to avoid a conflict between the source files containing BASIC code If you do not want to use a copy of cetlib files you can 1 Write the name of other resource files previously created or imported using the import that shows a dialog to select files This method is recommended when a file is modified you want to use in this project 2 Choose Create an Empty Project void project resource files when you already have a set of resource files that will be added to the file using the Add maix This method is recommended when you create a project that will work with other Y C Basic Files executable files subprojects testwin b Note that if you add the compiled versions of these files extensions Obj and i mica ag aie Or cat iles Res W32APBLD not create additional copies in the current directory ero In our example the names of the project and the executable file are the same so E Object Files we have introduced testuser testwin and filenames as resource The program healed ia automatically adds the By Rc thus avoiding a conflict with the name of our 3 Sub Projects source file test b When you press the Create a dialog box will appear like save as it will ask the name of the directory where
171. change the operating mode of the system implementation For example if you want to port an application from the operating system and wants THEOS w 32 programs operate in the same way load the following variable SET B_EMULATE THEOS Variables Execution System as B_EMULATE be loaded into a special initialization file When the application starts the system looks for a file execution with the same name as the application with the W32 in the Windows directory usually Windows If the initialization file for a specific application does not exist or can not be found will be used instead the default file W32APBLD w32 Any program chained or bound to always use the same main initialization program that is using the main program The initialization file is editable W32APBLD w32 is a text file that loads all environment variables to null or empty strings so as to use the defaults Edit the file or preferably a copy to load any variable to a specific value Its content should not be replaced when installing a software update For a list of available environment variables run OBW32 without any parameters These appear grouped by function 3 7 1 Variables related to the compiler and runtime system These variables indicate the location of the compiler runtime system and its components thus avoiding having to update the autoexec bat file 3 7 2 B_CETBIN Indicates the location w 32 compiler By default this variable is updated B_CETBIN CAC
172. chero REM Toma todos los valores y escribe el registro REM Primeramente toma el n mero de factura como clave CALL cGetCombo inviHDLG 701 ADDROF key REM Copia todos los valores de control a la matriz del registro ctrl 101 for i 1 to 22 CALL cGetEditText inviHDLG ctrl ADDROF rec i ctrl ctrl 1 next i CALL cGetCombo inviHDLG 700 ADDROF rec 23 REM Escribe la matriz del registro al fichero indexado y limpia REM el flag de documento modificado y todos los controles mat write 1 key rec docModified 0 gosub clear ctrls REM Si es una nueva factura a adir el n mero a la lista de caja combo REM y obtiene el siguiente n mero disponible if newFlag call cCComboAddString invi HDLG 701 str newlnvoice newlnvoice newlnvoice 1 newFlag 0 dataEntered 0 ifend REM Espera por otra pregunta del numero de factura y entonces REM va de vuelta al control de factura gosub WaitForlnvoice call cSetFocus inviHDLG 701 exit CASE 203 REM Bot n de cancelaci n REM Cancela la operaci n actual Limpia todos los controles de edici n REM y doc modificados y flags de factura nueva gosub clear ctrls docModified 0 newFlag 0 dataEntered 0 REM Espera a la contestaci n de otro numero de factura y entonces REM vuelve de nuevo al control de factura gosub WaitForlnvoice call cSetFocus inviHDLG 701 exit CASE 204 88 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32
173. cord number 9 909 9999 9999 2 9 18 Analyzing the isam file Run the utility bsqlconv to discover the structure of the file bsglconv example Should shows following Input file example Indexed file example Key Length 20 Record Length 200 Record Record1 Inconsistent type 4 of field 1 Expected 2 The message list by the utility means that the registration key file with Record1 has a different format than all previous records in the file If the utility gets a message like this then the file will not become a single MySQL table Should be used two or more tables The first table will receive the records from the beginning of the file until the record preceding the record with key Record1 Consider just this part of the input file bsgqlconv exampl t Recordl The utility will draw onscreen Input file example To Recordl Indexed file example Key Length 20 Record Length 200 No inconsistencies found drop table if exists example create tabl xampl Key CHAR 20 BINARY NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY Fldl FLOAT 31 Chapter 2 Overview F1d2 SMALLINT TYPE InnoDB replace _cet_files Name Type Reclen Keylen Table Key Record values example I 200 20 example Key Fldl Fld2 load data infile c tmp example txt into table example fields terminated by enclosed by lines terminated by rin As you can see the utility says tha
174. correct and the MySQL server is running you should see below mysql host lt host gt user root password lt pw gt w32 Welcome to the MySQL monitor Commands end with or g Your MySQL connection id is 13 to server version 4 0 10 gamma max Type help or h for help Type Xc to clear the buffer mysql gt Now run the scipt example1 sql mysql gt source examplel sql Query OK 0 rows affected 0 03 sec Query OK 0 rows affected 0 06 sec Query OK 1 rows affected 0 00 sec Query OK 2 rows affected 0 00 sec Records 2 Deleted 0 Skipped 0 Warnings 0 The utility runs mysql script and display the results list When four messages OK means that the table was created and the data were imported into the database Now you can run the script example2 sql and import the rest of the data file mysql gt source example2 sql Query OK 0 rows affected 0 00 sec Query OK 0 rows affected 0 05 sec Query OK 1 row affected 0 00 sec Query OK 9 rows affected 0 00 sec Records 9 Deleted 0 Skipped 0 Warnings 0 Now you have all the original ISAM data file transferred to the MySQL database next step will be to modify the sources CET BASIC using the 2 9 21 Modifing CET BASIC programs Note that changing CET BASIC programs will only be required if the ISAM indexed file split into two or more tables MySQL If the file format is homogeneous isam file may be transferred to a single MySQL table and you will
175. croll if the width of the control is exceeded An asterisk Password on every time you type a character Read Only on Read Only The content of the field can not be modified Fixed Font on Font fixed The characters on the screen in a fixed font instead of a proportional font true type so that the user input from the screen can be pulled by a columnar format You can also create multi line controls If the control is sized large enough to make the screen all data have been entered you will see a scroll bar by default The following properties are enabled only in multiline editors Property Value Effect Want Return on Necessary Return It will require introducing lt Enter gt when introducing a data VScroll on see a vertical scroll bar Hscroll on see a horizontal scroll bar Auto VScroll on input automatically produce a vertical scroll if the width of the control is exceeded Test on Left Left text The text will be left justified within the control The default option Center on Text Text Center The text will be centered within the control Right on Text Text Right The text will be right justified within the control Note that a single control line can only be aligned to the left By default multi control bleeding occur in the next line if the input exceeds the width of the control If property is used VScroll scroll bar appears when the control s size is not large enough to represent the data Activating or HScroll VSc
176. ction This instruction terminating when entering an instruction L P or Q or when it reaches the end of the command line operator indicates the relationship field data must comply with the constant for the record to be selected EQ equal to NE not equal to GT greater than GE greater than or equal to LT less than LE less than or equal Constant defines the constant to be used in the comparison Since the constant must be enclosed in single quotes it can not contain this character Under UNIX the single quote has special meaning to the shell and must be preceded by a backslash character 1 If the data field being compared with the constant is defined as numeric then the constant Bsort convert a numeric value OR 1s used to indicate the beginning of a selection criteria a set of alternate registers If omitted when performing multiple specifications shall be selected that are linked by the AND link espesal Output specifications that can allow up to 32 fields indicate the check is written to the output register These fields are completely separate from those used for classification If you omit this option the full log entry is written to the output file For this reason this option is also called limited output option Enter the specifications in the following format Note that the field variables and off field are used in the same manner as mentioned under section especlave except that no longer needs the o
177. d editable Allows the user to edit the cell contents of the grid depending on whether the value of the last parameter is 1 or 0 By default all cells are editable by the user except those defined as protected Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetEnterMode call grid so Defines whether to change the active cell when the user presses the ENTER key according to the following possible values for the second parameter 1 The selection will move to the cell to the right or to the next row if no more columns to the right In any case never selects a cell belonging to a column whose width is 0 This mode of displacement is the one with the default grid 2 selection will move to the cell in the same column but in the next row 3 Not going to change the active cell or selected when the user presses ENTER In this case the grid will generate a notification event of pressing the ENTER key Event No 31 Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later call w32GridSetGridLineColor grid r v y Sets the color of the grid lines that delimit the cells r value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are 0 255 Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later 174 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 call w32GridSetHeaderHeight grid height Sets the height of the r
178. d 4GB Technically the size of a one dimensional table is unlimited and could resized up to 200 000 items The only limitation in addition to the maximum of 4GB is the combined size of real and virtual memory swap file SWAP For example suppose we have 16Mb of memory and try to run a program that requires 20MB In this case the unused programs and data parts less recent use in your program will be flushed to disk This does not affect efficiency means you can run programs larger than the available memory on your computer 3 3 Creating W 32 programs The compiler accepts programs w 32 sources that have been saved in ASCII format as these are easily ported between different operating systems The THEOS Compatibility Guide specifies the information needed to carry BASIC source files from that environment To import existing programs in BASIC CET simply copy the source files into the desired directory If the source code is in a MS DOS with Windows built no need to change the files before recompiling W 32 new programs can create using any text editor but we recommend using the integrated development intone which has been designed for that purpose For more specific information see the Language Reference Manual CET BASIC For now it is only important to know that BASIC programs you create must have a B Case lines need not be numbered If you want to practice the features that are explained throughout this chapter we suggest that you use a
179. d CMDID contain the ID of the control that generated the event The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father reference to the dialog box The value returned by the call to w32GetParent lis control identifier list The value returned by the call to w32CreateListH ID which means the ID of the list Event the variable name that will contain the value of the number of events produced at each instant Param1 First owned event It returns 1 if not applicable Param2 Second Event property It returns 1 if not applicable The information available for each type of event is as follows Evento Descripci n Propiedad 1 Propiedad 2 Click con el bot n izq del rat n Item fila de la lista Sub item columna Cambio de estado Selecci n o Check Box Item fila de la lista 1 Doble click con el bot n izq del rat n Item fila de la lista Sub item columna Click con el bot n derecho del rat n Item fila de la lista Sub item columna Pulsaci n de una tecla Valor ver w32Skeybd_event_down 1 Click en el t tulo de una columna 1 Columna de la lista The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init In all dialogues that make up an executable should not be called more than once to the same function in this group Thus to define the event processing list controls three functions to be used Call w32ListGetEventsEx1 Call w32ListGetEventsEx2 Call w32L
180. d develop environment 5 8 W32 examples Projects W 32 Application Builder includes a number of example programs that have been created to illustrate many features of this product There has been a special example program a menu of programs other example This program is called W32DEMOS example Projects have been created for each of the programs examples All these projects files including executables are stored in the 1 cetlib samples by default Proyecto Descripci n w32demos prj A special menu program that runs other programs such cetdemo prj Dialogue example described in chapter w 32 Dialogue Editor invoice prj An invoice program with the display format example shown in Chapter w 32 Dialogue Editor calc prj A calculator program which contains the event processing example of buttons displayed in the dialog editor chapter w 32 odbc prj A program that uses the features described in Chapter ODBC suprint prj Un di logo ejemplo c mo se puede utilizar la funci n cEnumPrinters para conseguir informaci n aceca de las impresoras disponibles 5 9 Rename Copy or Move existing projects When you create a project all project information such as your name and location are stored in a binary file extension Prj When you add a file to a project the file is updated Prj to include the file name and location Since individual source files can be located anywhere in the system all locations within the file are stored as absolute path T
181. d of a record in binary format If the input is sequential file must specify the maximum length of the record to be read For example B 500 indicate a sequential binary file with a maximum record length of 500 bytes If detected Bsort record with a length greater than the specified error is generated It should also be specified sort key to set the the character s data field or subfield in the record of the input file on which will actually perform the sort It allows up to 32 sort keys When more than one key the first is the most significant and determine the sequence of the output file The key specifications are determined both by the fact that the input file is binary type like plain ASCII contains records 211 Chapter 12 Development Utilities The records are binary field delimiters to separate each field Records can contain strings whole fields of floating point numbers To order a binary file you must indicate it location of each field containing data that will be used If the data is of type integer or a floating point value you must also specify a field descriptor as shown in the following examples 2F a floating point value found in the field 2 3I an integer value found in the field 3 6 all characters in a string field 6 6 1 5 the first 5 characters of the string field 6 6 1 5D the first 5 characters of the string field 6 sorted in ASCII descending order 6 1 5N the first 5 characters of the string fi
182. d reading invoice invoice numbers exist The final bill is assigned to the key variable used to get the next available number REM Carga las m scaras para la validaci n y formateo de los campos PHONE Tel fono dim phone msk 6 phone map 6 for i 1 to 6 read phone msk phone map i next i data 44H HH HEHH 8 4 data H HHH H 8 4 data HHHHHHRHEP ES data Hit HH HHHH S amp 4 data HHHHHHH data Hi HHH REM Inicializa la caja de listado combo con los n meros actuales de factura dim invcs 10000 REM Abre un fichero indexado y busca las claves el n mero de factura REM Utiliza la ltima clave v lida para asignar un n mero nuevo de factura open 1 invtst update indexed 1 lastKey newlnvoice 1 while 1 readnext 1 key dummy if eof 1 then break inves i key i i 1 lastKey key wend iflastKey lt gt then newlnvoice VAL lastKey 1 REM Inicializa el control de combo Se asegura que el ltimo elemento de la REM matriz es puesto a NULL ya que cAddComboContents leer toda la matriz REM hasta que se encuentre un elemento NULL inves i call cAddComboContents inviHDLG 701 MATADDROF invcs REM Limpia los flag de documento modificado y factura nueva y cualquier REM matriz que no sea utilizada mas adelante docModified 0 newFlag
183. d to create and display the dialog Selecting a file extension Idh be charged the dialog selected within the dialog editor 2 Associated file extension B which contain modifiable source code Selecting a file extension B the code will be loaded into the text editor You can have both files open in different windows at the same time This feature will save you time multiwindow development 7 5 Save a dialog Each box has a property called prefix prefix By default this value is used as the name of the file dialogs This property is explained in the section Setting dialog or display formats When you try to save a new dialogue the editor will display a dialog box like Save As This feature allows you to check that no other file with the same name If there is cancel the operation and change the prefix of dialogue 7 6 Utility Dialog templates The build environment window includes this option will help you build templates dialogues from images of your old data entry screens this utility will speed much change old programs windows textual programs with multiple windows interface This mechanism makes all text fields are converted to type controls label followed optionally by a control of type text editor From here you can access and modify those controls Create templates dialogues is a simple process 2 or 3 steps 1 First create an ASCII text file that contains the image to be converted This is done using a special cetsd
184. d to obtain or upload any file environment variable W32APBLD w32 The statement syntax is Bputenv32 can be used to activate the environment variables to a value only during program execution The parameters and syntax of these functions are similar to functions and Bgetenv Bputenv 13 2 12 Bmemavl y Bmemmax These functions are supported only to provide compatibility with other products CET 217 Chapter 13 Routines performed in C 13 2 13 Bsernum Bsernum is used to obtain the serial number of the protection key dongle CET See SERIAL OPTION statement in the Language Reference Manual CET BASIC for another method of protection The statement syntax is CALL Bsernum ADDROF serno The parameters are serno Is the serial number programmed into the dongle CET 13 2 14 Functions of Program 13 2 15 Becho y Bnoecho Bnoecho Becho and can be used to enable or disable the character echo during operations LINPUT or INPUT No arguments used The syntax of this statement is CALL Becho CALL Bnoecho 13 2 16 Bkdshift Bkdshift function can be used to check the status of shift keys or switching within the PC keyboard These include the Shift Right Left Shift CTRL Num Lock Caps Lock and Insert Note that the sequence ALT lt key gt not supported because they are special key combinations used by Windows The statement syntax is CALL Bkbshift addrof key The parameters are key Returns an integer encoded where each bit repres
185. dar call The year value must be a 4 digit number w32ListFullRowSel call lis addrof return It enables when you select any line in the list lis all the same fields are marked If you want to set this property to the list should call this function only once after the creation of the list with w32CreateList 00008 ya Antonio L pez 000077 Francisco Gutierrez Factura Cliente Pago Ptas call w32ListDragDrop lis addrof retorno Allows the user to drag and change the order of columns in a list control without changing the internal reference to them from within the program If you want to set this property to the list should call this function only once after the creation of the list with w32CreateList call w32CreateTip texto addrof tip 144 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Un 39 D4 Coca Cola 350 This function can be used to display help text associated Multiline any control dialogues W32 CET Displays help text that is specified as a parameter and returns a reference to the control that should be used in subsequent function calls w32TipUpdateText Previously the focus should be placed on the control that you want to associate the help message Use call cSetFocus call w32TipUpdateText tip nuevotexto addrof retorno Update the help text associated with the control tip Previously the focus should be placed on the control that you want to update the help text
186. dateTextH tip control nuevotexto addrof return This function is identical to except w32TipUpdateText inserting a second parameter to specify the control reference value obtained with w32GetWindow This procedure avoids the need to put the focus on a control and thus improves performance w32TreeGetRect call tree position addrof L addrof top addrof der addrof background addrof ret Returns the coordinates relating to the current position of the tree tree of the upper and lower corner of the element determined by the reference position w32WinHelp call father fichero_ayuda operation value addrof ret Enables presents options for a help file Hlp The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father is the identifier of the dialog box from which you launch the function call Fichero_ayuda filename Hlp Operation is the code of the display mode to be used see examples Value is an additional parameter on the operation If you do not have to specify it will Ret return value 0 indicates error Examples Rem 11 presents the search index w32WinHelp call father videos31 hlp 11 addrof ret Rem 4 Help on using the help w32WinHelp call father videos31 hlp 4 addrof ret Rem 257 Search a keyword w32WinHelp call father videos31 hlp 257 CINTES VIDEO addrof ret w32ListGetColumnsOrder call lis cols addrof stri
187. default Vertical off This option has no effect on the appearance on screen when the smart button is ON As the moving scroll bar an event routine is called to notify the new position CMDID value will be the ID of the scroll bar has changed and CET_EVPARMI1 variable will contain the new position CGetScrollPos function can also be used to obtain the position of the scroll bar When necessary you can change the range minimum and maximum values and the position at the time of execution and running cSetScrollPos cSetScrollRange calls These functions are explained in the section of the Dialogue source files 7 8 9 Labels A text control is used to display a pull by up to 255 alphanumeric characters Although a text control can be used to head describing a group of controls typically used as a label for the corresponding edit control For this reason it can reference a label control as is done in other development tools Text controls may be used to associate a memory pegs interactive controls having no associated labels This is done by giving the text control mnemonic value character by preceding the text with a amspersand Then when the user enters the mnemonic key the focus moves to the next interactive control in the tab order never the focus is in a text control To add a text control choose the menu item move the cursor to the desired location and click to leave control in that position The word text will appear in a box with
188. display a character the character position multiplied by its width If you plan to use other sources other than the default Courier 9 or Terminal must cFontValues routine use for the parameters you need To use this feature compile a program like the one shown below PRINT Enter anything you want to see PRINT and how many lines of the text LINPUT A CALL cFontValues END Run the program once compiled When the program is waiting for input choose the Select Sources within the menu The Font dialog box will display the available fonts styles and sizes Choose one of the sources and press ENTER to respond to the judgment LINPUT Calling cFontValues will show all the parameters that need to happen anytime cSelectFont change the font type from within your application See chapter on Windows w 32 Functions for more information about these routines 4 5 1 Delete the Font menu If you plan to use the same type of presentation Windows in all or part of your application we recommend using the following procedures to modify a copy of the resource files instead of modifying each of its programs For example to remove the font menu 1 Copy the source code of the resource file in your working directory with a different name For example if your files are in w 32 1 cetlib and local directory is tst copy cetlib A cetuser rc tst A miusua rc 2 Modify the code in miusua rc blurring the lines showing the menu POPUP Fonts BEGIN M
189. drof retorno if retorno 1 FNConvertirAPDF 0 goto FINConvertiraPDF ifend SELECT ucase tipo CASE DOC Rem Abrir un documento existente de nombre origen con ruta completa call cetOleCreate ADDROF word Word Application Call cetOleGetProperty word Documents addrof docs call cetOleExecute docs Open 0 origen 1 call cetOleGetProperty word ActiveDocument addrof doc call cetOleExecute doc PrintOut 0 0 sleep 5 call cetOleExecute words Quit 0 0 1 call cetOleDestroy word CASE EXC Rem Abrir un documento existente de nombre origen con ruta completa call cetOleGet ADDROF ex Excel Application Call cetOleGetProperty ex Workbooks addrof books call cetOleExecute books Open 0O origen 1 call cetOleGetProperty ex ActiveWindow addrof aw call cetOleGetProperty aw SelectedSheets addrof ss call cetOleExecute ss PrintOut 0 0 sleep 5 call cetOleExecute ex Quit 0 0 call cetOleDestroy ex 200 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 CEND FNConvertirAPDF 1 FINConvertiraPDF call w32SetDefaultPrinter imppre addrof ret FNEND call cForceExit call Bgetcwd addrof dir aS FNConvertirAPDFS dirS amp cintal doc DOC Copia de cintal dir aS FNConvertirAPDFS dirS amp world xls EXC Copia de World dir quit RUTINA ENVIAMAIL The attached file contains the subroutin
190. ds 280 db 290 300 start 1 310 pos sch start b_mysgql 320 if pos lt gt 0 330 host b_mysql 1 pos 1 340 start pos 1 350 pos sch start b_mysgql 360 if pos lt gt O 370 user b_mysql start pos 1 380 start poss 1 390 pos sch start b_mysgql 400 if pos lt gt 0 410 password b_mysql start pos 1 420 db right b_mysql pos 1 430 ifend 440 ifend 450 ifend 460 470 print Host hostS 480 print Usuario user 490 print Palabra de Paso password amp 500 print Base Datos db amp 510 print Tabla table amp 520 530 query select from table limit 5 540 550 560 call cetmysql get_client_info addrof info 570 print Cliente info 580 590 call cetmysql init addrof mysql 600 print mysql mysql 610 if mysql 0 then quit 620 630 call cetmysql real_connect mysql host userS passwords db 0 0 O addrof errnos 640 if fnerrs real_connect mysql errno lt gt 0 then goto close 650 660 call cetmysql get_host_info mysql addrof infos 670 print Host info 680 690 call cetmysql get_server_info mysql addrof info 700 print Servidor infos 710 720 call cetmysql get_proto_info mysql addrof info 730 print Protocolo Infos 740 750 call cetmysql char
191. e must be 0 The index parameter is an internal value that can be stored associated with that item in the tree The parameter indicates whether children insert the item to be the ancestor of other lower level elements You must specify the value if positive and O if not more branches will hang below the element to be inserted The ref parameter returns a reference to the insert which should be used to refer to the element in any function that requires it Example The following lines of code produce the tree in Figure call w32TreeInsertItem tree Cap tulo 1 0 0 0 addrof cap1 call w32TreeInsertItem tree Capitulo 2 0 0 1 addrof cap2 call w32TreeInsertItem tree Partida 5 cap2 002001 0 addrof ret call w32TreeInsertItem tree Partida 8 cap2 002002 0 addrof ret Capitulo 1 Capitulo 2 Partida 5 Partida 8 call w32TreeImageList tree ima addrof ret Tree to tree associated image list referenced by ima w32TreeInsertItemEx call tree text padre_en_arbol index children ima addrof ref It has the same behavior as w32TreelnsertItem function except that it is possible to specify a last parameter indicating the index of the image list associated with the control that is displayed to the left of the item to insert Ca rbol de Cap tulos y Partidas H A Cap tulo 01 ACONDICIONAMIENTO DEL TERI E Partida 001 UD REPLANTEO DE OBRA E Partida 002 M3
192. e added is indicated as second argument This function can also be used to create own system variables The changes will be reflected instantly on the Environment Variables section of the System option on the control panel The return value is 0 if the operation was successful or not 0 if an error occurred Requires Seller CETEnv dll dated 19 06 2007 or later w32GetEnv call var_name addrof value Returns the value of the environment variable indicating system as the first argument In the event that there is no return the string Requires Seller CETEnv dll dated 19 06 2007 or later w32FtpGet call sServidor sUser sClave sPath sDestino addrof return 181 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 This feature allows you to download a file from a server using the FTP protocol Requires CETFTP DLL have the file in the working directory Rem El archivo CETFTP DLL debe estar en el directorio de los ejecutables retorno print crt clear sServidor ftp omega st es sUsuarioS seba omega st es sClaveS omega sRuta var www html cosas LigaF7b pdf call Bgetcwd addrof sDonde sDestino sDonde amp LigaF7b pdf print at 1 1 Descargando el archivo amp sRuta print at 1 2 En amp sDestino call w32FtpGet sServidor sUsuario sClave sRuta sDestino addrof retorno Msgbox Concluyo con retorno amp strs retornos call w32FtpPut sServidor sUsuario sClave s
193. e any program in the tst can be linked to the new file Obj with the following command The specified font will be used automatically OBW32 wo miven o tst tst b 4 5 3 Displaying the default toolbar You can also modify the Windows Manager to automatically display a toolbar The default toolbar consists of two buttons The first of these may be used as a quick way to display the Source Select menu The second button the Is quick access to Help About command Help About To display the toolbar change the cetPreInit subroutine in file copy cetwin b removing the comment REM of the following statement and recompile REM call cShowToolbar 1 When you call this routine will automatically make the toolbar reappear which was hidden when you run any of the programs compiled with the modified file cetwin b If you set a new toolbar with CToolBar routine see section Functions Window will automatically appear Otherwise will be used the default toolbar 4 5 4 Viewing the status bar by default The default status bar is a line at the bottom of the window that displays the status of the program in progress running and wait for input along with specific messages of the elements of menu The subroutine cetwin b cetPreInit in the file contains the code that activates the status line To implement this feature remove the following line commented out and recompile REM call cShowStatusBar 1 Calling this routine will automatically di
194. e casilla de verificacion rem Msgbox Ha cambiado el item amp strS l_item call w32ListGetSelltem lis addrof item if items lt gt 1 then call w32ListGetText lis item 0 addrof text addrof ret call cSetCtrlValue dlg1HDLGS 100 text ifend 178 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 CASE 3 Rem Doble Click en un campo Msgbox Doble Click en el campo amp str l_item amp amp str 1_sub CASE 4 Rem Click con el bot n de derecho en un campo Msgbox Click con bot n derecho en el campo amp str l_item amp amp str l_sub CASE 5 Rem Se ha pulsado la tecla Msgbox Tecla amp str 1_item CASE 6 Rem Click en la cabecera de la columna Msgbox Click en columna amp str 1_sub call w32ListSortItems lis 1_sub 0 1 addrof ret CEND CEND REM evtend CEND SEXIT SUB dlglInit REM Initialize dialog save area REM inistart call w32GetParent addrof padre call w32CreateListH padre 10 195 475 180 addrof lis call w32ListGetEventsExl padre 1lis 400 addrof evento addrof l_item addrof 1_sub REMOS iniend call w32TreeGetEventsExn padre tree ID addrof etree addrof ptree Where n is a value from 1 to 9 Calling this function group can point to the tree controls system on which events generated by the user want to be notified The function allows you to associate an ID to list events to distinguish this control has occurred The last two para
195. e connection mysql addrof nameS mysql_create_db Not implemented use CREATE DATABASE mysql_data_seek Call cetmysql data_seek Find an arbitrary row in the result set of a query mysqlres offsets mysql_debug Not implemented mysql_drop_db Not implemented use DROP DATABASE 22 Chapter 2 Overview mysql_dump_debug_info Not implemented mysql_eof Not implemented fetch_row_and_lengths mysqlrow returns 0 when the condition is detected eof mysql_errno Implicitly called by all functions that can set the value of errno and the result is returned in the argument of the function errno mysql_error Call cetmysql error Returns the error message of the most recently invoked MySQL function mysql addrof error mysql_fetch_field_direct call cetmysql fetch_field_direct Returns the type of a field in a table given its number mysqlres fieldnums addrof nameS addrof tables addrof def addrof types addrof length addrof max_length addrof flags addrof decimals mysql_fetch_fields Not implemented fetch_row_and_lengths mysql_fetch_row_and_lengths Call cetmysql fetch_row_and_lengths Go to the next row in the result set mysqlres addrof mysqlrows addrof lengths addrof errno cetmysql fetch_field_value mysqlrow lengths field addrof values Use fetch_field_value para acceder al valor del campo de la fila actu
196. e emailole b ENVIAMAIL that sends an email with an unlimited number of attachments and without any intervention by the user You will not need to be installed or configured a mail client program acting as user agent The performance parameters of the subroutine expects is servidorsmtp name or IP address of the SMTP server through which will be delivered to the mail Example smtp gmail com puertosmtp port number that will be shipping This value must specify the mail service provider Usually is 25 if not using the SSL protocol or the 465 if you use the SSL protocol E mail to the sender of the mail You can also specify the name of the sender For example Sender Name lt omegasystemstests O gmail com gt E mail to the recipient They can be several comma separated You can also specify the name of the recipient with the same format as in the previous example Post subject matter message Message Body attachments should be an array initialized with the full path of all files you want to attach usarautenticacion should take the value 0 if the SMTP server does not require authentication or 1 if authentication is required the latter value should be assigned to the following two parameters user Username with which to authenticate to the SMTP server in the event that this is required Usually usually coincides with the email address of the sender although the exact format you must specify the mail service provider pa
197. e files configured according to the documentation for the driver you can access these files from within the program source w 32 Standard statements such as OPEN CLOSE READ MAT READ WRITE WRITE MAT READNEXT READNEXT MAT MAT READPREV READPREV and may be used to access files through ODBC source All the values are written read from the source files are alphanumeric w 32 convert all alphanumeric values from to native types of source files automatically Note that B_ODBCERR environment variable must be updated to 1 in W32APBLD w32 file to display messages from any ODBC error which may occur in implementation 10 20pening a file To open a file in ODBC source use the OPEN statement with the INDEXED option either in form or in the form INPUT UPDATE The filename argument determines which type of ODBC source file will open and can be specified in one of two formats ODBCxx The first format brings up a dialog box so that the user can select from any of the source files that are currently configured The xx within ODBCxx is either a SS for a snapshot or DS for a dynaset A snapshot contains records that are valid when selecting the first time and then not kept current that is functions as if labor with a copy Mode dynaset maintains consistency with existing source files by checking if the record is still present and taking a new record otherwise A snapshot is faster to use and does not need to be continually accessing the source f
198. e information message icon anchotexto Width in pixels of the text to be displayed as a message to the user This value also influences the width of the elements of the list Flags numeric value associated with the visual style of the list It can be one or the sum of the following values 1 Displays the list with gridlines 4 Displays a check box to the left of each item in the list Selec_unica will be worth 1 if allowing only choose one option from the list to the user Will be 0 if it allows the user to select multiple options Selpordefecto string of zeros and or one to indicate the initial selection to be presented to the user This string will contain many characters as there are elements in the list of options selection string of zeros and ones to represent the final selection made by the user Return may have one of the following values indicating the button pressed by the user 1 OK 2 Cancel Example 192 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 w32ListView call 0 4 Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Select one or more options Check the items you want to select amp chr 13 by clicking on the boxes 1 0 32 250 4 0001 addrof value addrof ret The execution of this line of code displays the following dialog to the user x 7 Marque los elementos que desea seleccionar k Cancelar haciendo click en las casillas Ol valor 1 O valor 2 O valor 3 valor 4
199. e it is running another operation The syntax is cWaitCursor call expected Where waiting is an integer value within which one shows an hourglass cursor and 1 hides it any other value will be ignored or cause an error cWinExec This routine can be used to run a Windows application Note that this function transfers control to the specified program as does the judgment CSI As soon as the call is made cWinExec will run the next program statement See cCreateProcess and cProcessStat function to see how to start a process and verify its status to determine if another operation can be developed depending on the state The CALL statement syntax is cWinExec call path showing Where road specifies the full path name of the executable file This argument exists so you can replace the default search using the PATH Note that this argument only affect the executable Windows programs only look for a file in the current directory unless you specify a full path The search sequence is O The directory where the calling program is executed The current working directory The Windows or Windows system The directories set in the PATH directories within the variable set B LKPATH Note that this argument only affects the executable Windows programs are only searched in the working directory unless you specify the full path show specified will be displayed as the application For example CALL cWinExec notepad 1
200. e line remains in the line buffer 4 The print object drops all input content after the first sequence n This restriction will be removed in a future release Methods Create name mode creates the object not the print job begins Name String The name of the printer open the selection box if empty Mode String print lock modes Normal mode virtual mode disabled and need guidance to default printer Virtual Virtual Mode Lanscape landscape orientation Portrait Flip CALL CALL cetObjectCreate ADDROF obj Printer name mode 2 MACRO PrinterCreate obj name mode CreateCommon name mode creates a common object not the print job begins Name String The name of the printer open the selection box 1f empty Mode String print modes opening CALL CALL cetObjectCreateCommon ADDROF obj Printer name mode 2 MACRO PrinterCreateCommon obj name mode Destroy destroys the object cancel a print job is not yet finished CALL CALL cetObjectDestroy obj MACRO PrinterDestroy obj Begin name Starts a docuemnto Each document is a separate print job in the spooler The print spooler ensures that the document will not mix with others Name String name of the document The document name appears in the print status CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj Begin name 1 MACRO call PrinterBegin obj name End End document CAL
201. e of upper left corner Width Integer Width of rectangle Heigth Integer Height of the rectangle AnchuraLinea Integer Width in pixels of the rectangle boundary line Style Integer Line Style 0 solid line 1 Stripes 2 Points 3 Raya point 4 dash dot dot CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj Box Left top width height AnchuraLinea Style 6 MACRO PrinterDrawBox obj Left top width height AnchuraLinea Style DrawBitmap Name Left Top Width Height Prints a bitmap stored in a file whose name is specified The size fits the Width and Height Name String File name and path Nomenclature WINDOWS not THEOS Left Integer absolute horizontal coordinate of the upper left corner Top Integer absolute vertical coordinate of upper left corner Width Integer Width of the bitmap Height Integer Height of the bitmap CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj Bitmap name Left top width height 5 MACRO PrinterDrawBitmap obj name Left top width height 226 Chapter 14 Implementation Notes Properties Status Integer State returns the current state of the print 0 Ok gt 0 Error CALL CALL cetObjectGetProperty obj Status ADDROF status MACRO PrinterStatus obj status Page Width Integer width Returns the page width in pixels CALL CALL cetObjectGetProperty obj PageWidth ADDROF W MACRO call PrinterPageWidth
202. e selecci n sencilla REM Primero comprueba si se ha hecho una selecci n REM El contador ser 0 si no existe selecci n IF dlgCETSINGLE 1 lt gt O IF USESECOND 1 REM Obtiene el elemento 2 de la segunda matriz PRINT The single selected item was SECOND dlIgCETSINGLE 2 ELSE REM Obtiene el elemento 2 de la primera matriz PRINT The single selected item was FIRST dIgCETSINGLE 2 IFEND IFEND REM Saca por pantalla las opciones de la caja de listado de REM miltiselecci n PRINT PRINT The number of strings selected in the multiple selection list box was dlgCETMULTI 1 FOR I 2 TO dlgCETMULTI 1 1 PRINT MULTI dlIgCETMULTI 1 NEXT 1 WAIT END 7 14INVOICE An example using visual format INVOICE program illustrates how the display format can be used to replace a window of text based application The source files for this program are Using multiple product characteristics in this sample program INVOICE uses a combo box and several buttons that are used to create entries in an array of bills searching existing invoices change data etc It also has code to validate and format the data entered by the user and to archive data cancel operations or exit the program W32APBLD development environment has been used to create the project invoice prj Recommend charging this project within the development environment run the project and then see the same code Sources for this project are
203. e text to edit if you are using a literal mask This means that the text will appear in blue when the control It is recommended that the variables of background color and foreground have these values to get the colors of the windows the file can be updated within W32APBLD w32 B_DFLTFGC 0 B_DFLTBGC 7 3 5 6 Define the directory path headers H Ipath This option can be used to specify the directory containing the files referenced by the C preprocessor statement include The name following the I option will be passed to the compiler and the compiler w 32 C For example suppose the file pgmnuevo b contains the include getfld you could use the I option to tell the compiler that the file is in getfld include directory using the command OBW32 I include o pgmnuevo pgmnuevo b Note that you do not need the Microsoft C compiler preprocessor directives when using C See Manual CET BASIC Language Reference for more information about the C preprocessor 3 5 7 Include a library on linker Iname Normally the program seeks to link the current working directory bookstores but first check the directory specified by the environment variable LIB default c cetlib Bookseller option the L in lowercase is important can be used to pass the name of additional libraries containing compiled or assembled functions required by the linker For example LIB Utility Microsoft C has been used to create a library of C functions called myobj lib
204. e the global variables REM that are used in processing the list boxes GLOBAL MAT FIRST MAT SECOND MAT MULTI GLOBAL USESECOND REM 1stend include Digcet IDH Note the lines that appear above the include statement These statements REM mark the first safe area where you can add user code Any code added beyond the limits established by these brands not saved for the next time you load the dialog in the dialog editor Since all interactive controls dlgCET dialogue our example are used to pass information to the main program CETDEMO we used the default option which is to let the editor automatically generates all the sentences of all GLOBAL interactive controls in the file HDI That way you only have to define extra variables to use as global in this case we have used an array of strings in the list box and a variable for processing the Next button REM 1ststart GLOBAL MAT FIRST MAT SECOND MAT MULTI GLOBAL USESECOND 80 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 REMO 1stend If ownership of the dialogue NOT make GLOBAL variables Control was used in this example does not use then you must define all variables BASIC interactive controls that would be used as global variables within this secure area It has been done this way in the program INVOICE example since very few were used as global variables this was way better than the default All global variables must be defined before the include Beca
205. e title is equal to title parameter Retcode Zero indicates error Below is a snippet cal prj program that illustrates the use of several functions documented above im Calculadora A ES E Varios CET Al ES Edici n Wer Ayuda File View Fonts Help Ces fe SA E me 2 0 9 1 oad mal ef sf ef ws 1 ef a 1 wef ap fo SSUB dlglBtnClick REM Button Click save area REM btnstart SELECT CMDID 138 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 CASE 202 Rem Undo Boton Deshacer call cSetFocus dlg1HDLG 100 call w32EditUndo CASE 205 Rem Paste Boton Pegar call w32GetWindowSessions Calculadora addrof sesiones if sesiones gt 0 then call w32SetForegroundWindow Calculadora addrof retorno Rem Simular CONTROL C call w32Skeybd_event_down 17 call w32keybd_event C asc C call w32Skeybd_event_up 17 call cAppWindowTop call w32ClipIsAvailable addrof ava if ava S lt gt 0 then call w32ClipPasteData addrof text addrof retcode call cSetCtrlValue dlglHDLG 100 text ifend ifend CASE 206 call w32GetWindowSessions Calculadora addrof sesiones if sesiones 0 then call cWinExec calc exe 1 ifend call cAppWindowTop call w32MoveWindow Calculadora 0 0 276 272 addrof retorno call w32SetForegroundWindow Calculadora addrof retorno Rem Ver la calculadora Estandard call w32Skeybd_event_down 18 rem Pulsar ALT call w3
206. e to determine if any particular OPEN statements open a table in the database or what opens is a native ISAM file This allows the programmer to move BASIC ISAM file data to the MySQL database file by file 2 9 10 Files and block records The emulation module supports file locking LOCK option in the OPEN statement and record locking when the file is opened in update mode 2 9 11 Natives APIs The emulation module exports a set of functions usable from CET BASIC with similar functionality to the C APIs of the MySQL client library These APIs can be used to access the MySQL database in the most efficient language itself using native MySQL server SQL 2 9 11 1 Native APIs functions references The table that follows C benchmark MySQL functions C and its equivalent in BASIC Refer to the MySQL API documentation for details C Function MySQL cetmysql Function mysql_affected_rows call cetmysgl affected_rows Returns the number of rows changed deleted inserted by the last mysql UPDATE DELETE or INSERT addrof rows mysql_close Call cetmysql close Close connection on server mysql mysql_connect No implementado use real_connect mysql_change_user call cetmysql change_user Changes user and data base 2 associated to an open conecction mysql users passwd db db addrof errno mysql_character_set_name cetmysql character_set_name Returns the name of the default character set for th
207. eate file 0 Option invalid 0 Unable to locate the file 0O 7 Unable to unlink file 0 11 Reading Error 0 I2 Writing Error 10 54 Syntax error DONE The following errors are specific Bsort 501 Unable to close the file 0 502 Failed conversion STRING to REAL 503 Data type not supported or invalid 0 504 Invalid data type INTEGER expected 505 Invalid data type REAL expected 506 Invalid data type is expected STRING 507 Search Error L 0 508 Sequential record exceeds the buffer size 509 Output File not found 510 Option separator is required 511 Avoid a meter higher than the record in the file counter 512 Key field in a non ISAM file 513 Option N employed in a field that is not chain 514 Relational operator invalid 0 515 No comparison is constant 516 0 substring record size exceeds the file 0 517 0 substring key field length exceeds 0 518 0 field FROM gt TO field 519 Records ignored 0 520 Records read 0 521 Selected records 0 522 Written records 0 523 Program interrupted signal 0 215 Chapter 13 Routines performed in C Chapter 13 Routines performed in C 13 1 Introduction The Application Development System w 32 CET has a wide variety of C language routines that allows to perform operations that would be impossible or very difficult to program them in BASIC only When using f
208. ed the CETBIN folder as the model C CETBIN Variables are added SET LIB C CETLIB and SET INCLUDE C Y CETLIB INC 1 6 Variables de entorno de Cet B_CMDFLAGS Fixed compiler options making them available for each build For example if you use the library optional Phase One Toolkit you should enter the library option to tell the compiler where to find these routines B_CMDFLAGS IPostk The following example illustrates how you can select B_CMDFLAGS OBW32 so that files always use the Framework shortlisted located in the current directory Separate multiple options with a space like this B_CMDFLAGS r mires wo miobj This variable will tell the compiler to enable the defaults and display their values Selecting this variable is no longer needed in the command line options present in the variable B_THCONV Loads 1 to convert string literals to values THEOS This will ensure that the codes can be converted to international characters ASCII values above 128 to your assembly output B_THCONV 1 Environment variables used by the runtime system A lot of variables can be used to change the operating mode of the system implementation For example if you want to port an application from the operating system and wants THEOS w 32 programs operate in the same way load the following variable B_EMULATE THEOS Variables Execution System as B_EMULATE be loaded into a special initialization file When the application sta
209. ed to MySQL tables If the file contains records with different formats the file should be split into two or more files with the same format records Thus such a file would only be moved in two or more tables MySQL provided the BASIC program was also modified CET parallel If the utility does not find inconsistencies then create and lift the screen a sequence of SQL statements that can be used to create the table MySQL table add the record to the table _cet_files_ and import the data to the table If the utility find any inconsistency will draw with a warning screen The developer will then have to use the command line parameters f t and c to select only part of the original file for analysis 2 9 15 1 2 Extended Utility blist The utility blist is extended with the option e within the command line When used this option will force the blist to generate output can be imported into the MySQL database Ignore all page headers and page enclose the field values in double quotation marks and separated by commas The f t and c can be used to list only parts of the file If necessary may be detected it was necessary to divide the file In this case these options generally should be used with the same values that were used with the utility bsqlconv 2 9 16 Example Here we see an example of the procedure for the conversion of ISAM indexed files with different record formats This procedure assumes that the files will be moved to tables in a datab
210. eferencia al control de edici n con ID 101 Call w32GetWindow padre 101 addrof ed101 Rem Proceso d nter para id 100 y 101 al pulsar ESC se Rem pulsa el boton 201 en ambos casos call w32EditENTER1 ed100 201 call w32EditENTER2 ed101 201 REM iniend call w32SetCtrlColorn padre control rt vt at rf vf at Where n is a value from to 19 Calling this function group to define the text color and background of any edit control List Box Combo Box Drop down list and static controls text radio button check box and group boxes The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father reference to the dialog Value returned by the function w32GetParent control reference to control the colors are assigned Value returned by the function as Ist parameter w32GetWindow estableciento father value and as the second parameter control id rt value of R red text color Valid values are 0 255 Use the value 1 to indicate that you want to use the default color for that control vt component value V green text color Valid values are 0 255 If parameter rt 1 value is specified in this you can specify the value returned by w32ImageBackgroundn if you want the background color is the same as the tapestry of dialogue at value component blue text color Valid values are 0 255 rf value of R red the background color of the text Valid values are 0 255 Use the value
211. eld 6 converted to its numerical value 6 1 5ND the first 5 characters of the string field 6 converted to their numeric value and sorted in descending order Note that you do not need any special character to indicate fields of type string Note also that part of the chain can be used for sorting purposes If actual data are lower than those specified are added to the right spaces Specifications are not indicate lengths greater than the actual length of the key when working with indexed file keys or total record length when working with data fields The N is used if the string contains a valid number the digits 0 9 are preceded by a minus or plus sign or take a decimal point Bsort convert the string to a number for sorting If they would do so management would be done using the ASCII value of the character string By default in ascending order Bsort If you specify the D the output will be sorted in descending order with the highest value first The sort of plain ASCII files is much simpler If the input file is sequential the maximum length of the record to be read must be specified as mentioned above For example 500 indicates a plain ASCII sequential file that has a maximum record length of 500 bytes Since each record consists of a single string field fewer options to define the specifications of the sort key You can only apply the options from to N and D For example 1 5 the first five characters of the registration
212. elp you get on screen error messages that may occur when accessing files through ODBC w 32 3 7 35 B_YR2000 Check this variable with the last two digits of the year that will be interpreted as 20XX This feature allows you to have dates of 1900 and 2000 without having to use a four digit notation For example suppose you have no data prior to January 1 1925 In that case it could do B_YR2000 24 This would cause the judgments DAY 01 01 24 and DAY 01 01 2024 were identical Using this example the following dates are interpreted as 01 01 00 01 01 2000 31 12 24 31 12 2024 01 01 25 01 01 1925 31 12 99 31 12 1999 44 Chapter 4 The framework Chapter 4 The framework 4 1 Introduction When you create a program using the Application Development System w 32 CET read a set of editable files to determine how to open and manage the window showing its application These files will be called the Framework Windows This chapter will cover the characteristics of the framework that can be used without having to modify its source code If you have not already we recommend that you compile a simple program that displays some text just so he can go using each feature we go looking 4 2 The default windows By default w 32 programs have a main window with the following menu bar File View and Help Sources you can select with or without the help of mouse E 10 xi File View Fonts Help 4 2 1 The file menu By default
213. ems can also contain nested popup menus These are considered separate menu groups are identified by U at the end of the menu text When selected the menu also appear to the right of the menu item so it is called cascading menu The syntax for POPUP key is POPUP title The title is the name of the specific menu The quotation marks are required In the title you can designate one character mnemonic to be emphasized that can be introduced to select the item This precede the character to be used with a amspersand sign 82 For example the following code will display File menu by default with the F underlined so that users will know which key to press to select POPUP amp File The MENUITEM keyword is used to define a menu item to select just as a group defined POPUP menu Associated with each menu item is a unique identifier which will be passed to the subroutine cetWINSUB as in the example Notepad at the time that the item is selected The syntax of the key is MENUITEM title ID The title is the text that will be displayed in the menu A specific mnemonic can be associated with the title the same way you do with a degree from POPUP The unique identifier is a value ranging from ID_WINSUB1 to ID_WINSUB250 There is a second way to use the key MENUITEM that may be used to display a horizontal black line if you want to group items in a menu MENUITEM SEPARATOR SEPARATOR menu item has been used in the default File menu to draw a line before
214. ent working directory in the same way that files are searched in the CET BASIC programs See the next section for details on the types of input and output files that can be used outfile is the name of the file where to store the sorted data By default the output file will be a direct file except when the input file is sequential and not use the limited output option In that case the file will also be sequentially output You can change this default behavior when using output option to specify the file type either sequential indexed or direct the same type as the input file dirtrabajo is an optional parameter that can be entered to indicate the directory to use if work files are stored on disk 207 Chapter 12 Development Utilities Note that by default requires Bsort 1 tmp directory on the current drive The TEMP environment variable can also be used for other pathname especlave defines the type of the input file and the fields to be sorted You can specify up to 32 fields The order establishing the definitions of the fields is the same by which be sorted later The specifications of the sort keys are entered in the following format B nnn field desc field Where 0 indicates the beginning and end of instructions Under UNIX the opening brace may have a special meaning to the shell Then type a backslash before the character B used at the beginning of the especlave to indicate that the input file
215. ents the status of the keys as Bit Activo Condici n La Tecla CTRL est activa no soportada Bloq Despl se ha activado Blog Num se ha activado Bloq May s se ha activado Insert se ha activado Por ejemplo PRINT crt clear PRINT Pulse Shift Ctl ALT o otra tecla y CR PRINT Drcha Izq Blog Blog Bloq i PRINT Activa Activa CTRL ALT Despl Num Mayus Insert PRINT a WHILE 1 CALL Bkbshift addrof key if key lt gt 0 Rshift key and 01H Lshift key and 02H Ctrl key and 04H Alt key and 08H ScrollLock key and 10H umLock key and 20H CapsLock key and 40H nsMode key and 80H PRINT at 1 7 IF Rshift then PRINT tab 3 crt rvon tert rvo t 4 IF LshIFt then PRINT tab 10 crt rvon thort rvoff LF Ctrl then PRINT tab 17 crt rvon t crt rvoti IF A1tS then PRINT tab 24 crt rvon CFE rvoff IF ScrollLock then PRINT tab 31 crt rvon Hert rvoff IF NumLockS then PRINT tab 38 crt rvon Hort EVO LEY F CapsLock then PRINT tab 45 crt rvon tort Mrvott IF InsMode S then PRINT tab 52 crt rvon orto everi IFEND GET a IF a lt gt 0 THEN BREAK WEND This chapter has covered some of the C functions that can be called within BASIC programs See Libraries CET BASIC Manual for information on other fe
216. er from which the search is to be performed where index of the first row in which coincidence is found or 1 if not successful searchpaths w32ControlFlat call control Paint a border around the control referenced by control to give the appearance of two dimensions This could be the implementation of a grid in which the editing controls they have activated w32ControlFlat 154 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Descripci n Zona 1 2 25 1 35 0 423 Zona B 1 225 15 0 423 Besupr Eliminar sInsert Insertar S F2 Editar Registro F12 Ir a rbol call w32CreateImageList ancho fichero addrof ima Create a reference to a file Bmp must contain an image list The width of each individual image in pixels should be specified as the first parameter It returns a reference to the list of images in the last argument the call This function has no visual effect only creates a reference to a list of images that will then be referenced by its position in the list controls and tree w32ListImageList call lis ima addrof ret Associated with the list lis image list referenced by ima In most cases only have to make the call to this function only once per list w32ListSetImage call lis item indice_ima addrof ret Sets the image of the row item belonging to the list lis with the image of the list on lis having ndice_ima index starting from 0 w32ListInsertItemEx call lis tex
217. ere may be cases in which this procedure does not work well could be files that were not moved along with the Prj There may also be files that were not in the project directory file sharing If there are only a few exceptions eg the project only has a shared file that is not in the project directory then you can follow the procedure for moving the project then delete the file sharing project and add it again This is assuming that all the old road now is not valid If the road has not changed obviously you would not have to do anything If the project has been renamed and moved W32APBLD develop both procedures at once 59 Chapter 6 The debugger W 32 Chapter6 The debugger W 32 6 1 Introduction W 32 Debugger is a special feature that is only available from within the integrated development environment w 32 W32APBLD exe After creating a project you can use the BASIC debugger to locate logical errors and execution This chapter will give you enough information to use the code editor and debugger possibilities This chapter assumes that you already know the features that are explained in the previous chapter 6 2 Using the Source Code Editor W32APBLD has a source code editor you can use to create view and edit your source files Menu command File file has the following elements which will simplify the process Command Function If you select File New source source will load the code editor with a file called s
218. ered GLOBAL docModified REM 1stend include dlgline IDH SUB line This secure area of the main subroutine is used to size the array must contain the 50 line items REM Dimensiona la matriz alfanum rica para la caja de listado de tal forma que REM tenga 50 elementos dim Lineltems 50 SUB lineBtnClick The following code has been added in the area reserved for managing the radio buttons Update Cancel and Return select CMDID case 200 REM Bot n de actualizaci n REM Actualizaci n significa actualizar la linea actual con la informaci n REM en los controles de edici n Siempre tendremos un n mero valido REM actual de l nea ya que el bot n de actualizaci n estar REM deshabilitado hasta que un n mero de l neas haya sido REM seleccionado Lineltems Currentltem fn GetFromEdit Currentltem REM Establece el flag de documento modificado que es una variable REM global de tal forma que el formato de factura pueda detectar que REM la l nea de factura ha sido modificada docModified 1 REM Actualiza el alfanum rico de la caja de listado de la l nea borrando REM el alfanum rico actual e insertando uno nuevo call cLBoxDelString lineHDLG 300 Currentltem call cLBoxInsString lineHDLG 300 Lineltems Currentltem Currentltem REM Limpia los controles de edici n desactiva los botones Update y REM Cancel y establece el focus de nuevo en la caja de listado call cSetEditText lineHD
219. erformed in the background while the remainder of the application is running Return is 0 on error al Ejemplo Create prj call w32AnimationStop ani addrof retorno Stop playing avi file associated with the control ani Return is O on error w32MAPISendDocuments call paths file addrof ret Send an email message specifying a list of attachments and shows the user a dialog box to enter the recipient s address 142 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 The path parameter must specify the full path of the file you wish to attach separated by semicolons In parameter file must be specified separated by semicolons the name Asinara each of the attachments to the destination example call w32MAPISendDocuments c windows w32app w32 C autoexec bat c config sys w32app w32 autoexec bat config sys addrof ret call w32MAPIRead Mail dirdestino remitente addrof files addrof mes Processes all messages that are in the inbox of the mail client system sender whose address is contained in the parameter sender copy the attached files to the directory dirdestino and finally delete the messages Pulse Ctrl Y y luego Alt S para enviar el mensaje 5 x File View Fonts Help Es Archivos adjuntos of x Archivo Edici n Ver Insertar Formato Herramientas Redacci n Ayuda Give o 4 e ele 0 0 05 iJ iil z i i iL il ii mM Uh 1001 w32app w3
220. establish the absolute path in the section Global Directory Project Include button to execute the command View Setting Note that the change will not take place until the next time you run W32APBLD Each folder in the project tree has its own global properties the type of files they represent For example the c flag is always used by default in all files of type BASIC If you add the flag Zd to the global properties of this folder then enable the debugger to all files B application Each file has its individual properties Any property is added to the global properties of the type of file during the build process 5 5 Adding files to project The F10 command or menu FILES TO ADD PROYECT displays a dialog box to select the path name and extension of the the file s to be added It is necessary to take into account when adding a file 1 The dialogues and forms must be added by selecting the file extension B then the Idh be added automatically If the file is added directly to a Idh an error is detected 2 The source files are added by selecting files extension BASIC code B If these source files contain include statements these files are automatically added to the build process build as dependencies If you create a new unit after the project has been compiled you should use the command BUILD UPDATE ALL DEPENDENCIES to add to the project NEVER use the ADD option to add file extension H Inc and or Cpu other
221. example REM Create a process for ejececutarse so get your REM minimized and return code cCreateProcess call addrof hd1 ats A glpost exe 1 if hdl 0 print process not started goto NoStatus IfEnd stat 998 while stat 998 SLEEP 25 112 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions REM Sets a value unused processing time Rem only need to check the process cProcessStat call hd1 addrof stat wend print process exit code stat NoStatus See examples and menu program PROGRESS the example shows a bar set as an example of using this feature cSaveBrowser This routine is used to display a dialog box like Save As and return the selected item to the program that called it The syntax is cSaveBrowser call ADDROF name ext filter Where name 1s the string used to return the full path name of the selected file ext 1s the default extension that will be added to the file name Specify an empty string if you want to use a filter 1s the filter used to limit the files list An empty string will show all files For example REM Shows a dialog box like Save As and if the user does not REM supplied with a filename extension used by default B REM No files are limited to show CALL cSaveBrowser ADDROF name b The only difference between this function and cOpenBrowser is that this browser using Save as save as for the title and an optional parameter the default extension to append t
222. ext files Creating MySQL tables and data imports Modifing CET BASIC programs The POS windows library 2 11 15 15 16 16 16 17 Index 2 10 2 2 10 3 2 10 4 Chapter 3 The bar code CET library The file access library Future versions The W 32 Compiler 3 1 Introduction 3 2 The W 32 components 3 3 Creating W 32 programs 3 4 Compiling a program with W 32 3 5 The compilations flags 3 5 1 32 bits Option 32 332 Generate assembly code as output S 3 5 3 Define a symbol Ds mbolo 3 5 4 Select line error 3 5 5 Float text editor Zi 3 5 6 Define the directory path headers H Ipath 3 5 7 Include a library on linker Iname 3 5 8 Line numering Ln 3 5 9 Only compile obj c 3 5 10 Especify the exe file name o nom_ejecutable 3 5 11 Preprocessor and preprocessor only P y PO 3 5 12 Report Rpaso 3 5 13 Resource r nombre 3 5 14 Track code trace T rastrea sub 3 5 15 Ux basic U 3 5 16 Version number opction V 3 5 17 Windows Objects wo nombre 3 5 18 Windows resources wr nombre 3 6 Environment variables used by the compiler 3 6 1 B_CMDFLAGS 3 6 2 B_THCONV 3 7 Environment variables used by the runtime system 3 7 1 Variables related to the compiler and runtime system 3 7 2 B_CETBIN 3 7
223. ey are explained especially if this is the first time you used a tool like this After running W32APBLD the menus of typical commands such as the File View and Help Although there are a few buttons on toolbars that are initially disconnected Load the editor by selecting the File New command and option dialog At that time other commands appear in the new menu and toolbars Besides the main tool bar the dialog editor has two special toolbars to streamline the design process controls toolbar on the left of the window and the toolbar just above the bar Status Status All toolbars can be changeable or movable The menu display View has options to show or hide any of the toolbars and the status bar status If you changed the visibility or location of any of the toolbars will program the same way the next time you call the editor Reset Defaults command to reset the defaults can be used to make visible the status bar and all toolbars and positioned in the default position The control commands and viewing will be explained in detail in the following sections For now note that each of the new dialogues contain two controls an OK button and a Cancel button in the upper left corner To move resize or copy one of the buttons you have to select it first positioning the cursor anywhere on the button and clicking the left mouse button The selected button control will now surrounded by a blue rectangle with buttons resize solid blocks around
224. f PRINTER 1 9 in the name of the variable is associated with the LPT port for that printer If the variable has the value DEFAULT B_PRINTERn or DIALOG there 1s no association between the number of printer and LPT port under any environment The function can be used to obtain cEnumPrinters printers information available Typically this feature is used from a BASIC program when you need information from printers to specify the variable name B_PRINTERn to particular through Bputenv function call Refer to the job description for an example w 32 e If the variable equals B_PRINTERn DIALOG then the user will see a print dialog allowing you to select a printer from the list specified in the Print Manager Since you will be printing ASCII text yet there will be some options in the print dialog as Copies and selecting specific pages Page Range that have been disabled This does not take effect until phase 2 is implemented Also note that if you change the default printer in the Print Setup from the print dialog the selected printer get displayed only during the current program The change has no effect on a program that has been made or CHAIN LINK The Network is available only for you to connect another printer on the network the rule above that will also be in effect B_WINPRINT If the variable is not set the print mechanism for a file depends on the following e What is the operating system you are working with e Does the printer is loca
225. fective when you move or resize controls with the arrow keys Mouse movements are always of 5 pixels 7 10Runtime functions You can use a set of functions in the areas for specific code into the source file programmer BASIC and can thus change the appearance and the operation of the controls in the dialog In all cases HDlg refers to an integer variable used as dialog handler HDlg begin with the prefix name characters dialogue In the dialogue example uses the variable dlgCETHDLG ID is a decimal value that identifies a specific control These numbers are within a certain range depending on the type of control The use and syntax of the functions currently available are grouped here by the kind of control which affect them 7 10 1 Checking Box Controls cGettCheck hDlg ID ADDROF STATE Gets the state of the control specified by ID and returns within the variable STATE If the control is proven this value is 1 otherwise it is 0 cSetCheck hDlg ID STATE Sets the state of a check box specified by ID within the variable STATE If STATE is 1 the check box is initially checked If the value is 0 then you are as unproven 7 10 2 Combo box controls cAddComboContents hDlg ID MATADDROF ITEMS cComboAddString hDlg ID STR 76 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 cComboDelString hDlg ID INDX cCombolnsString hDlg ID STR INDX For a description of these functions refer to the lis
226. ffects the editing controls to which they are found associated function Furthermore it can process any key pressed by the user The interpretation of the parameters is as follows index integer value between 1 and 99 Hand referring to the edit control IDboton a value between 200 and 299 that designates the ID button number real or fictional whose associated section in SUB BtnClick subroutine code is executed when the user presses any key being located in the edit control 152 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 key variable name that will contain the value of the key pressed in every moment For a full account of the values of the keys see w32skeybd_event function documentation The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init In all dialogues that make up an executable to use a different value for each index edit control So to associate this special processing three edit controls to use functions could be Call w32EditENTER 1 Call w32EditENTER 2 Call w32EditENTER 3 Note 1 This function replaces w32EditENTERn function group although its use is not inconsistent set Note 2 Although the most obvious use of this feature is to edit controls can also be used with list controls List Box Ejemplo SSUB dlglBtnClick REM Button Click save area REM btnstart SELECT CMDID CASE 230 SELECT teclal00 CASE 112 Rem Tratar la pulsacion de
227. files that were opened more recently File New command displays a dialog box with three options source source dialog dialogue and Project Project sources and creating dialogues discussed in other chapters File Open command lets you select a specific path and open a file of the following types 1 Extension source files B H Inc or Cpu which are used for originally created files CONTROL Plus THEOS under the operating system There is a text editor to load and create these types of files See Chapter w 32 Debugger for details 2 Files extension talks HDI Note that if you open a file Lb The program will load the source file into the text editor W 32 1 3 Files of extension projects Prj 4 All files of any extension The program will attempt to load the files from any other extension within the text editor w 32 Since the command Find in Files has been created to aid in debugging this feature will be explained in chapter w 32 Debugger File import command Dialog Template is a special feature that helps you to convert text based displays dialog boxes This feature is explained in Chapter dialog editor Other menu command will appear as you work with the environment for example the command Window provides the ability to organize multiple windows you have open at once in a cascade or quadrants or to toggle between other clicking on the name of the same Menu specific commands are explained in this chapter in the approp
228. fine the background wallpaper that displays a dialog box The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father reference to the dialog Value returned by the function w32GetParent image file path bmp to be displayed as wallpaper width Width in pixels of the image bmp In this first version you specify 8 high High in bmp image pixels In this first version you specify 8 Skin Is the ID of the image resulting tapestry This value can be used to make static controls display transparently See w32SetCtrlColorn function The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init In all dialogues that make up an executable should not be called more than once to the same function in this group Thus to define the three dialogues Skin functions to be used Call w32ImageBackground1 Call w32ImageBackground2 Call w32ImageBackground3 w32LBoxResetContentH call control This is identical to w32LBoxResetContent with the proviso that the initial parameter is added to the control reference specify value obtained w32GetWindow This procedure avoids the need to put the focus on a control and thus improves performance w32ListGetRect call lis item subitem addrof L addrof top addrof der addrof background addrof ret Returns the coordinates relating to the current position of the list lis of the upper and lower values determined by field
229. fn Findldx 0 fn1end fnend REM Parse the control type string into its substrings REM We use a brute force method as all of the validation REM occurs during user interface code where blinding speed REM is not important Remember that processors are rated in REM millions of instructions per second def fn Parse src aa src pos SCH 1 src if pos 0 type src else type LEFT src pos 1 ifend select type case INTRANGE REM format is INTRANGE min max with no embedded spaces pos SCH 1 src src RIGHTS src pos 1 pos SCH 1 src min LEFT src pos 1 max RIGHTS src pos 1 case STRINGLEN REM format is STRINGLEN max with no embedded spaces pos SCH 1 src max RIGHT src pos 1 case INT REM nothing else to do otherwise msgbox Unknown control type src type UNKNOWN cend fn Parse type fnend REM usrend 7 16W32 DEMOS A menu example program The program W32DEMOS we made it easier to run programs w 32 examples This program also shows how easy it is to create a menu using buttons Each button has a corresponding label that describes the purpose of the command When running the following menu appears The main program code which contains the sentence MAIN is stored in the file as follows w32demos b Since this file does not need any additional information do not see any sentence GLOBA
230. following line in the section cetuser rc Bitmap file IDR_MAINFRAME BITMAP MOVEABLE PURE CETTOOL BMP The graphical buttons iconografiados are stored within the cettool bmp file in the cetlib inc if you used the default path during installation You can not change the default toolbar but if you can add new toolbars and CToolBar call to replace the toolbar from your application To design your own toolbar copy the default toolbar in your local directory with a new name For example copy cetlib inc cettool bmp tst mitool2 bmp Now use the program to modify the file Imagedit mitool2 bmp A bitmap toolbar buttons can have up to twenty Each button within the bitmap is 15 dots high and 16 dots wide therefore the bitmap of a toolbar with two buttons 15 should be high by 32 dots wide Three buttons would be 15x48 and so on When you need to modify the bitmap file add a line within within cetuser rc to use the new toolbar IDR_TOOLBAR2 BITMAP MOVEABLE PURE MITOOL2 BMP You can have up to 50 toolbars using predefined identifiers ranging from IDR_TOOLBAR2 up ID_TOOLBARSO adding them to the file Rc Note that the identifier IDR_TOOLBARl is reserved for the default toolbar called IDR_ MAINFRAME After the new toolbar has been defined in the file cetuser rc and recompiled the file and can make a call to CToolBar to load the toolbar and menu items associated with the buttons This can be done in the initialization routine of your BASIC p
231. format to be followed by that entry See the example program VALIDATE we explained at the end of this chapter to look at how you can use the properties to be defined by the user in a real application 7 11 3 prefixBtnClick subroutine The second subroutine is named dlgCETBtnClick is called whenever a button is selected The global variable CMDID have the ID of that button 81 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 Code is generated automatically in the file HDI to process the OK and Cancel or the Close command on the System menu If you want these buttons you to realize additional tasks add custom code to process pressing those buttons within the reserved area between REM and REM btnstart E E btnend In dialogue dlgcet b example the following code is added to process Browse and Next buttons Because the check boxes are special types of buttons disable the check box is also processed here We use comments to describe the operations The syntax of the CALL statement is explained in section RunTime functions later REM binstart SELECT CMDID CASE 202 REM The Browse button was selected to display a File Open REM browser and put the selected file into the edit control REM Change the working directory for the open browser to REM CAWINDOWS and restore it afterwards CALL Bgetcwd ADDROF savdir CALL Behdir C WINDOWS CALL cOpenBrowser ADDROF SELECTIONS CALL Behdir savdir IF SELECTION lt gt REM A file se
232. formed at word The justification mode in case the line buffer length is greater than the width of the page is determined by the call to WordWrap The default value for the property WordWrap is O for absolute mode and one for virtual mode Modes There are two print modes absolutely and virtual mode The mode is set by calling Create and can not be changed for printing an object already created In virtual mode printing some calls working with coordinates relative to the current virtual page The coordinates on the page can be set by the call to setPage The following calls have special behavior in virtual mode 1 Text TextAt newPosition Position working with coordinates relative to the current virtual page 2 The default value for the property WordWrap is 1 3 The print object does not advance to a new physical page automatically Instead when the printing exceeds the current virtual page the print object maintains the rest of the line in the line buffer until the first n The application program must checkear line buffer after each call to NewLine or Text to determine if the text 222 Chapter 14 Implementation Notes contains a n This check can be done with the call IsEmpty If the line buffer is not empty this means that the virtual page is complete The application program in the same physical page or by calling NewPage then set the virtual page at the following physical and NewLine called again to print the rest of th
233. fy Mode which indicates the way in which to display the window in accordance with the following table Hidden Window 0 Activates and displays the window 1 Activates the window and minimizes 2 Activates the window and maximizes 3 Activates the window in its most recent size and position 4 Activates the window and displays it in its current size and position 5 Minimizes the window and activates the appropriate following six Minimizes the window that was active window remains 7 Displays the window in its current state remains active window 8 Active and restore a minimized window when this was 9 Seg_timeout maximum number of seconds that will be expected to finalize the implementation of the action Example w32ShellExecuteEx call 0 open printpdf vbs c esptxt pdf 0 20 addrof return This call executes the script printpdf vbs passing as argument the file name and indicating a maximum wait time for the completion of the execution of 20 seconds The script attached printpdf vbs throws the background printing pdf document that is passed as a parameter which can be expected to determine the status of the print and then close Adobe Reader The return value is 1 if the file began to be printed or 0 otherwise w32SetEnv call var_name variable value addrof return Sets the value of the environment variable indicating system as the first argument In the event that the variable already contains a valu
234. fy the default menu and or create new menu items cEnableMainWin CEnableMainWin routine can be used to control the activation status of the main application window This feature is useful if you plan to move the window and make it invisible until it is in the final position with calls cShowMainWin During this process you may need to disable any mouse or keyboard input The syntax of a sentence is cEnableMainWin call status state is an integer 1 to enable the main window mouse input and keyboard or 0 to disable the window cEnumPrinters This routine is used to obtain information from the available printers Typically this feature is used under a BASIC program when you need to get information from the printer to activate B_PRINTERn variable with the specific name of the printer making a function call Bputenv Refer to implementation notes in the appendix for more information on printing The syntax of the call is cEnumPrinters call state addrof prtname addrof drvname addrof port Where state It is the state O begin the process of specifying 1 will continue and 2 free the dynamic memory associated with the enumeration process prtname Is used to return the text printer name to be used to activate B_PRINTERn Under Windows NT and 95 this is the printer name Under Windows is the name of the driver drvname 107 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions This is the variable used to retrieve alphanume
235. g Combo Box User selection List Boxes The selected alphanumeric Note that the alphanumeric is returned list boxes instead of index value that is returned when using specific routines list boxes Note also that in a multi select list box control will return only the first alphanumeric You must use the function to search alphanumeric cGetLBoxSelection selected cSendBtnClick hDlg VAL Send the click of a button with the subroutine BtnClick made CMDID VAL For example you may want to double click event of a list box to complete the dialogue as if the user had selected an item and then had punctured the OK button In this case add code to the event subroutine to send a button click for example if the OK button has the ID 200 put 200 VAL Note that this function can not be used from the Init subroutine since dialogue is not active at this time See the example PROGRESS program at the end of this chapter to see how you can display a dialogue without requiring any user interaction cSetCtrIText hDlg ID TEXT Sets or changes the value of a static text control with the specified ID value to a new alphanumeric characters Text areas are static content text controls the title of a control group and the label for command buttons check box and radio buttons The call has no effect on other types of control cSetCtrIValue hDlg ID STR Sets the content of interactive control STR This routine expects all values are alphanumeric
236. ge icon anchotexto Width in pixels of the text to be displayed as a message to the user Selpordefecto string of zeros and or one to indicate the initial selection to be presented to the user This string will contain many characters as check box controls are going to show selection string of zeros and ones to represent the final selection made by the user Return may have one of the following values indicating the button pressed by the user 1 OK 2 Cancel Example w32CheckBox call 0 4 Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Select one or more options Check the items you want to select amp chr 13 by clicking on the boxes 32 250 0001 addrof value addrof ret 193 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 The execution of this line of code displays the following dialog to the user Seleccione uno o varias opciones x gt Marque los elementos que desea seleccionar ba haciendo click en las casillas Valor 1 Valor 2 M Valor 3 IV Valor 4 Cancelar call w32GetDefaultPrinter addrof impresora addrof ret Gets the name of the default printer that has established the team Requires CETprint dll file dated 18 04 2005 or later w32SetDefaultPrinter call printer addrof ret Set as default printer team which is indicated as first parameter Requires CETprint dll file dated 18 4 2005 or later w32InputBox call father message title st
237. ght of the window See cSizeAppWindow function if you need to resize window loa cAppWindowMax This routine can be used to maximize the application s main window after making a minimization of the window calling cAppWindowMin No no argument is passed to the routine The syntax is call cAppWindowMax cAppWindowMin This routine can be used to minimize the main window of the application will not pass any arguments to the routine The syntax is call cAppWindowMin cAppWindowNormal This routine can be used to restore the main application window to its normal size and position For example 1f you have previously done a maximization or minimization No no argument is passed to the routine The syntax 1s call cAppWindowNormal cAppWindowTop This routine can be used to carry the application window to the top of the window stack No arguments happen The syntax of the CALL statement cAppWindowTop cCbCanPaste This function can be used to check if the Clipboard has some content The syntax is cCbCanPaste call addrof rc where rc This variable is used to enter a return code This code will be 0 when the Clipboard is empty 1 when the Clipboard has any content that can paste cCbCopy This function is used to copy an alphanumeric string to Cliboard The function syntax is cCbCopy call addrof rc sting where string Is the alphanumeric string to copy rc This variable is used to enter a return code Th
238. green text color Valid values are 0 255 If parameter rt 1 value is specified in this you can specify the value returned by w32ImageBackgroundn if you want the background color is the same as the tapestry of dialogue at value component blue text color Valid values are 0 255 rf value of R red the background color of the text Valid values are 0 255 Use the value 1 to indicate that you want to use a transparent background for that control vf component value V green background color of the text Valid values are 0 255 af value component blue background color of the text Valid values are 0 255 The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init Example see dialogue project w32SetCtrlColorListBox call father rt vt at rf vf af 186 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 The call to this function allows you to set the text color and background checks of all dialogue list The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father reference to the dialog Value returned by the function w32GetParent rt value of R red text color Valid values are O 255 Use the value 1 to indicate that you want to use the default color for that control vt component value V green text color Valid values are 0 255 If parameter rt 1 value is specified in this you can specify the value returned by w32ImageBackgroundn if you want the background color is t
239. h a specific printer as the Windows printing system in use B_WINPRINT 1 You specify a particular printer by B_PRINTERn printer name Under Windows NT and 95 this name should be assigned to the printer s Print Manager Under Windows you have no option to give a name to a printer so use the name of the driver installed on the port for example HP LaserJet III Note that the only case where the printer number from 1 to 9 in the name of the variable is associated with the LPT port for that printer so that you can continue using the feature BLMAPPRTn If the variable has the value DEFAULT B_PRINTERn or DIALOG there is no association between the number of printer and LPT port in any Windows environment The variable can also be enabled to make the screen a print dialog that allows the user to select a printer from the list specified in the Print Manager B_PRINTERn DIALOG Since at present still be printing ASCII text there will be some print dialog options as copies and the selection of specific numbers of pages that are disabled To be implemented when there is genuine Windows printing pictures in next releases It will use the system default printer if B_PRINTERn is equal to B_PRINTERx DEFAULT Print is described in detail in the Implementation Notes in Appendix 3 7 16 B_WINPRINT Set the value to 1 if you want to use the new printer interface described in B_PRINTERn B_WINPRINT If the variable is not set then use the
240. haracters that can be introduced into specific control cSetLimitEditText hDlg ID MAX This function is similar to cLimitEditText cSetCaret hDlg ID POS Sets the cursor to the text editor POS value The special value POS 0 places the cursor before the first position If the value of POS is greater than the number of characters of the editor will be positioned at the end of the editor Note that this feature should be used with Event subroutine If the cursor is currently located above the control specified by ID the result is unpredictable cSetEditText hDlg ID STR Sets the contents of the edit control specified by ID to variable str cShowEditWrap hDlg ID FLAG Sets line breaks within a line edit control multiple on or off When FLAG 1 is added at the end of each line two carriage returns followed by an end of line for each line that has been broken due to the rupture of word If FLAG is 0 the words that have been chipped or cut into the next line will appear as a single line 7 10 5 List box controls cAddLBoxContents hDlg ID MATADDROF STR Sets the current value of the control box ID list specified at values that are within the STR matrix This matrix can contain up to 15000 elements cLBoxAddString hDlg ID STR Add the contents of STR alphanumeric end of the list box The items will be reclassified if the control is set for the classification property cLBoxDelString hDlg ID INDX
241. hat the process did not start cmd Is the name of the executable including the necessary arguments The search sequence is as below O The directory where the calling program is executed O The current working directory O The Windows or Windows system O The directories set in the PATH O directories within the variable set B_LKPATH Normally this argument affects only the executable Windows programs usually only look in the current working directory unless you specify the full name with path show Indicates the size of the window a window 1 is normal 2 is a minimized window and 3 is a maximized window or full screen window This argument does not affect when you start a DOS application in this case we will use a full screen unless you have defined a Pif windows properly See cProcessStat function to see how to ask the status of a process after it has begun See also the program w32DEMOS for examples of using this feature cDIBInfo This routine is used to get the height and width of a graph DIB The CALL statement syntax is cDIBInfo call name ADDROF a ADDROF h Where name specifies the full name including the PATH DIB file to read The graphic file needs to be in bitmap format of Microsoft Windows to returns the width of the graph DIB h returns the height of the chart DIB cDIBWindowInfo This routine is used to obtain the location and size of a wndow DIB The syntax for the CALL statement is
242. he same as the tapestry of dialogue at value component blue text color Valid values are 0 255 rf value of R red the background color of the text Valid values are O 255 Use the value 1 to indicate that you want to use a transparent background for that control vf component value V green background color of the text Valid values are 0 255 af value component blue background color of the text Valid values are 0 255 The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init Example see dialogue project w32ListSetSubItemImage call lis item column indice_ima addrof ret Sets the image of the cell defined by the row and column item column list belonging to the image lis with the associated list that has index lis indice_ima starting from 0 w32CreatelmageList call W file addrof ima Create a reference to a file Bmp must contain an image list The width of each individual image in pixels should be specified as the first parameter It returns a reference to the list of images in the last argument The call This function has no visual effect only creates a reference to a list of images that will then be referenced by its position in the list controls and tree w32ListImageList call lis ima addrof ret Associated with the list lis image list referenced by ima In most cases only have to make the call to this function only once per list
243. he associated image when the mouse is not over the button This reference allows release resources occupied by the image w32DeleteObject invoking function imagen_push reference to the associated image when the user holds down the button This reference allows release resources occupied by the image w32DeleteObject invoking function In all dialogues that make up an executable to use an index value different for each button So to associate this special processing features three buttons to use could be Call w32BLook 1 Call w32BLook 2 Call w32BLook 3 w32Download WebrFile call dominio_servidor_web ruta_completa_archivo_web ruta_archivo_local addrof return Download any file hosted on the web and store it on the local file system Requires CETFTP dll dll dated 27 12 2009 or later The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Dominio_servidor_web full web address for the web server domain For example http www omegasystems com Ruta_completa_archivo_web full path of the file you want to download web For example http www omegasystems com cet_descargas servidor zip Ruta_archivo_local full path of the local file to be created Return a value of 1 indicates that an error has occurred w32FtpCreateDirectory call FTPSite user key path nuevodir addrof return Create an FTP directory with the name indicated as 5 argument from the route indicated as 4 argume
244. he dialog call cEndDlg prgmonHDLG CMDID ifend REM btnend GOSUB prgmon BTNEND EXIT The button press is sent from the security area prgmonInit subroutine We chose the identifier value 299 which is within the valid range of values of ID but not worth a Real ID SUB prgmoninit REMO inistart REM Send an initial button click to start the monitor a value in the REM button ID range 200 299 that is NOT the ID of a real button call cSendBtnClick prgmonHDLG 299 REM iniend EXIT 102 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions Chapter 8 W 32 Window Functions 8 1 Introduction The Application Development System w 32 CET provides a wide variety of C functions that let you run operations that would be difficult or impossible to program using BASIC only This chapter covers the functions you can use to deploy Windows standard features within their programs Information about special functions available for use within forms and dialog boxes are presented in chapter Dialogues Editor w 32 Special functions file to get information from the environment are covered in Chapter routines in C W 32 functions are described in alphabetical order so you can locate them quickly A quick reference table at the end of this chapter gives an overview of the features available Remember in the names of CALL routines are important case sensitive You have to enter them as shown in this manual 8 2 Using C language routines The CALL statement is u
245. he dialog or Form View Value returned by the function w32GetParent 183 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Creating PNG images controls should be performed using the function w32CreateWindowH and indicating the value CETPNG to the argument for the type of control w32CreateWindowH call father ID type style estiloex title x y width height addrof control This feature allows you to create controls at runtime WINDOWS various types The meaning of the parameters is as follows Father reference to the dialog must be the value returned by w32GetParent ID Number to be used to identify the control to be created It s the same identify using standard controls W32 CET Type is a string that identifies the type of control to create Some examples CETPNG Edit Button SysDateTimePick32 See appendix to this function Style Determines the style that will be in control Usually contains 1 or more constants specified below to which is applied the OR operator EstiloEx Determines the extended style that will be in control Usually contains 1 or more constants specified below to which is applied the OR operator Title is the initial value of text to display the control if applicable Control reference to the control that was created Example To create a control that displays a PNG on a background wallpaper could use the following code call w32CreateWindowH dialogo idcontrol
246. he disk is formatted When the format command completes the MS DOS window disappears and the program will continue running Also note that if some of the commands passed to CSI has some output that should be read by another command pipe redirection need to use the option noicon since you may need to enter a PAUSE MS DOS Command Internal PAUSE to finish running For example if you use the DIR command in a CSI by default the window disappears as soon as the command finishes executing Most likely not have time to read the command output The following command would solve this problem CMD noicon DIR CHR 13 CHR 10 PAUSE CSI CMD 220 Chapter 14 Implementation Notes 14 8Msgbox Sentence The message boxes are often used in Windows programs The message Application Exit displayed from the File menu when exit is a typical example The message is displayed until the operator click OK Posts boxes can be used from anywhere in your program as you use a PRINT statement The syntax is MSGBOX cadena_dada For example MSGBOX Is the paper loaded in the printer cMessageBoxOkC is a similar function that displays a box of OK Cancel the user to continue or cancel the operation 14 9Printing 14 9 1 Native printing When a program opens the file w 32 PRINTERx where x is from 1 to 9 it automatically creates a spooler file in the tmp When the channel or associated with the file descriptor closes this pr
247. he font number 0 is the default print font printer specified when making the call to Create We recommend creating all sources that are required immediately after the call to Create and then select the fonts by number 2 The size and position of the pages in the call to newPosition are expressed in pixels 228
248. he function values assigned as a result of these two variables which later will be used by the BASIC program means that the routine must know where to load the defaults so you need to know the address of memory So it is essential to pass these two variables by ADDROF For more information on the CALL statement see the Language Reference Manual CET BASIC cAppTitle The programs show CET w 32 w 32 App Builder along with the current version number as the default title of the main window This function can be used to edit and display a different text as the name of your application The CALL statement syntax is cAppTitle title Where title specifies the text to be used to replace the default title Be careful that the text does not exceed the length of the window because it exceeds any character will be truncated Note This function can also be called from the subroutine cetPreInit in the resource file cetwin b file copy or from MAIN program or from the Init subroutine when you want to put the same title to all its programs See chapter Windows Manager for information on how to do this cAppWindowInfo This routine can be used to obtain the location and size of the main application window The CALL statement syntax is cApp WindowInfo call addrof x addrof y addrof w addrof h Where x and returns the upper left column and row of the window 103 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions w h return the width and hei
249. he information in this file will be invalid when the project is renowned copy or move to another location using operating system commands Fortunately W32APBLD can detect these changes that have occurred and update the project file according to changes 5 9 1 Rename a project Use the operating system command to rename the Prj This file must not be open while being renamed Call W32APBLD to open the file with the new name The name of the file to be opened will be compared with the name of the file is stored in the Prj When the names are different W32APBLD warning him and displays a message advising that the file names are updated If at that time you select Cancel W32APBLD not make any changes Select OK to W32APBLD change the names that are stored within the file Prj W32APBLD also checks the executable name If it is the same as the original project renamed to put the new project name 5 9 2 Move or copy a project You can create a new project and add the files or rename one and follow the process described above to rename the project If you rename the project W32APBLD detect that the way the project is different and show a message that the stored internal roads have changed If you select OK at the time the program will update the roads checking the paths of all files of the project When you find a file with the old road will also have been moved and will change the way of updating the new road project Note that th
250. he publisher will assume you are creating a new dialogue and assign a default set of properties To get to the screen I change a property double click the left mouse button in an empty area of the window Performing a double click on a control will show the properties Defining controls will be explained in the next section All dialogs have the following properties 7 7 1 Tittle The default text Dialog Title title of the dialog can be changed to describe the content or purpose of the dialogue CDlIgTitle function can be used to define or change this title at the time of execution If you define a format use the title Form View display format while in the dialog editor Upon execution this property will be ignored and the format appears without title To display a title during the initialization process it will take cAppTitle calling from within the main application program or from the subroutine contained within cetwin b cPrelInit 7 7 2 Prefix W32APBLD assigns the default prefix dlg and a value indicating the number of dialogues that have been created For example the prefix for the first dialogue will DLGL When you try to modify the code it is important to remember that the prefix must be unique as these characters will be added at the beginning of all the names of the variables GLOBAL and subroutines used in the program dialog If you change the prefix in a later session then a message appears advising you to update
251. he row number 0 corresponding to the row of column headers If you set the columns to be displayed autoenumeren then led them in Microsoft Excel 173 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetColWidth call grid col width Sets the width in pixels that the column will be specified as the second parameter The number 0 is the column that shows the number or title of each row Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetCursorColor call grid r v y Sets the color to have the cursor or active cell delimiter 1 value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are 0 255 Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetCursorPos call grid row column Set as active cell which is defined by the row and column specified as the second and third parameters Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetDim call grid num_filas num_columnas Sets the number of rows and columns that you will have the grid If the number of rows or columns or current is less than ordered will be added or deleted rows or columns respectively necessary so that the grid passes have dimensions specified as a parameter Requires CET grid dll file or later date 23 04 2003 call w32GridSetEditable gri
252. hey appear on screen Multiple Selection on multiple choice Allows the user to select more than one item Fixed Font on Source fixed Take for characters in a font display fixed such that the list elements may be listed in columns No Integral Height Resize the box off list at the time of execution so that only complete lines are visible The special property of alphanumeric initial values be saved with no dialogue only used for design purposes We recommend that you use this feature to make sure that the size of the box is the right list and any label text control in the top of the list box is aligned with the columns in alphanumeric There is also a property of type fixed width font to make it easier for screen representation of the elements of the list of columns The nonintegral height option allows you to specify the exact height of the list box may appear even partial lines if you have not properly sized The default is a full height if necessary you can resize the list box at runtime so that only complete lines are visible By default a list box lets you select a single element The property can be specified multiple selections if you want to allow the user to select multiple items by entering a CTRL click the LeftMouse You can select a set of elements by clicking on the first item and then clicking on the last with a SHIFT LeftMouse A list box can also have the property Sorted classified When specified the items will be sorted
253. hide the toolbar When the toolbar is visible window is automatically sized to fit the screen The CALL statement syntax is cShowToolBar call status Where state is an integer 0 to hide the toolbar or to view Note that if you want to be visible on the toolbar when you start your program it is recommended to call this function from the cetwin b file you are using If you created a new toolbar with a call to CToolBar your toolbar will be displayed automatically Otherwise it will display the default toolbar cShowVersion This routine can be used to display the version of the Application Development System each component of the system running in a message box The statement syntax is call CShowVersion The version of each component execution system cetcab lib ctb32 lib cetcmpt lib and brtm exe will be displayed in separate windows The last window display can be hidden by application window since brtm is a separate task If you can not see the messages move or minimize the application window cSizeApp Window This function can be used to size the main application window to a certain size The syntax of the call is cSizeApp Window call x y Where xy 1s the new height and width in units of pixels The easiest way to determine the width and height of the application is to open a dialog box to the desired size and then look at its width and height properties Remember that the maximum default size character based windo
254. hlighted it lights Messages are defined in a separate file called STRINGTABLE cetuser rc This section contains the comment Add notes here in ID_WINSUB A comment is a line beginning with two slashes forward The syntax of the line point is identifier string nHelp The ID is the unique ID value associated with the menu item ID_WINSUBx The string is the text to be displayed in the status bar The aid is a short string one or two words that appear in a small window when the cursor is moved to the button of the toolbar associated with the menu item Note that the string and the help are separated with the newline character n The following will define a prompt message for menu Add New Client which serves as an example to the previous section ID_WINSUB3 Add a new customer to the database nCreate When the menu item appears highlighted the text Add a new customer to the database appears in the status bar when visible If a button on the toolbar has been defined for the menu timely assistance Add New will appear in a window when the mouse cursor is over the button The line feed character n is used to separate these two elements in the chain 4 5 8 Changing the message About The menu item Help About Help About displays the application name version and information of property rights in a message box By default this information refers to the Application Development System w 32 CET Follow these steps to
255. hould create temporary work files in a multi user environment The following example shows how to create an indexed file with a unique name for each user The file will be archived in the tmp Z drive on a remote server cLogin call ADDROF user ADDROF password REM The string will be filled depending on the content REM username filename Z TMP WORK amp user Berase call filename Bcreate call filename amp INDEXED keylen RECLEN 100 10 OPEN 1 filename update indexed This procedure will work equally with sequential files In this case instead of the functions and Berase Bcreate use OPEN with the option to write the file OUTPUT or EXTEND option to add new data to the end of file cMaxSize This routine is used to size a window to the maximum supported size 25 lines of text using the current font If the window is already full size this function has no effect It requires no arguments The syntax is call cMaxSize cMessageBoxOkC CMessageBoxOkC function is provided to display a message box with OK and Cancel buttons The program will be suspended until the user selects a button cMessageBoxOkC requires two arguments a string to be displayed in the message box and an integer variable that will be used to return the result The statement syntax is CALL cMessageBoxOkC menu ADDROF result Where men specifies the string to display result is a value indicating which button was selec
256. ialize dialog save area REM inistart call w32GetParent addrof padres cani w32CreateListH padre 10 195 475 180 addrof lis cali w32ListGetEventsExl padre 1is 400 addrof evento addrof 1_item addrof 1_sub REM iniend call w32SetCtrlColorN Set of functions that allow you to set the colors of both the FormView controls and controls in the Dialogues where N is the group of color settings w32SetCtriColor1 call father c500 1 0 0 255 255 0 order parameters 1 Handle to the control container to modify 2 Control Manager to modify 3 Value 0 255 scale concerning Red for background 1 for transparent background 4 Value 0 255 scale concerning Green for background 5 Value 0 255 scale concerning Blue for the background 6 value of O to 255 scale regarding Red for text 7 Value 0 255 scale concerning Green for text 8 Value 0 255 scale concerning Blue for text w32CreateWebCtrl call father idcontrol source posx posy width height addrof control This feature allows you to create controls at runtime hosting websites or files stored on disk The significance of the main parameters are as follows Father reference to the dialog must be the value returned by w32GetParent Idcontrol Number to be used to identify the control to be created It s the same identify using standard controls W32 CET Source is a string that identifies the website eg www google es
257. ialog example with progress bar 101 Chapter 8 W 32 Window Functions 103 8 1 Introduction 103 8 2 Using C language routines 103 8 2 1 Functions list 117 8 3 W 32 functions list 118 Chapter9 BASIC subroutines 122 9 1 Introduction 122 9 2 Compiling programs that call BASIC Subroutines 122 9 3 BASIC subroutines 122 9 4 MAIN sentence 122 95 SUB sentence 123 9 6 GLOBAL sentence 123 9 7 CLEAR sentence 124 98 EXIT sentence 124 9 9 Converting existing applications in BASIC CET 124 9 10 A conversion example of an application BASIC CET 125 9 11 Differences cet basic conventional programs 125 9 11 1 Error handling 126 9 11 2 RESTORE y READ with the DATA sentences 126 9 11 3 COMMON sentences 126 9 11 4 User defined functions 126 Chapter 10 ODBC support 127 10 1 Introduction 127 10 2 Opening a file 127 10 3 Reading a file 128 Index 10 4 10 4 1 Updating a column 10 4 2 Deleting a record 10 5 Chapter 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Chapter 12 Development Utilities 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 Updating a file An example program Introduction Bcopy Bcreate command El comando Blist Bpretty command Brenum command CETLNK32 command Dcheck command BSORT command 12 9 1 Instalation 129 2 BSORT sintax Chapter 13 Routines performed in C 13 1 13 2 Introduction Routines performed in C 13 2 1 Functions of file
258. ied data will be added trailing spaces The total length is specified can not be greater than the key field when the key is an index file or greater than the length of the record when it comes to data fields Note that before classifying indexed files ASCII format the registry key is concatenated to the data field This means that any specification from to be displaced by the key length It also means that the key can develop in all normal sorting options D indicates that the field be sorted in descending order instead of ascending order is the default 208 Chapter 12 Development Utilities A file can sort by up to 32 fields using a single command If more than one field separate each with a comma especlave instructions or space Examples are included in the next section and appendix espesel The specifications of selection can be used to select records from the input file by the specification criteria field Just be sorted and written to the output file records that meet the criteria Enter the specifications in the following format using commas or spaces as separators The field in binary format files and off field variables used in the same manner as previously noted S field desc field operator constant OR S specifies that the following instructions are to be used to select the records to be sorted This character should precede immediately without comma and space the first definition of field sele
259. iles ODBCxx DSN lt Name Source gt files The second format opens the name of a specific source file that was created when you configured the source file through ODBC Administrator For example the following statement must open a source file called Test Data to read and write on Channel 5 in snapshot mode OPEN 5 ODBCSS DSN Test Data UPDATE INDEXED When you open a file using the explicit name the name must end with a semicolon sign Otherwise you will see a runtime error File not Found file not found 127 Chapter 10 ODBC support 10 3Reading a file Once the OPEN statement connects to the source file the key field of the READ statement is used to obtain information specific to the source file and access records Among the key may use any of the following reserved words or may be an SQL SELECT statement TABLES Returns all table names of type table that are found within the source file Two values are returned with each table name and type ALLTABLES Returns all the names of the tables including system tables Two values are returned for each table the name and type TYPES return information about supported data types The five types of return values are Native type data base The type associated SQL The precision of the column If the column is case sensitive or not If the column is searchable or not If the column is not a column or counter auto increment The column prefix The column suffix
260. images and fonts that are no longer needed in the execution of the program The system running Windows applications released from memory all controls and objects belonging to a dialog when it is closed 159 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 However sometimes it is necessary to load resources in a dialogue that is no longer needed before this is closed in these cases should be used to free w32DeleteObject function objects mostly images and fonts and function to release the w32DestroyWindow memory controls w32GetBitmapDimensions call path addrof w addrof high Returns the width and height in pixels of BMP image whose path is specified as the first parameter If there is no image width values and high will be 0 w32CreatelmageHEx call hand file x y width height addrof Picture addrof control This function has the same behavior as w32CreatelmageH except that it adds a penultimate parameter that returns a reference to the image so that if necessary can be released with a call to w32DeleteObject w32B3DH call button This function is identical except w32B3D is added to the initial parameter to specify the reference button w32GetWindow value obtained This procedure avoids the need to put the focus on a control and thus improves performance w32BFlatH call button This function is identical except w32BFlat is added to the initial parameter to specify the reference button w3
261. include debugging information in some files enable the flag in the properties of each individual file When a source file has debug flag enabled the file icon will be red instead of blue as would be normal Note that the debugger can be used only during the development phase of your project From now execute the option can not be used Therefore when the program is ready for distribution be sure to disable this feature and run the command re build and see your application After compiling the files press the command Debug menu The commands that are available are Point Break stop Inserts a breakpoint at the current cursor position Properties x m File Location CAEJEMPLOSWENTANAS b m Compilable File Properties Global Properties C Current Properties 2d cen All Clear clear all removes all breakpoints in the project You can also remove them one by one from the list that displays Show All press the Delete key Show All show all displays a list of all breakpoints inserted in the project files Wath displays a window containing a list of all the variables that are being used in the file This command is initially uninhabited AutoWatch dialog window variables Watch is automatically displayed whenever there is a breakpoint during execution This is the default behavior Continue when the program is stopped upon reaching a breakpoint this option causes the program to continue its e
262. ing the types of controls Change the appearance and manner of implementation of controls Using RunTime functions to modify the look and behavior Modifying the code generated by the dialog editor 7 2 Creating a user interface When creating new applications or convert an existing program based on characters the first step to create the user interface is familiar with the features offered by the dialog editor We have included simple dialogs and display formats to illustrate some characteristics If you have already made text based programs the next step would be to use the Import Template Dialogs Import dialog templates to convert each of the screens designed in text based application in order to obtain the corresponding windows dialog and can be loaded into the dialog editor to modify their appearance control properties etc At this point I d be prepared to modify the source code and create a display format model that includes all registration search routines and data validation and formatting generally used in their programs These routines plus those that are specific to the program such as input output operations to files can be stored in external files that are defined with include statements in this way can be used comfortably from foals programs Probably you will want to customize the framework to display another menu toolbars etc which automatically gives CET programs A previous chapter of this manual explains how to make
263. int print Select a Table name or Q to quit linput thame if tname Q then quit mat read 1 COLUMNS tname col REM Chequea si ha llegado al final del fichero EOF EOF en las REM columnas es un error if eof 1 msgbox No columns in the selected table goto tables ifend REM Saca por pantalla las columnas de esta tabla print print print Available Column names 1 print for 1 1 to 20 if col i 1 then BREAK print TAB 8 col i 1 col i 2 col 1 3 next i REM Deja al usuario escoger con que columnas trabajar print print print Select Column names comma separated for retrieval or for all 130 linput cname mat read 1 SELECT cname FROM tname a REM Comprueba si ha llegado al final del fichero EOF EOF REM sobre SELECT significa que no se eligi ning n registro if eof 1 msgbox EOF on SELECT goto tables Chapter 10 ODBC support ifend REM Saca por pantalla las columnas seleccionadas del registro REM elegido while 1 print print mat readnext 1 key rslt if eof 1 then BREAK for 1 1 to 10 if rsit 19 then BREAK print TAB 8 print rsit i next i wait wend print End of Record Set Reached wait REM Selecciona otra tabla print CRT CLEAR goto tables It has been another example within the library WIN32 our BBS as odbc zip This file contains a program that uses ODBC special format designed t
264. inting is sent to the printer The first phase for printing real Windows has already been implemented for you to select a specific printer or allow the user to select one via the print dialog In any case printing is still ASCII characters with control sequences embedded The next phase will allow you to send an image to the printer To use the new printer interface check the following environment variable in the initialization file W32APP w32 default B_WINPRINT 1 Note that if B_WINPRINT not activated or has a value other than one Windows application used printing method Bat documented at the end of this section When used B_WINPRINT B_PRINTERn variable can also be used for specifying the printer on one of the following ways e If B_PRINTERn not activated or has the value DEFAULT eg B_PRINTER1 DEFAULT then it will use the system default printer specified in the Printer Manager As soon as you close the channel work automatically switches to Print Manager e They define a specific printer setting B_PRINTERn printer name The Printer Manager will print control in the same way it does when the variable is set to DEFAULT Under Windows NT and 95 this has to be the name you assign to the printer in the Printer Manager Under Windows 3 1 3 11 there is no option to put names to the printers so use the name of the driver that is connected for example HP LaserJet III Note that this is the only case where the number o
265. ion as w32CreateList The difference is that you no longer have to put the focus on a control to create the list within it but rather the x and y are relative to the overall dialog box referenced by the parent parameter use the call to w32GetParent for this first parameter All lists of desired process events see w32ListGetEventsn must have been created with the call to w32CreateListH w32ListGetEventsn call father lis button addrof event addrof param1 addrof param2 Where n is a value from 1 to 9 Calling this function group can point to the system controls whose list of events generated by the user want to be notified The feature allows you to specify a dummy button ID whose associated section is the code to execute when an event occurs on the list The last three parameters indicate the names of the variables that will hold at each instant information on the type of event occurred and its properties The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father referring to the dialog box The value returned by the call to w32GetParent lis control identifier list The value returned by the call to w32CreateListH button a value between 200 and 299 that designates the ID button number real or fictional whose associated section in SUB BtnClick subroutine code is executed when events occur Event variable name that will contain the value of the number of events produced at each instant Param1 the firs
266. iphone system There is also a helpful area where you can download the exhibits 1 11 Versions CET throughout his life has evolved resulting in a number of versions the most recent are 9 31 m K z 9 32 b m u 9 40 c d 9 41 a 9 50 9 52 9 65 and 9 72 16 Chapter 2 Overview Chapter 2 Overview 2 1 Introduction The Application Development System w 32 CET is designed for commercial applications for Microsoft Windows operating systems W 32 differs from most development packages for MS Windows that provides the tools to move existing programs methodically 3rd generation to modern applications of graphical user interface GUI 2 2 The base language Microsoft and other companies market development tools have rediscovered the BASIC as the best language to use routines macros and programs quickly BASIC language has grown in sophistication and power while maintaining ease of use The CET Application Development System w 32 also used as the base language BASIC CET BASIC is a language rich with excellent facilities with which to develop commercial applications CET BASIC is easy to learn and expand Case still running very complicated operations have an easy syntax CET BASIC includes sophisticated control structures a large number of data types all forms and types usual file operations hundreds of string handling functions data conversion screen handling formatted output capture and recovery errors Unlike man
267. is code will be 0 when the operation is successful 1 when the Clipboard is not able to open probably being used by another user cCbEmpty This function is used to copy an alphanumeric string to Cliboard The function syntax is cCbEmpty call addrof rc where rc This variable is used to enter a return code This code will be 0 when the operation is successful 1 when the Clipboard is not able to open probably being used by another user cCbPaste This function is used to paste an alphanumeric string from Cliboard The function syntax is cCbPaste call addrof rc sting where string Is the alphanumeric string to copy rc This variable is used to enter a return code This code will be 0 when the operation is successful 1 when the Clipboard is not able to open probably being used by another user 2 Indicates that the Clipboard is empty 104 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions cCheckItem This routine is used to change the value of a radio button that indicates its current state For example if a menu item is mutually exclusive options such as on off or enabled disabled this feature can be used to find out whether or not that option button activated The CALL statement syntax is cCheckltem item status Where item ID is the value an integer between 1 and 250 associated with the menu item For example the value for ID_WINSUB1 ID is 1 and 250 for ID_WINSUB250 state is an integer value or to
268. is formatted binary records For clarity you can use a space between this and the next option eg 80 For example Bsort infile outfile B 80 Nnn is the maximum record length that must be specified when the input file is sequential field is the position of the field within a record containing binary data format to be used in the sorting operation The key field in indexed files are preceded by a O and the data fields with 1 Note that this parameter should not be used for ASCII files as these are composed of raw logs eg a string field per record Off field descriptor is used to describe the contents of the field You can specify the following F indicates a floating point number This parameter is used only in binary logs ASCII files consist of data strings I indicates that the data is an integer value This option is used only in binary logs For example to sort the input file for the field 3 containing an integer value expressions are valid B31 or B 31 From to N indicates a string that begins with the character position start and ends with the last character position of the field for which you want to sort To sort by the string consisting of the first 5 characters that compose the field 6 enter B6 1 5 or B 6 1 5 N The option may be used to indicate that the string is a number which must be converted to determine the grade range correctly If the chain length is less current than specif
269. is to work successfully All files are dynamically assigned BASIC CET so that the option of THEOS file size is ignored If the command is used to create key files THEOS program then creates an indexed file The following examples will create files indexed data custname idx and data custname dat with a key length of 11 and a record length of 350 bytes Bcreate data custname indexed reclen keylen 11 350 Bcreate data custname data indexed reclen keylen 11 350 12 4El comando Blist Blist command can be used to display the contents of a file indexing direct or sequential A message will display the name and type of the file The syntax of the command below Note that by entering the command without parameters displays a command line help Blist h f desdeclave t hastaclave c count l length p page m margin field numbers v u lt filename gt lt file_name gt Specifies the DOS format file or THEOS For example any of the following apply to list names cp data name Cp data name or cp data name cp data nombre H 203 Chapter 12 Development Utilities Displays the contents of the file in hexadecimal format F desdeclave Start a list from the registration key to the registry desdeclave hastaclave keyed with a key index of a file or a record of a direct file The default is to start at the beginning of the file T hastaclave Finish the list in the registry not including hastac
270. istGetEventsEx3 This function group function group replaces w32SetEventsn and w32ListGetEventsn Ejemplo SUB dlglEvent SELECT CET_EVTYPE REM Event notification save area REM evtstart CASE 15 SELECT CMDID CASE 400 Rem 400 es el ID asociado a la lista en la llamada a w32ListGetEventsExl Rem Notificaciones para la lista lis Rem evento gt Numero de evento Rem 1_item gt Propiedad 1 Rem 1_sub gt Propiedad 2 SELECT eventos CASE 1 Rem Click en un campo Msgbox Click en el campo amp str l_item amp amp strs 1_sub CASE 2 Rem Cambio de seleccion o bien cambio de casilla de verificacion rem Msgbox Ha cambiado el item amp str l_item call w32ListGetSelltem lis addrof item5 if item lt gt 1 then call w32ListGetText lis item 0 addrof text addrof ret call csetCtrlValue d1g1HDLG 100 text ifend CASE 3 Rem Doble Click en un campo Msgbox Doble Click en el campo amp str l_item amp amp strs 1_sub CASE 4 Rem Click con el bot n de derecho en un campo Msgbox Click con bot n derecho en el campo Estrs l_item S amp amp str 1_sub CASE 5 Rem Se ha pulsado la tecla Msgbox Tecla amp str l_item 189 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 CASE 6 Rem Click en la cabecera de la columna Msgbox Click en columna 8 str 1_sub call w32ListSortItems lis 1_sub 0 1 addrof ret CEND CEND REM evtend CEND SEXIT SUB dlglInit REM Init
271. item and subitem w32ListSetColumn call list column title addrof ret Change the title of a column in a list The column value is the column index starting from 0 whose title you want to change 165 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 w32ListSetFullBkColor call lis r v y Sets the background color of the list items lis with no text 1 value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are 0 255 w32MAPISendMail call subject content direccion_destino nombre_destino numero_ficheros file addrof ret Enables sending email are user intervention The syntax is Subject Subject of e mail Content email content Direccion_detino e mail address beginning with SMTP eg SMTP job omegasystems com Nombre_destino Alternative name to specify the person for whom the e mail numero_ficheros number of files attached Can be 0 or 1 file full path of the file to attach If the parameter is O numero_ficheros discard any submission attached ret return value A value other than 0 indicates error Example w32MAPISendMail call e mail auto Look how well I write SMTP job omegasystems com Job Rodriguez 1 c winnt system32 autoexec nt addrof ret w32CreateMenu call addrof menu Create a reference to a context menu The return va
272. item dialog GLOBAL dataEntered REM used in the line item dialog REM 1stend include inv1 IDH If all variables were global control using the default no unnecessary lines only have GLOBAL statement in the file HDI but also those sentences would also have to be duplicated in the main program SUB INV1 Only added a line of code in the secure area of the main subroutine REM sized matrix invoice record so you can have 373 REM items REM 23 items in this format 7x50 REM line elements within the dialog dim rec 373 SUB inv1BtnClick Added code to this subroutine to handle keypress events command buttons by the customer Note that 1f you use any check box or radio buttons can also be processed in this subroutine SELECT CMDID CASE 200 REM Bot n de b squeda 87 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 msgbox not implemented exit CASE 201 REM Bot n de elementos de la linea de factura REM Invoca el di logo de elemento de l nea Si alg n elemento de la REM l nea es actualizado REM el di logo actualizar la matriz del registro de la factura que est REM como global y establecer el flag modificado de documento que REM tambi n una variable global call line REM Recalcula el total de la factura despu s de volver del elemento de REM la l nea perteneciente al di logo y sacar por pantalla el resultado gosub calc total call cSetEditText invi HDLG 120 total exit CASE 202 REM Bot n de fi
273. iteria So just be sorted and written to the output as specified these records previously selected In direct or indexed files you can select a range of records based on the key value You can specify alternate directories for temporary work files 12 9 1 Instalation Bsort income is distributed as an executable file with an error message The Bsort executable in a directory search path Typically this will be the same directory you use to store other programs CET The error messages caused by Bsort are stored in lib Bsort_err UNIX or 1 lib bsort err DOS While the operation does not require file Bsort error this should be located in the lib whether to display error messages 129 2 BSORT sintax Bsort parameters can be indicated from the command line from a judgment CSI CSH within a CET BASIC program or from a text file sequentially The command syntax is Bsort infile outfile dirtrabajo especlave espesel espesalj Where infile is the name of the file containing the data to be sorted The filenames can be in the syntax of the operating system in use or in THEOS format No names are supported library files THEOS Bsort also allows classification parameters stored in a sequential ASCII file with extension Qs When this type is specified in the input file the remaining line arguments are ignored Bsort seek the input file in the directory specified by the environment variable B_FPATH and then in the curr
274. izes the contents of both boxes listed CALL cAddLBoxContents dlgCETHDLG 300 mataddrof FIRST CALL cAddLBoxContents dlgCETHDLG 301 mataddrof MULTI REM Set the initial state of the check box Option 1 REM found CALL cSetCheck dlgCETHDLG 801 1 REM iniend EXIT At the end of this subroutine is a special secured area which can be used to store any user routine GOSUB or user role This feature is used in many programs examples INVOICE It is also important to note that there has been no error handling in this example But in a real application each BASIC subroutine that could result in error should have its own error handler using the sentences ON ERROR GOTO In that case it may store routines errors in the previously cited last safe area 7 12Copying a dialog A program is a subroutine BASIC dialogue and sentences containing a SUB The following example shows how to use OBW32 to compile individual modules in separate files Obj and then link them together OBW32 c dlgcet b Cetdemo b cetdemo OBW32 or dlgcet obj This is done automatically when using W32APBLD utility w 32 integrated development environment to create and develop projects that will result in executable programs Projects have been developed for the program menu CETDEMO examples and examples of other programs 7 13The main program The program displays the dialog CETDEMO example dlgCET b example that has been used to illustrate some of the fe
275. k pila de ventanas cDisplayInfo Obtiene la resoluci n de pantalla y n mero pe de colores EJ e cDlgTitle Establece un titulo para el di logo cEnableCtrl Habilita o deshabilita un control cEnableDocking Habilita una barra de herramientas movible cEnableltem Habilita o deshabilita un elemento de men cEnableMainWin Controla el estado de activaci n de la ventana de la aplicaci n cEndDlg Establece el CMDID para finalizar el di logo cEnumPrinters Obtiene informaci n de las impresoras disponibles cFontValues Devuelve los valores de un fuente font lo 119 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions A i O o cForceExit Sale del programa sin un cuadro de mensaje tipo Aceptar cFormBtnClick Envia un evento a una forma activa a Te cGetCheck Obtiene el estado de una caja de comprobaci n o A de un radio bot n cGetComboObtienelaselecci n de una caja Combo e cGetCtrlText Obtiene el contenido de un control est tico WA una etiqueta cGetCtrlValue Lee el contenido de un control interactivo EA cGetCursor Obtiene las posiciones actuales de columna A y fila del cursor cGetEditText Obtiene el valor de un control de edici n Bars cGetBoxSelection Obtiene el valor del ID seleccionado de una EE caja de listado cGetBoxString Obtiene el string seleccionado de una caja de listado cGetLimitEditText Consigue el valor maximo de caracteres a introducir en un editor de texto cGetMouse
276. l context addrof bordeizq Returns in pixels of the left edge unprintable page printer context referenced by Requires cetprint dll dll Example prt b w32PrinterOffsetY call context addrof bordesup Returns the value of pixels of the upper edge of the printable page printer not referenced by context Requires cetprint dll dll Example prt b w32PrinterWidth call context addrof anchuratotal Returns the width in pixels of the total page printable area unprintable area printer context referenced by Requires cetprint dll dll Example prt b w32PrinterHeight call context addrof alturatotal Returns the height in pixels of the total page printable area unprintable area printer context referenced by Requires cetprint dll dll Example prt b w32ListSortItems call lis column alphanumeric order addrof ret To sort the list items according to the values and types of the fields in the specified column lis reference to the list returned by the function w32CreateList Column Column to sort by list Starting at 0 alphanumeric 0 alphanumeric sort 2 and 3 numeric sort sort by date order 1 up and 2 down 146 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 w32CreateUpDown call ini end addrof updown Associates an interval to control existing edit control The focus should be placed earlier in the edit box Use for this cSetFocus function The order parameters and ini
277. l that is connected to your computer or a remote printer local network e Does the Remote Printer works under Windows for Workgroups or some other type of LAN Because there are many variables involved in the printing process w 32 runs a batch file BAT to send the file to the printer The batch file is called CETPRNTX BAT default will cetbin where x corresponds to the number of printer For example PRINTER and execute both cetprntl bat PRINTER1 PRINTER2 cetprnt2 bat executed and so on 221 Chapter 14 Implementation Notes The cetprntl bat file included with the compiler contains only comments and not print any file To enable printing must enter the appropriate command within the environment in which it is The comments in this file contains two examples to run a Windows and other Windows NT To determine which command should be used first make sure you have a printer and is correctly installed Then determine the required command from an MS DOS window For example if you are running Windows cetprntl bat send the file to the printer by entering the command COPY CETPRNT1 BAT PRN Note that the DOS PRINT command can not be used from Windows as a resident but can be used under Windows NT Once you can print from MS DOS cetprntl bat edit the file and insert the commands you want A single line for Windows is REM COPY 1 PRN Delete All Entries in the file containing the following line COPY 1 PRN The name of the file to be
278. l be continually updated on the status bar status 7 3 3 Copying a Control To copy a selected control first use the Edit Copy command menu Then select Edit Paste command and move to the position where you will place the copy Because all controls have a set of properties control copying its properties are copied except ID values and BASIC variable names 63 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 Later you will find that this is a handy feature when you design a form that contains a set of related controls such as address1 address2 city etc 7 3 4 Deleting a Control A selected control can be removed using the Edit Cut command from the menu the button on the main toolbar or the Delete key Also available is a delete command in the menu controls Controls 7 3 5 Selecting multiple controls You can also move copy or delete an entire group of controls You can select a group of controls for any of the following methods 1 Select a simple control Then select the CTRL key and click on other controls If the new control is not part of this selection is added to it and enclosed in a blue box If the control is already part of a group will be deselected 2 Use erasing technique dragging around the contour of the desired controls A dotted rectangle will appear on the trail of the mouse Release the mouse button when all controls have been fully enclosed by the rectangle Any control that remains within the defined area will be s
279. l_fichero_prj nombre_fichero_bat_que_se_creara_en el subdirectorio_bld_del proyecto valor_de_b_cetlib addrof return Function that generates a file Bat in the subdirectory Bld of a BOT project W32 specified as an argument This file Bat contain statements to compile the entire project w32CompileProject requires Seller CETAPBLD DLL dated 1 29 06 or later Ejemplo call Bgetenv addrof 1ib B_CETLIB call w32CompileProject f cet w32 genew32 grid grid prj compila bat 1lib addrof retorno call w32CreateTWAIN padre id VintaSoft Twain posX posY alto ancho addrof TWAIN Crea un control de captura de im genes Requiere la librer a CETTwain dll y el componente ActiveX Call w32PDFCreatorInit ddestino fdestino addrof retorno Configura el spooler para que la impresi n del documento que se realice a continuaci n resulte en que se cree un documento pdf cuyo nombre est especificado por el par metro fdestino en el directorio que se especifique como primer argumento El valor de retorno ser 1 si se produjo alg n error o 1 en caso contrario Requiere que el equipo tenga instalada la utilidad PDFCreator que es freeware Requiere la librer a CETActiveX dll de fecha 22 12 2005 o posterior Ejemplo DEF FNConvertirAPDFS origen tipo fdestino ddestino call w32GetDefaultPrinter addrof imppre addrof ret call w32PDFCreatorInit ddestino fdestino ad
280. la tecla Fl CEND CASE 231 SELECT teclal01 CASE 33 Rem Re Pag CASE 34 Rem Av Pag CEND CEND REM btnend GOSUB dlgl BTNEND SEXIT SUB dlglInit REM Initialize dialog save area REM inistart Rem poner el foco en un boton cualquiera 200 p ej para hallar la referencia al cuadro de dialogo Call cSetFocus dlglHDLG 200 Rem Obtener la referencia al dialogo Solo es necesario llamar a esta funcion una vez al inicio del dialogo call w32GetParent addrof padre Rem Obtener la referencia al control de edici n con ID 100 Call w32GetWindow padre 100 addrof ed100 Rem Obtener la referencia al control de edici n con ID 101 Call w32GetWindow padre 101 addrof ed101 Rem Proceso de enter para id 100 y 101 al pulsar tecla se ejecutar el c digo de los botones ficticios 230 y 231 call w32EditENTER 1 ed100 230 addrof teclal00 call w32EditENTER 2 ed101 231 addrof teclal01 REM iniend call w32BrowseForFolder padre titulo addrof dir addrof ret 153 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Presents the user with a dialog box to select a directory Father is the reference to the active application window Must be the value returned by the call to w32GetParent title help text that appears in the dialog box dir full directory path chosen by the user ret 0 if the user pressed the cancel button example Buscar carpeta 21x Seleccione el directorio destino par
281. lation includes OBW32 administrator the compiler OBW32 the runtime system RUNW32 exe and resource files cetwin obj and cetwin res This product is equipped with a number of libraries Some libraries provide CET BASIC language support and development functions Others provide exotic features such as ODBC The compiler will recognize and seek w 32 standard libraries automatically and ensure that it is believed or linke correctly a single executable Resource files are a powerful development system which allows you to deploy Windows features in their applications without having to modify its source code See Chapter Manager Windows for details on how to use resource files and chapter w 32 Window Functions for more information on how to use specific features The Application Development System w 32 comprises two compilers Both produce 32 bit executables one is a 16 bit compiler BB16 designed for systems development under Windows and the other is a 32 bit compiler bb32 for use under Windows NT and Windows environments 95 It will use a compiler flag 32 to OBW32 use the 32 bit version If you have used a UNIX compiler CET will be familiar with the advantages of a 32 bit compiler On the other hand if you used MS DOS compiler will have encountered the problem of not having space for data or source code in some of its extensive programs W 32 The compiler supports 32 bit 4GB address space continuum and a lot of space for text and data beyon
282. lave key The default option is to terminate at the end of the file C count Specifies the number of records copied L length Specifies the maximum length of the print line The leftover characters are printed on the next line The default length is 79 P page Specifies the length of the output page The default length is 24 rows Use p 0 to disable paging M margin Specifies the number of characters to indent the second and subsequent lines of a multiline record The default is 5 characters Numbers field Specifies the field numbers to be listed in a formatted file The default is to list all the fields in the record The first data field starts with the number 1 The keys of an indexed file and the registration numbers of a direct file is always displayed V Enables verbose mode expanded to show in the listing the number type and length field before the contents of each field The field type is for a string S F for Float or Integer Ito For example 123 45 6789 1817 DGRam rez Inc 2H11 Don Gillet 3817 U Specifies that the files are formatted UX BASIC The content of an indexed file is displayed in alphabetical order key Direct files are displayed in ascending numerical order 12 5Bpretty command Bpretty utility can be used to rearrange the spacing and hierarchy or indentation of sources CET BASIC programs to reflect its structure Note that the syntax and operation of the 32 bit ver
283. le Idh used to detect a condition to dialogue and assigns the ID button end condition within dlgCETENDBTN variable and returns the values of all interactive controls Since these controls are defined as global this information will be passed to the main program MAIN for further processing The generated code in the file HDI has been included here DIgCETENDDLGO 82 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 call cGetCheck dlgCcETHDLG 800 addrof dlgCETDISABLE call cGetCheck dlgCcETHDLG 801 addrof dlgCETOPT1 call cGetCheck dlgCcETHDLG 802 addrof dlgCETOPT2 call cGetEditText dlgCETHDLG 101 addrof dlgCETFILENAME call cGetLBoxSelection dlgCETHDLG 300 mataddrof digCETSINGLE call cGetLBoxSelection dlgCETHDLG 301 mataddrof dlgCETMULTI digCETENDBTN CMDID call cEndDlg dlgCETHDLG CMDID RETURN When creating dialog boxes often find it convenient to write the code editor to find the control values Furthermore when creating display formats typically write your own code to get these values depending on your specific needs In this case the property may establish dialogue so that these lines are not generated unnecessarily This is the way it was done in the example the end of chapter INVOICE 7 11 4 PrefixEvent subroutine This is a general purpose subroutine is called every time there is a specific type of event For example every time a program detects a change in an edit control yo
284. le program If not specified use the name OBW32 cetwin exe default For example the following command will use the 16 bit compiler to produce the executable cetwin exe default OBW32 pgmnuevo b B pgm is the name of the source file to compile BASIC Must have ASCII format with a B C PGMs is the name of one or more programs in C language compiled To use this feature the program should have a C The Microsoft C compiler version 8 0 should be available on your system Note that w 32 includes a variety of functions C These functions are explained in a chapter of this manual Other available functions are explained in the Manual CET BASIC Libraries A PGMs is the name of one or more programs in assembly with the asm These programs should be Microsoft MASM See the description of the compile S O PGMs is the name of one or more object modules with a obj 3 5 The compilations flags Compilation options control the execution of OBW32 Enter the command with no options to get the list of options and environment variables supported Each build option will be described in this section It is important to remember that the compilation flags must be entered exactly as they appear here either uppercase or lowercase 3 5 1 32 bits Option 32 The 32 option should only be used under Windows NT and Windows 95 that will be used to specify the 32 bit compiler If this option is omitted the compiler will use 16 bit by default example OBW
285. leCtrl inviHDLG 701 1 return Enterlnvoice REM Activa todos los controles excepto Invoice Get Search New REM Cancel y Exit Primero los controles de edici n for ctrl 101 to 122 CALL cEnableCtrl invi HDLG ctrl 1 next ctrl REM Los controles combo CALL cEnableCtrl inviHDLG 700 1 REM El bot n de l nea elemento fichero CALL cEnableCtrl invi HDLG 201 1 CALL cEnableCtrl invi HDLG 202 1 REM Desconecta Get search new invoice call cEnableCtrl inviHDLG 206 0 call cEnableCtrl inviHDLG 200 0 call cEnableCtrl invi HDLG 205 0 call cEnableCtrl inviHDLG 701 0 return calc total 92 REM Calcula el campo total a adiendo los portes impuestos y los REM elementos de la l nea frt tax call cGetEditText invi HDLG 121 addrof frt frt val frt call cGetEditText invi HDLG 122 addrof tax tax val tax total frt tax for num 1 to 50 REM Las lineas comienzan en rec 24 y tienen 7 campos REM busca el campo o accede al campo 7 idx 24 num 1 7 6 total total val rec idx Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 next num total str total return date format REM Da formato a los campos fecha date fld call cGetEditText invi HDLG cmdid addrof date fld date fld dte date fld return phone format REM Da formato a los campos tel fono phone fld call cGetEditText
286. lection was made CALL cSetEditText dlgCETHDLG 101 SELECTIONS IFEND CASE 800 REM Use the value of the Disable check box to enable disable the REM option check boxes CALL cGetCheck dlgCETHDLG 800 ADDROF STATE IF STATE 1 REM Box is checked disable controls CALL cEnableCtrl dlgCETHDLG 801 0 CALL cEnableCtrl dlgCETHDLG 802 0 ELSE REM Box is not checked enable controls CALL cEnableCtrl digCETHDLG 801 1 CALL cEnableCtrl dlgCETHDLG 802 1 IFEND CASE 207 REM The Next button may be used to change the contents of the REM list box The globals for the second list are defined at the REM top of the file IF USESECOND 1 MSGBOX Already displaying second choices ELSE CALL cAddLBoxContents dlgCETHDLG 300 mataddrof SECOND USESECOND 1 IFEND CEND REM btnend Note that none of the buttons above will lead to the end of the dialogue with EXIT A dialogue ends when the operator selects a command button that has the property final dialog on as the default OK button and Cancel button Press the ESC key has the same effect as pressing the Cancel button There is a special case when the operator terminates the dialog by selecting the menu command Close dialogue system Then return the value 1 A update format can detect that the system is closed close has left the program Exit or you pressed Alt F4 in Case 1 SELECT CASE your subroutine handling mouse events Code exists in the fi
287. les The commands are Command Shortcut Key Find search Ctrl F Find Next search next lt F3 gt Replace replace Ctrl H SelectAll Select All Ctrl A Go to Line go to line Ctrl G Note that the command has been added Select All so you can select the full text of a file without having to move the mouse across the entire file In addition to the standard features of Windows type editors W32APBLD editor allows the Insert key can be used to switch from insert to overwrite mode and vice versa By default the characters stop down every 8 characters in the Windows Notepad program To change this setting use the View Settings and enter a value of Num Chars number of characters between 1 and 16 in the Text Editor Tab Stops tab stops text editor Note that this change will not take effect until the next time you run W32APBLD 6 3 Using the debugger W 32 W 32 The debugger allows you to insert breakpoints in your BASIC source code then consider it at runtime the value of the variables that have been used in that file 6 3 1 Enable debugger To enable the debugger use the flag Za to be case sensitive For the information of the debugger is inserted into the BASIC source file during compilation 60 Chapter 6 The debugger W 32 Debugging can be enabled for one or more source files To enable the debugger for all BASIC files of your project set the flag Zd icon in the properties Basic Files If you only want to
288. licks the cancel button Cancel to close dialogue without canceling the process started The main program source code is stored in the file as follows prgmain b MAIN call prgmon msgbox done call cForceExit quit The source file subroutine PrgmonBtnClick prgmon b dialogue has been modified to detect the selection of a special button ID No 299 prgmonInit sent from the subroutine If detected it is a call to start the program cCreateProcess w 32 CALC While CALC is active it will show the progress bar Note that the character CHR 135 a small black grating is used to simulate a progress bar but you could also use any printable character Note that a call is made to cEndDlg to end the dialog automatically This is the operation performed when activated End Dialog property of a command button Because we do not alter the normal operation cancel use the function to replace cEndDlg SUB prgmonBtnClick REM z btnstart REM Check for our special button ID if CMDID 299 REM You can also start the new process in your MAIN REM and make hndl a global variable call cCreateProcess ADDROF hndl calc exe 1 progress CHR 135 stat 998 101 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 while stat 998 call cSetCtrlValue prgmonHDLG 100 progress if LEN progress lt 40 then progress progress CHR 135 else progress CHR 135 sleep 5 call cProcessStat hndl ADDROF stat wend REM We are done so end t
289. linea6 w32MessageBox call text title 4402 addrof retcode The execution result is the following Registro bloqueado El articulo 00214020 no se puede actualizar puesto que otro usuario lo esta modificando Indique el procedimiento a seguir ANULAR para cancelar la actualizacion REINTENTAR para ver si ya se ha liberado IGNORAR para descartarlo y pasar al siguiente Anular Jl lanorar The number 4402 is obtained from the sum of 2 Abort Retry and Ignore 48 exclamation icon 256 the second button is the default and 4096 Dialogue supersedes any system window Example mb b w32SetWindowText window title addrof return The system searches the last open window whose title is equal to window and assigns that window title title Return is equal to 0 if the title change is successful By way of example call cForceExit Rem Abrir la grabadora de sonidos call cWinExec sndrec32 1 Rem Buscar en el sistema la ultima ventana abierta cuyo Rem titulo contenga la expresion Grabadora de sonidos y Rem asignar a esa ventana el titulo Grabe Buenos dias call w32SetWindowText Grabadora de sonidos Grabe Buenos dias addrof retcode wait 4j Grabe Buenos dias MA E Archivo Edici n Efectos Ayuda Posici n Duraci n 0 00 seg 0 00 seg T aa eat p Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Ejemplo swt b
290. lines This has no effect on a simple combo box 7 8 3 Command buttons The button is one of the most used in the controls It gives the user an intuitive display that enables easy operation the user sees the label of the button and simply click on it with your mouse Because the command buttons are so intuitive normally used as menus The program will automatically detect which buttons have been punctured so that the desired option can be executed The program examples W32DEMOS menu offers the possibility to run example programs that use this feature By default any new dialogue has two buttons one that is OK and the other is Cancel The OK button properties are Property Value Effect Label OK Button Button label Shows the label on the button surface ID Control ID 200 value associated with the control Default Button on default button Button that lt Enter gt End Dialog on End dialog The end button selection dialogue Note that the OK button has the property default button on The dialogues in Windows normally have a default button is selected each time you press lt Enter gt There can be only one Default Button in each box Both the OK and Cancel buttons have the property End of Dialogue set so that the dialog will terminate and return values of any interactive control their respective variables when either button is selected The ESC key acts as the command close in the Windows system so it will also close the di
291. lines of text that make up the value of the multiline edit control specified by parameter control call w32EditGetLine control line addrof text addrof length Returns the control text owned multi line specified as a parameter starting from 0 The length return parameter contains the number of valid characters in the text string w32GetDiskFreeSpaceEx unit addrof bytesfree addrof retcode Returns the number of bytes that are free on the drive that you have specified This function has been introduced for large disk operations 164 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 call w32GetDiskSpaceEx unit addrof space addrof ret Returns the total drive capacity in bytes This function has been introduced for large disk operations call w32GetVersion addrof see Determines at run time if you are working on a platform 95 98 Me or NT 2000 XP Return 1 95 98 Me 2 NT 2000 XP call w32GetWindowID control addrof id Returns the identifier for the control using standard controls W32 CET call w32Get WindowRectEx control addrof L addrof top addrof der addrof background addrof ret Returns the coordinates relative to the dialog box the position of the upper and lower control is specified as a parameter call w32ImageBackgroundn father image width height addrof Skin Where n is a value from 1 to 9 Calling this function group to de
292. llation under Windows To determine if the package w 32 CET has been installed correctly insert the key dongle CET at the parallel output open the MS DOS or enter the following Runw32 or obw32 V The command should show the serial number in use Valid Not valid xi z CET W 32 App Builder RUNW32 EXE 9 40d W 3 5N 9999 12345 CET 4 32 App Builder RUNW32 EXE Y9 40d W3 5N 0 0 MySQL module version beta 2 Q MySQL module version beta 2 CET BASIC Program version 9 30b CET BASIC Program version 9 30b Using Specification File W32APP W32 Using Specification File W32APP W32 Authorization OK fen Product Option Code 1f Authorization FAILED Operating System Windows NT Operating System Windows NT Last Build on Mar 21 2003 Last Build on Mar 21 2003 Copyright C CET Software Inc 1986 2003 All rights reserved Copyright C CET Software Inc 1986 2003 All rights reserved 1 10Web site We have a website in www omegasystems com which has information about us and our products On the left are the links to the different sections of our website About us refers to our location functioning objetovos and staff CET Basic Explains the adjectives of language history and usefulness From this section you can go to the download area of CET with the link included Applications Available Index of programs created with their functions 4GL Generator Here is a summary of our work herramiente Uniphone Indicates the options and features Un
293. llowed the program may produce incorrect data without any notification would 3 7 25 B_OPTLOCK When set to one will cause the READNEXT and function as in READPREV THEOS after a RESUME These sentences will run without moving the pointer to the file registry retrying reading If a record is locked and this variable is not set CET BASIC will read the next record or earlier when running a RESUME 3 7 26 B_THLOCK Enabling this variable to 1 the program is suspended when it detects a stall condition CET BASIC suspends execution only when faced with a judgment or ON ERROR ON LOCK 43 Chapter 3 The W 32 compiler If this variable is set execution of an ON ERROR statement not generate an error when run blocking access statements that direct or indexed files Refer to chapter system error handling the Language Reference Manual 3 7 27 B_THPON Activate this variable to one to reverse the default meaning PON POFF as THEOS CET BASIC normally shows low intensity text under MS DOS and Windows environments Jogging B_THPON ensure the variable use of high intensity attribute in the foreground 3 7 28 B_THVAL Check this one variable to VAL functions and work as THEOS NBR This will make judgments as having below zero PRINT VAL abc If not used the environment variable this statement would generate a runtime error See the Language Reference Manual CET BASIC to see the standard way of dealing CET VAL functions and NBR 3 7 29
294. lows the user to validate the information entered in any edit box a dialogue by pressing the ENTER key so that the focus goes to next control This special behavior only affects the editing controls to which they are found associated function The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Hand referring to the edit control IDbotonESC a value between 200 and 299 that designates the ID button number real or fictional whose associated section in SUB BtnClick subroutine code is executed when the user presses ESCAPE being located in the control edition 148 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init In all dialogues that make up an executable to use a different function name for each edit control So for this special processing associated edit controls three functions to be used Call w32EditENTER 1 Call w32EditENTER2 Call w32EditENTER3 Ejemplo SUB dlglInit REM Initialize dialog save area REM inistart Rem poner el foco en un boton cualquiera 200 p ej para hallar la referencia al cuadro de dialogo Call cSetFocus dlglHDLG 200 Rem Obtener la referencia al dialogo Solo es necesario llamar a esta funcion una vez al inicio del dialogo call w32GetParent addrof padre Rem Obtener la referencia al control de edici n con ID 100 Call w32GetWindow padre 100 addrof ed100 Rem Obtener la r
295. lue should be used for any operation you want to perform with the menu call w32MenuInsertItem menu id tipo texto addrof ret Add a menu item to the end of The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Menu is the identifier of the menu to which you add the item Must be the value returned by w32CreateMenu ID ID that is associated with the menu item It is intended to help determine the selection made by the user In case the input is in turn a submenu the value of this parameter must be the same identifier Type is a value between O and 2 which determines the type of input that is being inserted 0 The item is a selectable item inserted normal 1 The item to be inserted is itself another menu submenu 2 The item to be inserted is a separation line unselectable Text text string to be displayed in the entrance w32MenultemBitmap call menu ID file addrof Picture Associates a file Bmp to menu item whose identifier ID is specified as a parameter The size of the image Bmp is 13 x 13 pixels to be displayed to the left of the text pertaining to the entry The return value of the function is a reference to the image that can be deleted to free up memory w32DeleteObject w32MenuPopup call menu control LH top addrof sel This is the only function regarding menus that have a visual effect Presents the menu as a parameter specified on the control indicated The above
296. me in the format THEOS abc are open as b a c If this variable is not set to 1 BASIC will try to open the file as A b c 41 Chapter 3 The W 32 compiler 3 7 10B_LKPATH Load this variable search paths used by executable files called by the judgments LINK CHAIN and RUN Separate each path with a semicolon symbol Note that behaves like Windows w 32 to find an executable file The search sequence is e The directory where the calling program is executed The current working directory The Windows or Windows system The directories set in the PATH Directories within the variable set B_LKPATH 3 7 11 B_REOPENS Tells the OPEN statement the number of retries to access an indexed file By default only try it once 3 7 12 Variables affecting the use and control of printing 3 7 13 B_FFPTR If set to one it shall salo page when you close the printer The default is not to do the page break 3 7 14 B_MAPPRTn Select the name of the file containing the control sequences for a specific printer n where n is the number of printer The following example shows that the escape sequences that functions with PRINTER1 CRT is used in the file hplaser Ipr B_MAPPRT1 HPLASER LPR Note Printing under Windows it is in implementation notes in the appendices of this manual For more information on using B_MAPPRTn see chapter formatted output in the Language Reference Manual CET BASIC 3 7 15 B_PRINTERn Check this variable wit
297. menus with a maximum of 50 250 menus and menu commands For example suppose you want to run Windows NotePad from the application menu First create a copy of cetwin by cetuser b using the procedure described in the previous section for selecting a font Then edit the file copy cetuser rc adding a new menu command to be called Notepad menu in the code Selecting the menu command Notepad a submenu with the element Run A adiendo amspersand symbol amp in front of the letters N and R Run Notepad you create shortcut keys that are listed in the menu that appears underlined POPUP amp Notepad BEGIN MENUITEM amp Run ID_WINSUB1 END Whenever you want to add a menu item to the end you must assign a unique identifier as in the example ID_WINSUB1 Since it can take up to 250 menu commands identifiers to be appointed from ID_WINSUB1 ID_WINSUB250 To process a new menu command modify the SELECT statement in the subroutine CASE CETWINSUB in BASIC cetwin b end of file By default the CASE statement is not commented out For example to add an element called Notepad to launch for the name notepad exe enter CASE 1 48 Chapter 4 The framework CALL cWinExec notepad exe 3 The routine cWinExec is specially designed to run MS Windows programs being explained in the chapter on Windows w 32 Functions When the user selects the menu command Run then the Framework will call the subroutine to process cetWINSUB selectio
298. meters indicate the names of the variables that will hold at each instant information on the type of event occurred and its properties This instruction implements the same functionality as w32TreeGetEventsn except that the event notification is done differently to prevent some unwanted effects of change in focus that occurred sometimes when you used the previous version Requires 9 32ma version from which the runtime system to process the event CETW32 special number 15 by which it can detect additional notifications The value of the variable reserved CMDID contain the ID of the control that generated the event The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father referring to the dialog box The value returned by the call to w32GetParent tree control identifier tree The value returned by the call to w32CreateTreeH ID which means the tree ID etree variable name that will contain the value of the number of events produced at each instant ptree ownership of the event The information available for each type of event is as follows Evento Descripci n Propiedad Click con el bot n izq del rat n Referencia al elemento Cambio de estado Selecci n Referencia al elemento Doble click con el bot n izq del rat n Referencia al elemento Click con el bot n derecho del rat n Referencia al elemento 179 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Pulsaci n de una tecla Valor ver w32Skeybd_event_down Expansi
299. mpra 0 00 P 0 00 E Tarifa 3 0 00 3 00 Proveedor 21 a C digo de familia al que pertenece el art culo debe Fe existir 7 y gt E Guardar Re Salir Both the display format as the dialog box consists of a group of controls to draw on screen or text or enter information from the user Each type of control has a set of properties defined behavior A display format is a GUI input that is used to replace the text based screen of the application Although the window may be full screen or any size that is defined with the dialog editor can be moved or resized by the user While the display format is active you have full access to the menu bar and or toolbar buttons A format can be minimized or maximized A dialog box is similar to a display format except that the dialog should be closed eg clicking OK or Cancel before they can work with the rest of the application You can create a variety of dialogues A dialog box is a simple message box that pops up a text and waits for the operator to select a button A complex dialog box will release a large number of fields per screen waiting for the operator to enter via the mouse or keyboard Basically the dialog boxes may be used anytime you want to get information to or from the operator without affecting what is currently on screen or other active dialog boxes On other operating systems may have 18 Chapter 2 Overview opened a window such as Ph
300. n 2 not yet know the index of the last record The total number of records can not be determined by more than one pass counter through all of them or moving to the last record and using STATUS If you have developed READNEXT operations from the beginning then STATUS can determine the number of the current record For example READ 1 any SELECT statement NumCols IF EOF 1 THEN REM Always check for EOF on a SELECT WHILE NOT EOF 1 READ 1 MOVE 1 dummy WEND READ 1 STATUS LASTREC For example the SELECT statement that follows as a key field for READ can be used to find the two columns Name and Comments in a table called Authors 10 4Updating a file The WRITE statement is used to add update or delete records If the WRITE operation fails then an EOF condition To delete or update a record first used READNEXT READPREV to position the pointer on the appropriate record The value of the key field for the WRITE statement can have three values UPDATE DELETE or ADDNEW 10 4 1 Updating a column To update the Comment column of the Author Joe Smith with new comment run what comes next dim result 2 while 1 mat readnext 5 result if eof 5 then goto notfound if result 1 Joe Smith result 2 a new comment mat write 5 update result goto done ifend wend notfound print Couldn t find Joe Smith done 10 4 2 Deleting a record To delete the whole record
301. n The menu identifier 1 in ID_ WINSUB1 cause the CASE statement runs one of this subroutine Note that the file contains a sentence cetwin b GLOBAL which passes the handle 1 to 250 within the variable CmdID to your program If your program needs to use that information please refer to the chapter of BASIC subroutines for instructions on how to use GLOBAL After making the changes you will need to recompile files OBW32 For example OBW32 c cetwin b OBW32 r miusua Notepad will now appear in the menu of any program linke with these resource files Using the following keys can be set up to 50 different menu bars END POPUP MENU BEGIN MENUITEM The MENU keyword is used to identify a unique menu The syntax is MENU PRELOAD identifier DISCARDABLE The identifier is a unique value that refers to a specific menu For example the default identifier for the menu is IDR_MAINFRAME Although you can change the default menu each application must have one If you want to add other menus use IDR_MENU2 A IDR_MENUSO identifiers BEGIN and END keys are used to specify the start and end of a group In the case of the MENU key all content elements are associated with that particular menu The POPUP keyword identifies a menu item and the words BEGIN and END contain definitions of each item of property that popup submenu The key identifies a specific group POPUP menu A maximum level POPUP is a single menu blinds as default File menu A maximum level menu it
302. n de una rama Referencia al elemento The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init In all dialogues that make up an executable should not be called more than once to the same function in this group Thus to define the event processing tree controls three functions to be used Call w32TreeGetEventsEx1 Call w32TreeGetEventsEx2 Call w32TreeGetEventsEx3 This function group function group replaces w32TreeGetEventsn although its use is not inconsistent set w32TreeSetImage call tree ref indice_ima addrof ret Sets the image tree item referenced by ref with the image of the tree list on index having ndice_ima starting from 0 w32ShellExecute call father operation file arg dir mode addrof return Performs an operation on the specified file The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father parent window handle to receive any message box regarding implementation If used must be the value returned by the function w32GetParent otherwise specify 0 Operation one of the following values edit open a document for editing explore Explore the specified folder open Opens the specified document print Print the document specified file file on which the operation is performed arg if the specified file is the name of an executable this parameter indicates the parameters that are passed to the application Otherwi
303. n3 Note Depending on the direction in which finally define the rectangle may return values for the coordinates of the left and right corners are exchanged each other w32ListSetFocusItem call lis item addrof ret Sets the focus element of the list item lis so that the user can operate the keys that produce a shift in the displayed items and the list selected When an element has focus is surrounded by a dotted rectangle standard Focus As shown in the figure the focus is set to a list item unselected oessvscecevevecssseuscuses sunsevauevecsesseussvesueessurveccseseusuescussusceseuccesceuseessessuseussussusseuususeuseusauee susueesesseeseveuuseussessuseseseueeey Rest Don Quijote call w32ListSetHotItem lis item addrof ret Enhances one element of the list Each list can have only one element highlighted This property holds even if all elements are deleted from the list and loaded again To disable this property from the list must be set as the second parameter of the function the value 1 158 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 oO c Rest Don Quijote 6 OY Rest Don Quijote 7 call w32CreateProgressH padre x y ancho alto continua vertical addrof hand This function is identical to w32CreateProgress except that you add the initial parameter to specify the window or dialog on which to create the progress bar This procedure avoids the need to put the focus on a control
304. nce is The directory where the calling program is executed The current working directory The Windows or Windows system The directories set in the PATH The directories set within the variable B_LKPATH B_REOPENS Tells the OPEN statement the number of retries to access an indexed file By default only try it once Variables affecting the use and control of printing B_FFPTR If set to one it shall salo page when you close the printer provided the printer channel is not open to the LOCK option from version 9 32 b The default is not to do the page break B_MAPPRTn Select the name of the file containing the control sequences for a specific printer n where n is the number of printer The following example shows that the escape sequences that functions with PRINTER1 CRT is used in the file hplaser Ipr B_MAPPRT1 HPLASER LPR Note Printing under Windows it is in implementation notes in the appendices of this manual For more information on using B_MAPPRTn see chapter formatted output in the Language Reference Manual CET BASIC B_PRINTERn Check this variable with a specific printer as the Windows printing system in use B_WINPRINT 1 You specify a particular printer by B_PRINTERn printer name Under Windows NT and 95 this name should be assigned to the printer s Print Manager Under Windows you have no option to give a name to a printer so use the name of the driver installed on the port for example HP LaserJet III
305. ncho alto addrof retorno Allocate an image bmp whose full path is specified in the parameter file to a command button that currently has focus The image is set to the specified width and height Example lbrc prj w32BFLoadImage file width height addrof return Has the same behavior as the previous function but also causes the particular button is flat thus illustrative images that can be placed in the dialogues 135 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Ejemplo lbrc prj w32ClipCopyData text addrof retcode This function places the string text to the clipboard If executed successfully retcode will have a nonzero value w32ClipIsA vailable addrof result This function determines whether the clipboard contains data in text format Result A nonzero value indicates that data is available w32ClipPasteData addrof text addrof retcode This function retrieves data from the clipboard and assigned to text If executed successfully retcode will have a nonzero value w32CopyFile source target addrof error addrof retcode This function copies an existing file to one destination If the target file already exists the function overwrites it and returns a successful return value this is a non zero value If the function returns with an error condition the description thereof will be returned in the variable Error w32CopyFile call c windows w32ap
306. nd again calls the dialog The following main program code is stored in valmain b MAIN GLOBAL ValENDBTN GLOBAL ValEDIT100 GLOBAL ValEDIT101 GLOBAL ValEDIT102 again call Val if ValENDBTN 201 rem the Cancel button call cForceExit Ga GE ngs poems YS YS WH quit else print ValEDIT100 print ValEDIT101 print ValEDIT102 ifend goto again The VALIDATE program can be run from command line or from W32APBLD after loading the project file validate prj The program will display the dialog box shown here The source code is stored in the dialogue file val b Subroutines have been modified and Vallnit ValEvent We have included the code of attachments and comments in the manual 96 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 Note that the data type defined in the first user defined property of the controls Also use two user roles fn Parse determines the index in the array CMDID ValPROP fn Findx and function to read the data type of ValPROP These functions are defined in the last area of security in the subroutine Valinit Edit Validate X This control accepts any valid integer This control accepts an integer between 5 and 10 This control accepts an string with max length 5 SUB ValEvent SELECT CET_EVTYPE REM evtstart case 7 REM If it s the Cancel button or NOT an Edit control or the next REM control to receive the focus is 0 then ignore the Lost Focus REM event otherwise validate the
307. nes This feature allows you to integrate a set of BASIC programs into a single executable The advantages of this system are e The execution is much faster so all operations are eliminated and LINK CHAIN e The size of the resulting executable although large is much smaller than that of the individual BASIC programs it replaces e Some developers have found that calls to external subroutines compiled is the most natural way to program Using routines instead of chains and links is similar to the method that follows C Pascal COBOL and other languages to write their applications e It is much easier to encode structured programs e Normally used routines can be stored in external files then called as needed by typing the name of the subroutine in the main program This feature saves considerable time in development time since the code does not have to be constantly rewritten e It is much easier to maintain A BASIC subroutine can be modified to accommodate some new requirements Simply recompile programs using the subroutine BASIC subroutines use a series of new sentences This chapter will try to document these statements and note how they affect the operation of a few sentences CET BASIC conventional 9 2 Compiling programs that call BASIC Subroutines Programs that call subroutines are compiled BASIC OBW32 options and syntax using normal The only difference is that each module can compile simultaneously with a single command For
308. ng addrof ret Returns the current order of the columns in the list lis according to the drag and drop operations that the user may have done Cols parameter should be the number of columns in the list and the return value string contain comma separated list of number of columns in the order specified by the user Requires CETutils dll file dated 25 03 2002 or later w32CreateGrid call father title ID x y width height addrof grid Create a Grid The meaning of the parameters is as follows Father referring to the dialog must be the value returned by w32GetParent Title Text to appear in the title row of the control ID number to be used to identify the control and capture events It must be different for each of the grids that are included in the same executable Grid reference to the control grid created Limitations Can be created simultaneously to a maximum of 20 control grid in the same executable The maximum number of rows that can have a grid is 32000 The maximum number of columns that can have a grid is 256 168 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 The maximum number of characters that can be entered in a cell is 150 Requires CET grid dll file or later date 23 04 2003 L neas de la Factura 08541 rsi n Beta 1 Descripci n C digo Revisad Referencia E Precio Total 9687250 VARIO CASE P SISTEMA VAS C TAP 9314132 DESTORN
309. ng remove any button that was previously checked 7 10 7 Scrollbars controls cGetScrollPos hDlg ID ADDROF POS Returns the current position of the scroll bar within the variable POS cSetScrollPos hDlg ID POS Sets the scroll bar at position POS cSetScrollPage hDlg ID PAGE Sets the value of the page to the scroll bar control to PAGE The default value is 1 10 of the range Assuming that the range was 100 each rectangle movement equivalent to 10 and seem to move in 1 10 of the length of the scroll bar To set a page value 1 20 set the value equal to the rank PAGE divided by 20 cSetScrollRange hDlg ID MIN MAX Sets the maximum and minimum values of MIN and MAX 7 10 8 General routines cAppTitle hDlg TITLE Sets the title of a display format to the value of TITLE cDIgTitle hDlg TITLE Sets the dialog title to the value of TITLE cEnableCtrl hDlg ID STATE Active STATE 1 or off STATE 0 control A control when offline is grayed out and can not get the input focus cEndDlg hDlg CMDID Calls the routine file HDI ending dialogue with the identifier of the control that generated this event end of the dialogue This operation is usually done when you press a button that has enabled the property to dialogue PROGRESS In the sample program at the end of chapter use this feature 78 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 cEndForm hDlg Ends the specified display
310. not need any modifications source programs 2 10 CET W 32 Library The power and flexibility of the CET BASIC can be increased by using the library functions Management Development within its own app These libraries contain a wide variety of functions that can be linked into your program to execute operations that would be difficult or impossible to program using BASIC only 2 10 1 The POS windows library The software has been implemented CET Window System Phase One as a library that can be called from programs w 32 This program is offered for compatibility with DOS and UNIX product If you are going through windows programs with existing POS we suggest you replace your windows for text based dialog boxes designed with the dialog editor as a first step to creating Windows applications You can also use the cChoiceList and Case w 32 MSGBOX to give your application a quick look windows 33 Chapter 2 Overview 2 10 2 The bar code CET library The Library Bar Code CET provides the functions required to generate and print barcode from CET BASIC program This is done by using a simple CALL statement to Bbarcode function With Barcode Library CET can generate any of the following barcode types e UPC A and E e EAN JAN 8 and 13 e 2 and 5 digit supplemental e Interleaved 2 of 5 e Extended Code 39 and 39 e Codabar e Code 128 and UCC 128 e MSI Plessey Standard e Extended Code 93 and 93 e Zip 4 e Postnet The function retu
311. nstall anything in the WINDOWS directory However you must install a copy of the file there or lt Application gt W32APBLD w32 W32 since the application will need this file to operate properly CET not installed with the runtime since the contents of the file will depend on the developer s application Perhaps you want the copy the installation software does not exist or overwrite it under certain conditions Or maybe you just want to install it in new installations and ignonarlo on upgrades W32APBLD w32 0 lt aplicacion gt w32 Hl WINDOWS SYSTEM The CET runtime installer copies the following files to the C WINDOWS SYSTEM imagehlp dll mfc42 dll msvecirt dll msvert dll msvert40 dll netbios dll odbc32 dll odbcint dll When the compiler is installed in a directory other than CETBIN if using a shortcut to the main application program without preceding it with drive lt directory gt runw32 exe be sure to set the value of the variable environment B_CETBIN in the w32 appropriate either lt Application gt w32 or W32APBLD w32 with the directory where you saved the runtime Otherwise can not locate the runtime files which may result in an error or incorrect operation WINDOWS directory may have other names eg WIN95 WINNT or other user defined You will need to obtain the name of the directory the installation process 10 Chapter 1 Installation guide 1 5 Windows Environment variables At the end of
312. nt DII is required cetftp dated 15 06 2008 or later The return value can be 1 Operation completed successfully 1 Error in the connection to the ftp site 2 Error in locating the route 3 Error creating directory May already exist Example call w32FtpCreateDirectory ftp ya com jobrodriguez ya com clave omega addrof retorno call w32FtpCreateDirectory ftp ya com jobrodriguez ya com clave omega uploads addrof retorno call w32ListGetEventsExn padre lis ID addrof evento addrof param1 addrof param2 Where n is a value from 1 to 9 Calling this function group can point to the system controls whose list of events generated by the user want to be notified The function allows you to associate an ID to list events to distinguish this control has occurred The last three parameters indicate the names of the variables that will hold at each instant information on the type of event occurred and its properties This instruction implements the same functionality as w32ListGetEventsn except that the event notification is done differently to prevent some unwanted effects of change in focus that occurred sometimes when you used the previous version Requires 9 32ma version from which the runtime system to process the event CETW32 188 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 special number 15 by which it can detect additional notifications The value of the variable reserve
313. nt row or coordinate column returns the current column or coordinate x 108 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions cInputQ This function is used to enter a key code into the input queue or buffer exactly as if the key had been entered by the operator The statement syntax is cInputQ call key Where key is the ASCII value of the key to be inserted in the input buffer For example REM introduces an ESC within the input queue CALL cInputQ 27 REM introduces the F1 key in the input queue CInputQ CALL 0 CALL cInputQ 59 To add a special key such as F1 must enter two key codes within the buffer Eg a zero and extended ASCII code for the F1 key A key that does not correspond to a printable character eg function keys cursor keys insert home etc is considered as special key Extended ASCII values are the same as the sentence BASIC GET returns See Appendix Manual CET BASIC Language Reference for using the values of the character table cLogin This routine is used to display a login dialog box the operator to enter a user name and a password The return values that can be used within your application The CALL statement syntax is cLogin call ADDROF user ADDROF key Where user is a specific user name entered by the user key is the password of the user For safety purposes the asterisks show cLogin key field even when entering characters This feature is especially relevant when the program s
314. nt to a change the default form of work removing the toolbar and status b selecting a specific source and or add other menu commands within their programs If cetwin b list you will see that all operations are conducted through BASIC subroutines Each subroutine begins with a sentence SUB defining the name of the subroutine The first of these is called cetPreInit since before the first line w 32 program is executed EXIT defines the end of the subroutine and acts as a RETURN statement GLOBAL is used to specify the variables that will be shared with other program modules In cetwin b CmdID is passed as a global variable After compiling a BASIC subroutine can bind linkarla under its program main to produce an executable The ability to call subroutines BASIC is a feature that will be worn out later in this manual 4 4 Changing the default framework The framework is designed to quickly deploy Windows features you want to use within your application To alter the default way of working first copy the files you want to change within a separate directory with different name For example if your files are in w 32 1 cetlib and is 1 tst copy cetlib cetwin b 1 tst miven b copy cetlib cetuser rc tst miusua rc Note that the names of the files in the local directory must be different from cetlib Later probably decide to have multiple copies of these files for each configuration you want For example different menus
315. o feature for desktop connectivity Administrador de or genes de datos ODBC 2 x DSN de usuario DSN de sistema DSN de archivo Controladores Trazas Agrupaci n de conexiones Acerca de Los controladores ODBC instalados en su sistema son Versi n Organizac a NE EA 4 00 6019 00 Microsoft Driver do Microsoft Access mdb 4 00 6019 00 Microsoft Driver do Microsoft dBase dbf 4 00 6019 00 Microsoft 1 Driver do Microsoft Excel xls 4 00 6019 00 Microsoft Driver do Microsoft Paradox db 4 00 6019 00 Microsoft Driver para o Microsoft Visual FoxPro 6 01 8629 01 Microsoft 1 Microsoft Access Driver mdb 4 00 6019 00 Microsoft 1 Microsoft Access Treiber mdb 4 00 6019 00 Microsoft 1 4 00 6019 00 Microsoft 6 01 8629 01 ae Un controlador ODBC permite a los programas habilitados para ello obtener informaci n de los or genes de datos ODBC Para instalar controladores nuevos utilice el programa de instalaci n del controlador Microsoft dB ase Driver dbf Microsoft dBase VFP Driver dbf Cancelar Aplicar Ayuda To use ODBC w 32 within a program must have correct ODBC drivers installed on your system You can get these ODBC drivers in various ways from different sources Often included with the product for example the ODBC driver for Microsoft Access is within the Access albums Once you have the correct ODBC drivers installed and the type of sourc
316. o illustrate exactly how to read and write a file for which you have the ODBC drivers All examples were updated programs in library WIN 1 as demoprj zip 131 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Chapter 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 API is one of those acronyms that are used mainly to intimidate people But API is simply a set of functions available for use by an application programmer Therefore the Windows APT is a set of functions that are part of Windows and are available for any Windows application When you consider that Windows APIs have thousands of functions becomes aware of the large capacity It was mainly between 1991 and 1995 when the number of these functions increased since Microsoft added new dynamic link library DLL that extended the capacity WINDOWS operating system From version w 32 9 311 of CET BASIC can be called by CALL statements used within the BASIC sources new functions that make use of the full power of the Windows API These new features are developed by OMEGA SYSTEMS SA and provides developers through files obj or through a library file w32funcs lib How to compile programs that use CET calls to these functions is 1 If you compile from the command line lt programa_basic b gt lt programa_basic gt Obw32 or lt funcion1 obj gt lt funcionn obj gt 2 If the application is developed using W32 CET Application Builder the files must be added Obj Object Files within the group
317. o make an entry using mouse or keyboard Basically dialog boxes can be used at any time when you want information to or from the operator without this affecting what is currently appearing on screen In other operating system environments could have opened a window based on text using the windows of Phase One taking some texts performing an operation like LINPUT and then closing the window when you are ready to continue Under Windows this will be done with a dialogue box Both dialog boxes as display boxes consist of a group of controls Each type of control has a set of properties that define its behavior Some controls will draw on screen simply texts serving as a label to identify other control Other controls are designed for operator information Checking controls Combo Boxes Listed are some of the special types of control that can be used to simplify the data entry process For each dialog box or display format that you believe the dialog editor w 32 generate a BASIC subroutine that will handle the display and operation of dialogue When necessary this BASIC code may be modified to suit your special needs Examples have been added to illustrate how programs can be performed The information in this chapter is organized into the following sections to help you learn how to use the editor and to develop their applications as quickly as possible e Use of general editing features and menu commands Creating a dialogue or a display format Defin
318. o the file name if the user does not select another extension cSelectFont This function can be called to change the default font used to display text The CALL statement syntax is cSelectFont call name height width italic charset family Where name is the name of the font to use height indicates the height or size of the source width indicates the width of the font or style italic option specifies the italic charset specifies the characteristics of the source family specifies the font family To find out which parameters are used with a particular source see the description of cFontValues For example Select the source REM Terminal 9 points in the regular style CALL cSelectFont Terminal 12 400 0 255 49 cSetCursor This function can be used to select the position of the cursor where you want to display the next screen output The CALL statement syntax is cSetCursor call row column Where row specifying the new location of the cursor line column specifies the new column position of the cursor cShowMainWin CShowMainWin routine can be used to control the visibility of the main application window This feature is useful when you plan to move da window and wants it to remain invisible until it is placed in the new 113 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions position With another call to cShowMainWin During this process you would need to disable any mouse or keyboard input by c
319. odificado y obtiene el numero de factura del control combo REM El numero de factura es la clave docModified 0 CALL cGetCombo inviHDLG 701 ADDROF key mat read 1 key rec if eof 1 msgbox can t find record call cSetFocus inviHDLG 701 exit ifend REM Copia los campos del registro a los controles de edici n y llama a REM una rutina para introducir la factura Despu s de volver establece REM el focus al primer control de edici n gosub display ctrls gosub Enterlnvoice call cSetFocus inviHDLG 101 exit 89 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 SUB inv1Event This subroutine is called when a special event INVOICE illustrates how code can be added to calculate and validate the input format of a user When a change in the edit control CASE 1 activates the flag amendment of Edition The current process is done when the control has lost its focus CASE 7 The sample program VALIDATE explained at the end of the chapter illustrates another method of data validation and formatting If you have validation and formatting routines that are common to all programs In this case these routines can be stored in a single file and use include to enter the code during compilation case 1 REM Un control de edici n a cambiado de tal forma que activa el flag REM utilizado para detectar que la factura ha sido modificada docModified 1 REM Establece el flag para comprobar el formateo de campo y calcular REM el total de fac
320. of retorno Can be used to play any audio file File is the audio file name with full path Return equal to 0 if executed properly Ejemplo ps b w32MessageBox texto titulo estilo addrof retorno Displays a message in a dialog box waits for the user to click a button and returns an Integer corresponding to the button chosen by the user The parameter text is the content of the dialog box If consists of more than one line you can separate them using a carriage return character Chr 13 or a line feed character Chr 10 Title is a string expression displayed in the title bar of the dialog box if assigned to the title is Failed Style Numeric expression that is the sum of values specifying the number and type of buttons that are intended to display the icon style to use and the identity of the default button The possible values are 0 Display OK button only 1 Display OK and Cancel buttons 2 Displays the Abort Retry and Ignore 3 shows the buttons Yes No and Cancel 4 Display Yes and No buttons 5 Display Retry and Cancel buttons 16 shows the critical message icon 32 shows the warning icon question 48 shows the warning icon 64 shows the information message icon 0 First button is default 256 Second button is default 512 Third button is default O Application modal the user must respond to the message box before continuing work in the current application 4096 modal
321. of the system w 32 execution These variables should be included in the autoexec bat file along with the variable LIB and INCLUDE to be recognized during the compilation process Use the following syntax to load an environment variable set variable value 3 6 1 B_CMDFLAGS Fixed compiler options making them available for each build For example if you use the library optional Phase One Toolkit you should enter the library option to tell the compiler where to find these routines B_CMDFLAGS SET IPostk The following example illustrates how you can select B_CMDFLAGS OBW32 so that files always use the Framework shortlisted located in the current directory Separate multiple options with a space like this B_CMDFLAGS SET r look wo miobj This variable will tell the compiler to enable the defaults and display their values Selecting this variable is no longer needed in the command line options present in the variable 3 6 2 B_THCONV Loads 1 to convert string literals to values THEOS This will ensure that the codes can be converted to international characters with ASCII values greater than 128 to your assembly output SET B_THCONV 1 Note that the values containing the environment variables are not lost after running the build process if you want to clear an environment variable run SET VARIABLE 40 Chapter 3 The W 32 compiler 3 7 Environment variables used by the runtime system A lot of variables can be used to
322. olbar and the status bar Status Bar are enabled disable commands Selecting once the bar is activated deactivated and if selected again deactivates activates Note that the toolbar and the status bar is not normally shown Later in this chapter we will show how to modify the Framework to use special features you want to enter linkandolas within your applications The functions that can be called within a BASIC program will be explained in the next chapter There are also Windows w 32 functions used to enable or disable these features within a BASIC program 4 2 3 The Font menu The Source Select menu allows you to change the specifications of the type style and size of characters displayed on a Windows box The default font is a 9 point Courier Point size refers to the size of individual characters 45 Chapter 4 The framework The size of the font that you can use depend on the resolution of your monitor If you are working in high resolution eg 1024x768 can use a power greater than 9 points If you are working with a standard VGA 640x480 resolution then the largest font that can display is 9 points With the function cDisplayInfo may know the resolution of your monitor from within your program Note that you can resize the window but the maximum area that can be displayed will never be higher than necessary to display 80x25 characters to font size current If you make the window smaller will scroll bar so you can access
323. olute paths the paths can be relative to the working directory from the root or relative to the project directory Multiple directories are seperated VENTANAS omes Properties files of the project are obtained by pressing the right mouse button and then File Location clicking Properties CAEJEMPLOSWEN_S0U1 b m Compilable File Properties Global Properties 1 File Location monbre and file path c 2 Compilation Flags 5 6 Building and maintaining a project Curent Properties 32 2 After a project is created the menu Build can be used to Cancel perform a set of operations related to projects These are 57 Chapter 5 The W 32 integrated develop environment Compile to File compile a file Compile the file using the default flags specified in the properties file Note that to compile a dialog to select the file B not the file HDI The c flag is used by default Remember there are two levels of properties global and individual properties file In fact there are three levels considering the Global Directory Project Include the way of a global include directory for all projects Global properties affect all project files During compilation the compilation flags for individual properties files are concatenated to the specified global properties For example suppose you want to use the debugger in a file To enable the debugger add the flag Zd the properties of an individual file If
324. ompile time with the 32 bit flag 32 Zi Example OBW32 32 Zi o miprg miprg b When you run the program you will see a white box with a black edge every time you reach a judgment LINPUT LINPUT USING OR GET The box disappears leaving the data on the screen when the operator presses the ENTER key This box is a Windows control type therefore you can use the mouse to position the cursor within it and to select characters that fence to clear Pressing TAB will automatically select all the characters In fact the edit control will operate as a kind application windows except the Home and End keys not reposition the cursor But if INP values recognize these keys The width of the edit box is determined using the mask USING If your program uses LINPUT sentences without USING then you will see a box of 16 characters by default And if the data is greater than the editor appear a horizontal scroll bar This bar does not appear in a sentence LINPUT USING There is a function to set the default editing controls cLinputOpts call This function has no effect on programs or LINK CHAIN chained The syntax of the function is CALL cLinputOpts long use3D todos Where e long is the default length of the edit controls for sentences than LINPUT USING e Use3D Set to 1 the controls are three dimensional Note that these controls have a height greater than one line and thus overlap the text which is next e All Set to 1 selects the entir
325. on A scroll bar can be moved by clicking on any of the arrows This changes the value 1 or 1 depending on which arrow is clicked If the scroll bar is very small only arrows appear If control of the scroll bar is large enough can also be moved using the thumb or the rectangle between the arrows When you move this rectangle the new value of the scroll bar is on the position of the rectangle For example if the box is in the middle of the scroll bar the new value will be half the minimum range calculated by subtracting the maximum value If the user clicks between rectangle and arrow referred to as a page then one tenth of the range will be added or subtracted by default You can change the default page using cSetScrollPage function The following dialogue illustrates a use of the scroll bar x Mueva la barra de desplazamiento para seleccionar un valor del rango 100 E Usted ha seleccionado 10 The properties of a scroll bar can be 73 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 Property Value Effect BASIC SCRL400 Value The value that can be used in a BASIC program to reference the data after the variable has been defined with GLOBAL Minimum Value 0 is introduced minimum value is 0 100 Maximum Value The maximum value entered will be 100 Initial value 50 The rectangle shown in the middle of the bar Control ID ID 400 The value associated with the control Horizontal bar appears on the screen horizontally by
326. on about the files indexed BASIC converted to MySQL tables This information includes the name of the original file the MySQL table name key lengths and registration etc The table format is described below under the heading Installing and configuring the MySQL Server 2 9 8 File access methods and formats The module supports only binary indexed files Valid options for the OPEN statement are INPUT INDEXED OUTPUT INDEXED UPDATE INDEXED INPUT INDEXED LOCK OUTPUT INDEXED LOCK UPDATE INDEXED LOCK 21 Chapter 2 Overview 2 9 9 File names The configuration table contains information _cet_files_ mapping file names indexed table names The emulator uses the alphanumeric file name is used in the sentence OPENcomo a search key for the table _cet_files_ and can locate the table name and other information required for emulation out The emulator does not support the location of files in different directories in fact uses the filename literally This means that if you have two or more files of the same name indexed located in different directories when transferring these files to the MySQL database you must choose different names for tables representing these files The mapping will look like this Directory1 Data gt Datal Directory2 Data gt Data2 That is the OPEN 1 Directory Data table opens Datal and the OPEN 1 Directory2 Data Data2 table opens The emulator also use the configuration tabl
327. on of the dialog window The arrow is used to indicate the top left position of the new control Click the left mouse button to leave the control positioning The word New New with a small box will appear centered on the left edge of the control Perform a double click with the left mouse button on the selected item to draw on screen and or modify control properties check box 68 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 The following information has been introduced to check the box Disable in the dialogue dlgCET b Property Value Effect Label Disable offline The text appears beside the check box to identify its content or use BASIC Variable DISABLE The variable used in a BASIC program to reference the data after the variable has been defined with GLOBAL ID Control ID 800 The value associated with the control Initial State control is initially off without checking which is the default A check box control is an interactive control Because the information obtained operator has associated properties such as BASIC and variable control number ID that can be used later to obtain the data BASIC variable to Disable offline check box has been changed to DISABLE CKBX100 so that is more descriptive and easier to remember DISABLE means dlgCETDISABLE in the BASIC source code as the prefix of the dialogue is added to the name to make it unique for that specific dialogue The initial state can be set to control properties in
328. on process There are three main stages in the management process The first phase is the specification phase in which Bsort get the information needed to carry out the task In the second phase Bsort reads the input file loaded into memory selected records and sorts If the total size of records is greater than the available memory is created and used disk work files In the third phase or phase out records classified and or sub fields specified are written to the output file indicated in the instructions for ordering The specification phase During the specification phase Bsort collects operation parameters needed to perform the classification task These parameters can be obtained from the command line from a judgment CSI CSH in BASIC or a sequential ASCII file When ordering parameters occupy more than one line of the console use the following option C to inform Bsort that will introduce more input The classification parameters include an input file an output file optional key specifications or any selection or output options discussed in the previous section The specification and using the classification parameters are described in detail below Bsort then analyze the command line to determine if you have entered all the required parameters and the syntax is correct It locates the input file and checks whether the correct format Input file You must specify the name of the input file Normally file names must ha
329. ontents of the grid defined by the row and column indicated as second and third parameter The content specified as the last parameter must not be an empty string Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetTitleFont call grid source points position bold italic sub strikeout Set the font and its attributes to the grid title text The orientation parameter designates the degrees of inclination of the text The last 4 parameters take value 1 to enable and 0 to disable attribute Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetTitleHeight call grid height Sets the height in pixels of the row reserved for displaying the title that has been assigned to the grid by w32CreateGrid Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridShowHilight call grid resaltar_fila Sets or not you highlight the entire row when you select a cell belonging to the same depending on the value assigned to the second parameter is or 0 By default NOT highlight the entire row W32GridIsHilighted function to check which mode is currently active Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32EditENTEREXx call index hand ID addrof key The call to this function allows the user to validate the information entered in any edit box a dialogue by pressing the ENTER key so that the focus goes to next control This special behavior only affects the editing controls to
330. or file eg c manual html The return value is the control ID or 1 if an error occurred Requires CetWeb dll DLL dated 16 12 2009 or later w32SetScreenResolution call width height color addrof return This feature allows you to automatically change the screen resolution at runtime The first and second argument must specify the horizontal and vertical resolution respectively The third argument is the number of available colors measured in bits per pixel This value depends on the model of computer video adapter and is recommended to use the value returned by the native function call cDisplayInfo CET See example ssr b The return value is if the operation was successful 1 if reboot is required for the changes to take effect or 2 if the set of arguments indicated is incorrect This feature requires Seller CETExt dll dated 09 12 2007 or later w32FtpDir call FTPSite user password directory MATADDROF listaarchivos addrof return 190 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Gets an array with the list of files and subdirectories of a given directory belonging to an FTP site DII is required cetftp dated 12 11 2007 or later The site s root directory must be specified with the string The array that is passed as an argument must be dimensioned previously If the operation completes successfully the array will contain a list of files and subdirectories the latter preceded by the string D
331. or returns the value 1 cEnableDocking You can use this routine to enable a movable toolbar When a toolbar is movable the operator can drag it out of the application window so that it is displayed in its own window The statement syntax is call cEnableDocking When the coupling is enabled there will be a black vertical line to the right of the last button To hide the toolbar to move the mouse in the background area that is next to the buttons and the black line To reconnect the toolbar to return to the beginning or end drag and drop The cutting line display will change to a solid line when above a cleavage site cEnableltem CEnableltem routine can be used to enable or disable a menu item ID_WINSUB This feature is used especially when you want to ensure that the operator can not select an item that could disrupt a particular operation and cause problems The statement syntax is cEnableltem call element status Where element ID is the value an integer between 1 and 99 associated with the menu item For example the ID value should be 1 to 99 for ID_WINSUB99 ID_WINSUB1 state is an integer value or 1 to enable or 0 to disable For example REM Disables the menu item associated ID_WINSUB4 won CALL cEnablelterm 4 0 By default all menu items are enabled so that they can be selected Disabling a menu item text changes to gray and can not be selected See chapter The Windows Framework for information on how to modi
332. orking directory If you use a different directory change the directory with a call to the function before calling Bchdir cOpenBrowser To search the current working directory to return to it once you ve returned from the browser function makes a call to Bgetcwd For example REM Save the current working directory Bgetcwd call addrof CURDIR REM Change to the directory from which you want to start the browser Bchdir call C A MyApp subdir REM Set the default file name name default txt cOpenBrowser call addrof name REM Return to directory Bchdir call CURDIR cOpenDIBWindow This routine can be used to open a new window that displays a bitmap file Microsoft Windows ie any Dib or Bmp This is a powerful feature because it allows you to read graphics files and display a graph or chart without having to leave your program For example if you have an insurance package may have a button in the toolbar you can choose to display the picture of the insured When a call is made to cCOpenDIBWindow the new window is inactive and the user has to click with the mouse to see it Your program can execute a call to cDIBWindowTop to move the window to the top active without user intervention The bitmap graphics will be resized enlarged or reduced to fit within the window If the width and height arguments are zero it will create a window the same size as the bitmap The CALL statement syntax is cOpenDIB Window
333. ot with a BASIC subroutine should use the GLOBAL statement 9 10A conversion example of an application BASIC CET The following example illustrates what needs to be done to make the main program with LINK C_HAIN and other programs submenu Consider the following programs CET BASIC BASIC Program Developed Program menu b menu b MAIN COMMON CONAME GLOBAL CONAME WHILE 1 PRINT Seleccione Programa PRINT Seleccione Programa PRINT 1 Contabilidades Acreedoras PRINT 1 Contabilidades Acreedoras PRINT 2 Contabilidades Deudoras PRINT 2 Contabilidades Deudoras PRINT 3 Libro Mayor PRINT 3 Libro Mayor PRINT 4 EXIT PRINT 4 EXIT INPUT ANS INPUT ANS SELECT ANS SELECT ANS CASE 1 CASE 1 CHAIN ar CALL ar CASE 2 CASE 2 CHAIN ap CALL ap CASE 3 CASE 3 CHAIN gl CALL gl CASE 4 CASE 4 QUIT QUIT CEND CEND WEND Programa BASIC ar b Programa Convertido ar b SUB ar COMMON CONAME GLOBAL CONAME CLEAR lt Linea Principal de ar gt lt Linea Principal de ar gt CHAIN menu EXIT Programa BASIC ap b Programa Convertido ap b SUB ap COMMON CONAME GLOBAL CONAMES CLEAR lt Linea principal de ap gt lt Linea Principal de ap gt CHAIN menu EXIT Programa BASIC gl b Programa Convertido gl b SUB gl COMMON CONAME GLOBAL CONAMES CLEAR lt L nea Principal de gl gt lt L nea Principal de gl gt CHAIN menu EXIT In these examples very few changes have been made to convert the conventional application CET
334. ou create a project that generates mainprog exe the program 1s considered MAINPROG dependent mainprog b source file if this source contains an fen Piles in project Cabecera Basic Files Cabecera b dlgConalb b dlgConCL b include statement eg include subtot inc then also considered which depends dlaLin lb b MAINPROG subtot inc file Both files are subtot inc mainprog by dependencies If any dlaMenu b of them is changed then then the project will be rebuilt Rebuilt to generate a new digSelalb b executable Main b Dialog Files digconalb idh digconcl idh diglinalb idh dlomenu idh digselalb idh G RC Files Cabecera rc 3 Object Files Library Files Dependencies 3 Sub Projects There is also time relation between the executable and its dependencies W32APBLD is considered to be updated when the date Modified is after all the source files on which it depends W32APBLD uses time and dependency files to determine when a compilation is required This means that once you have created a project and not have to worry about when to modify a project file When you go to run the project W32APBLD detect that there has been a change and will ask you to recompile Rebuild If you make a Rebuild recompile compile only those files that have changed the date after the project 5 3 The program W32APBLD The integrated development environment w 32 program is invoked by calling cetbin W32APBLD exe from
335. ould not require a backslash single quote to delimit a selection specification Binary Sorting Records Example 1 213 Chapter 12 Development Utilities In the first example Testfile is a sequential file created with the WRITE statement Each record contains six fields The first field of the record is of type integer and the rest of the fields contain strings The maximum record length is 80 bytes Bsort Testfile B 80 6 1 1 out 2 11 1 5 This command instructs testfile records and dumps the entire record a new file called out as sequential not used the limited output L option First the records are sorted by the first character in the sixth field in ascending order The records are then sorted by the integer value of field 1 Management is performed using third the first five characters of the string that is stored in the second field Example 2 The following command is similar to the previous one except that the records are sorted by the first five characters of the second field after previously been turned into numbers Bsort Testfile Out B 80 1 1 1 2 5N Example 3 This example selects records Testfile having an A as the first character of the field 4 The selected records are then sorted by the first 40 characters of field 4 Only these characters are written directly to the file named Out Bsort Testfile Out B 80 01 04 40 S 4 1 1 EQ V A L 01 04 40 Note that Bsort not written to a
336. ource destination key addrof ret Decrypt a file source and as a result the target file is generated already decrypted For the algorithm used key passed as a third argument This key must be the same as that employed in the encryption process If ret is 0 is that something went wrong Requires CETCrypt DLL file or later date 21 04 2004 w32GetEnvironmentVariable call variable addrof value addrof return Gets the value of the environment variable specified as facing The return value is the number of characters in the value of the variable w32SetEnvironment Variable call variable value addrof return Sets the value of the environment variable whose name is specified as the first argument w32ZipFile call file addrof return Compress the file and generates the Zip file to the same directory w32ZipFolder call folder ignorarruta addrof return 199 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Compress the folder and all subfolders generating a Zip with the same name Ignorarruta parameter if specified to 1 forces ignoraren relative paths of the files Otherwise specify 0 w32UnZip call ficherozip ignorarruta addrof return It creates a folder with the same file name and location that decompresses the content Ignorarruta parameter if specified to 1 forces ignoraren relative paths of the files Otherwise specify 0 w32CompileProject call ruta_completa_de
337. ourcen where n is the number of new files you have created and not yet saved File Save Save a file If you are saving a new file sourcen then enter the name you want to give the file The extent B always added by default File Print Prints the text file File Find in files Allows you to search for text within a file The Match Case can be used to search note the difference between upper and lower case You can also specify the directory to start the search and check in subdirectories The type of files to search eg extension files B and Inc can be selected from a list of file types yourself or by entering the extension of the files to locate Use a sign semicolon to separate each type For example Foo Bar When the search begins a dialog box appears with the result This window specifies the found files where the search pattern with file name line number and the line of text that matches the pattern shown below At any time pressing up a line will jump to a window with the edited file and above the line you selected c pos source mainprog b 234 This is the text line Dialogue can be minimized if you want to continue working on other tasks while the search is being conducted To cancel the search click the System button close or the cross X in the upper right Clicking on the option will exit the dialog close and delete the search results Menu commands Edit will facilitate changes in their fi
338. out miobj lib dg3btnmsg obj dgerror obj dgkey obj cetlnk32 lib out miobjlib lib obj After creating the library enter in the autoexec bat PATH LIB directory You can then compiling your program linkarlo main library with the flag in this way Mainpgm b mainpgm OBW32 0 Imiobjlib CAUTION Due to the problem of the Microsoft LIB utility you must delete the current library before reinvoke CETLNK32 command to build the library and include a new object 12 8Dcheck command The product uses CET w 32 D ISAM an indexed file manager of Byte Designs D_ISAM format files are compatible with files C ISAM format the file structure that is used in other products CET BASIC Currently there are no available version of Windows Product Informix C ISAM 205 Chapter 12 Development Utilities Dcheck is a D ISAM utility designed to test and adjust inconsistencies of an indexed file Enter the command without arguments to see the usage syntax It is important to note the following e Dcheck only accept filenames DOS e Dcheck can be used to check the structure of files list the contents of the keys and the order of the data file and checking the consistency of the file without modifying it e Dcheck can build an index structure and a data file Delete records that have not been cleared physically within the file and still held within the same site The syntax is Dcheck i 1 n y q b h x o lt fichero_isam gt where I
339. ow in pixles number 0 ie the row that displays column headers Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later call w32GridSetHeaderTextColor grid r v y Sets the text color of the headings or column headings 1 value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are 0 255 Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetHeadingFont call grid source points position bold italic sub strikeout Set the font and its attributes for text in headers or column headers The orientation parameter designates the degrees of inclination of the text The last 4 parameters take value to enable and 0 to disable attribute Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetProtectColor call grid r v y Sets the background color with which to emphasize that a cell is protected r value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are 0 255 Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetRowHeight call grid height Set the height in pixels that will have all rows editable grid Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetRowsNumbered call grid auto_numerar Autoenumera rows or not depending on whether the
340. p is selected any button that was previously selected deseleccionaria Radio buttons are normally referred to as controls option because options are often used as mutually exclusive In the dialog editor for example radio buttons are used to specify the alignment property of a text control because only one of the three options can be set at the same time 72 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 x Cadena Texto Identificador de 501 control Izquierda C Derecha Aceptar C Centrado A dialog can contain any number of groups of radio buttons Each radio button must belong to a group and only one group When many buttons are grouped is assigned a radio group ID Each button in the group will have that number group ID as one of its properties A group with zero value means that the button is not a member of a group The group ID is used to find the ID of the button that is being tested in a group using the cGetRadioGroup The return value will be zero if no button is being tested because they established an initial screen and the user did not select a Note that a radio button must be checked before it can get the focus To create a group of radio first ensure that all the buttons are in consecutive order tab started from the top left button in the group Then simply drag the mouse to select all button controls you want in the group and select the command Make Radio Group Creating a group of radio in the Layout menu PICTURE menu
341. p w32 omega public 1 w32app w32 addrof error addrof return w32CreateDirectory dir addrof retcode This function creates a new directory Retcode Zero indicates error w32EditUndo Undoes the last operation of an edit control The focus must be on the edit control Use cSetFocus function for this purpose w32FileSize file addrof size addrof retcode Returns the size in bytes of the file specified Retcode Zero indicates error w32FileTime file addrof year addrof month addrof day addrof time addrof min addrof s addrof retcode Returns the time of last modification of the file Retcode Zero indicates error w32FindFirstFile pattern addrof firstfile addrof handle W32FindFirstFile function opens a search handle and returns the name of the first file whose name matches the specified pattern Once the handle is returned search use the search function to successive w32FindNextFile files matching the pattern w32FindNextFile handle addrof nextfile addrof retcode This function continues the search for files from a previous call to the function w32FindFirstFile Handle search handler returned by a previous call to w32FindFirstFile NextFile name file or directory in sequence found Retcode Zero may indicate that an error has occurred or that there are no more files dim matriz 500 indice 1 call w32FindFi
342. parts of the screen that are not Although from the menu you can choose any available source can prevent the operator do this by selecting the source from within the application This procedure will be covered later in this chapter If you want to prevent the user to change the font of your program you can control it from within your program This feature will be explained later Note that the above information applies only to character based screens created by PRINT statements In fact you can not change the font in a dialog created with the Dialog editor w 32 4 2 4 The Help menu The command Help About default displays a message box with information about the version and Property Rights System w 32 CET Application Development later in this chapter will be an example of how to modify the text to display information about your program 4 3 The framework default windows Each program uses w 32 characteristics and default initial conditions that can bind OBW32 linkar and cetwin res cetwin obj files during the build process These files are stored in the cetlib unless the installation process you specify a different one Cetwin res is the resource file This contains the code for the menus and their items appear in your compiled programs The source code of the resource file can be edited its name is cetuser rc The source code is in cetwin b cetwin obj This file contains a series of comment lines to make it easier to change if you wa
343. pending on the data type Use of this judgment is critical because if we do not use local variables within a subroutine to which no value is assigned by an assignment statement its contents can be unpredictable since the system does not guarantee initializing them upon entering the subroutine unless you use the statement CLEAR 9 8 EXIT sentence EXIT is the only one of the new sentences that is executable When is EXIT during program execution control returns to the module that called it ie the statement following the CALL Internally this works as a RETURN statement A EXIT default be implemented at the end of a module SUB in the case does not exist The statement syntax is EXIT The statements END QUIT and STOP can not be used instead of EXIT If such a statement is encountered during the execution of a program within any module the entire program terminates immediately 9 9 Converting existing applications in BASIC CET BASIC subroutines are often used to convert applications are usually composed of a number of separate programs The steps to do this include 1 Determine the tree implementation that should monitor their implementation For example suppose you have CHAINs main program menu or links to other programs 2 Add MAIN to the first line of your main program menu which use CALL statements to call the next level submenu program BASIC subroutines now which depending on conditions resulting implemen
344. placements The only difference 1s that this routine will not sort the items before they are displayed The CALL statement syntax is For greater flexibility and speed we recommend that you use this routine instead of cChoiceList to display a list of items that has been ordered by the program cChoiceListNS call title mataddrof elements addrof selection Please consult cChoiceList to learn about their use cCloseDIBWindow This routine is used to close a window DIB used to display an image The CALL statement syntax is cCloseDIB Window call handle Where handle is the descriptor of the window open DIB by calling cOpenDIB Window Note that attempting to close a window using a descriptor invalid DIB generate an error message See cOpenDIB Window function for information on using Windows DIB to display graphic files in bitmap format of Microsoft Windows cCreateProcess This function can be used to start a process Under Windows NT and Windows 95 you can begin any type of process eg DOS process a Windows 16 bit or 32 bit Windows application Under Windows you can only 105 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions use cCreateProcess starting a 32 bit Windows application otherwise the return value indicates that the process did not start when I really did The statement syntax is CALL cCreateProcess ADDROF handle cmd show where handle Control is the number returned by the process A value of zero means t
345. play format is a graphical input based in pixels that the program will use to replace the text based screen of the application Taking a graphical interface allows you to copy data from a Windows application like Microsoft Excel and paste it into one of their formats through the Clipboard Because a display format replaces the home screen of the Windows application only one can be active simultaneously Depending on whether the property has been opposed maximization the format may either be full screen or have the format as it was defined in the dialog editor In any case the window can be moved and resized Any time display format is active will have full access to any of the commands in the menu bar and the buttons on the toolbar A format can be minimized or maximized 65 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 A dialog box is similar to a display format except that the dialog is modal This means it has to be closed eg punctured OK or Cancel before control is transferred back to the program that called it so that the user can continue working with the rest of the application The menu items for example can not be accessed while the dialog is still open You can create a wide variety of dialogues Basically dialog boxes can be used at any time when you want information to or from the operator without this affecting what is currently appearing on screen or in other active dialog boxes Each time you use the File New command File New t
346. ppear The default is to display three lines once the user has clicked on the down arrow In any case the number of lines 1s a matter of design as can always use the scroll to view the rest of the element The alphanumeric display that appear on the list may be specified as a property of the control or change it on the fly at run time using function cAddComboContents In any case a call to the function will return the entry cGetCombo user entered Note that the initial alphanumeric are limited to a total of 175 characters in length If the total number of characters exceeds this length will then initialize the contents of the combo box at the time of execution The number of elements can contain a combo box elements is 15000 The example program invoice at the end of this chapter illustrates how the combo boxes can be used in an application Summarizing the properties of a box may be Property Value Effect Initial Alphanumeric Strings The alphanumeric display will be removed by the list The Initial Choice Default value is initially in the combo box editor BASIC Variable CMBO700 The variable used in a BASIC program to reference the data after the variable has been defined with GLOBAL ID Control ID 700 The value associated with the control Fixed Font off the entry is displayed in a proportional font 69 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 Simple Estyles control operate as a simple combo box Number lines 3 number of
347. ption to N strings L field desc field Where L determines that the instructions specified below indicate which fields are written to the output file The character should immediately precede the first definition of the output field with or without a space separator This option specifies ends when an instruction S P or Q or reaches the end of the command line Pnnn 209 Chapter 12 Development Utilities indicates that the output file will not include the first records nnn 1 255 of the input file This option should not be used when working with files indexed since Bsort not read the records in the sequential order of the file key Q indicates Bsort to run in silent mode When using this option not displayed or the copyright notice or the number of records O indicates the access mode to be used in the output file The syntax is L field des field O type The valid encodings file types are R the same type as the input file S sequential file D Direct File I Indexed file Note that when this option is not specified the previous rule will be used for the output files C is the continuation character indicating that the command description continue on the next line This option is used by introducing C after the comma that ends the previous instruction and then lt retorno of carro gt Note that this option can only be used from the operating system prompt or from a file Qs The classificati
348. r The statement syntax is cOpenBrowser call ADDROF name filter Where name 1s the string used to return the name of the selected file filter a Chain is used to restrict the files displayed in the list For example REM Shows a dialog box for selecting files to open REM and restricts basic sources files B CALL cOpenBrowser ADDROF name Basic Files B B 11 This function displays a standard Windows command window open in File menu If a file is selected will return the full path name including the unit If the user chooses the Cancel button Name is loaded with zero When filter is an empty string the files appear in the list as if it had been specified The filter string must be formatted with two entries separated by a vertical bar l and end with two or more vertical bars The first entry is an informational message about the description of the filter The second entry should indicate the file extension to be used to some extent as a restriction of the list of files in a manner similar to the DOS DIR command In the second inning may have multiple extensions separated by a semicolon as shown below Source files B Asm B Asm It may also include multiple filters in which each filter can be accessed via a drop down window For example Basic Files B B Assembler Files Asm Asm The home directory is displayed in the browser is the current w
349. r left corner where the image should be displayed W H Are the width and height of the image area to show 8 2 1 Functions list The following chart lists the functions w 32 with a brief description of its use Funci n Operaci n cAppTitle Agrega el t tulo a mostrar de la ventana de aplicaci n cAppWindowInfo Obtiene la localizaci n y tama o de la ventana de aplicaci n cAppWindowTop Mueve la ventana de aplicaci n a la parte de arriba cAppWindowMax Maximiza la ventana principal de la aplicaci n cAppWindowMin Maximiza la ventana principal de la aplicaci n cAppWindowNormal Restaura el tama o de la ventana principal de la aplicaci n cCheckItem Introduce o borra un bot n de opci n para un elemento de men cChoiceList Visualiza una lista de opciones con elementos clasificados cChoiceListNS Visualiza una lista de opciones con elementos no clasificados cCloseDIBWindow Cierra una ventana DIP cCreateProcess Crea un proceso espec fico cDIBInfo Obtiene el alto y ancho de un grafico DIB cDIB WindowInfo Obtiene la localizaci n y tama o de una ventana DIB cDIBWindowTop Desplaza una ventana DIB al principio del stack pila de ventanas cDisplayInfo Obtiene la resoluci n de pantalla y n mero de colores cEnableDocking Habilita una barra de herramientas movible 2 cEnableltem Habilita o deshabilita un elemento de men cEnableMainWin Controla el estado de activaci n de la ventana de la aplicaci
350. r move forward in the selection process ignore the event or save the information to be considered later The framework is designed to alert an application when specific mouse events occur Cetwin b file contains the BASIC subroutines that can be used to detect mouse events The following events may be detected CetRBtnDn and cetLBtnDn Right and left button down CetRBtnUp and cetLBtnUp Right and left button up CetRBtnDCIK and cetLBtnDCIK Right and left double click button release the button CetMouseMove Move mouse In general only the routines that detect a double click or release the button to the right or left will be used as it is at the moment you release the button when an event occurs For example you can drag the mouse over the items in a menu without making a selection When you release the mouse button the top button event the item is selected The button down and moving routines are included in case you need a level accurate information of the movements of the mouse For example you can use a call to cGetmouse current coordinates for character based mouse The following examples use w 32 functions to insert characters into the keyboard input queue If your program is waiting for input eg LINPUT a judgment when the button is released the statement is executed as if it had used the keyboard The first example Fl key inserted into the buffer Note the use of two character code The first code below zero mean
351. r the changes to take effect you must restart the machine For USB dongles After installation of the drivers the activation is automatic 1 8 MACADDRESS CET Protection The alternative to the backpack or dongle is a code related to the MAC address of the network card of the PC To activate this system cetfmac exe execute the command which returns the address of the card as follows Ci gt cetfmac CET MAC Address Finder Found 1 MAC Addresses MAC Address BBASI1CADAA93 GEN This value corresponds to a code supplied by the staff of our office These values along with other staff supplied by Omega conform system authentication These values must be set in CET environment variables within W32APBLD w32 file To do this you need to edit the file and find the following block of variables in it and set the corresponding values The characters mean comments online so I will delete those involving one of these variables The purpose of these reviews is not to lose the variables when using a backpack system and in turn not interfere with REM network address MAC address Mac RED B_MACAD 00051CODAA93 Fixed REM B_MACPC 133 15 Chapter 1 Installation guide REM serial n B_MACSN 999 REM n of concurrent users in MSDOS or Windows B MACNU 10 REM options 1 POSWINDOWS B MACLO 7 REM n Access user B MACNA 0 REM compiler password for win B_MACPW NFLZTL 1 9 Verifying the Insta
352. re that the text within the window Straighten if not the excess characters are truncated 50 Chapter 4 The framework 4 5 10 Changing the program icon By default all programs CET w 32 icon displayed in the Help About dialog box In and at the bottom of the screen when a program is minimized The icon will also be used if you create your own program element in the main program The application icon is defined in section cetuser rc icon file with the following line ICON IDR_MAINFRAME DISCARDABLE CETICON ICO The default icon is stored in the file directory ceticon ico cetlib inc if you used the default PATH in the installation process To design your own icon copy the default icon in your local directory with a new name eg copy cetlib inc ceticon ico tst miicon ico Now use the program to modify the new Imagedit miicon ico file Once done edit the line in cetuser rc to use the new icon IDR_MAINFRAME ICO DISCARDABLE MIICON ICO 4 5 11 Simulating keyboard input with mouse subroutines Text based applications DOS or UNIX typically provide some options menus that keep the program waiting for the user to make an entry The same happens when we work under the Windows environment As a developer you have complete control over how your program responds to events Windows like menu selection or mouse click For example if a user uses the mouse to a menu selection your program will be notified At that point you can eithe
353. rectory The next chapter Configuring the MySQL Server assumes that it is installed on a Windows machine in the directory C MYSQL Probably should add C Y mysql bin to your PATH so you can easily run the command line tools that brings MySQL It is also recommended download and install the MySQL Control Center 2 9 13 2 Configurando el servidor MySQL 2 9 13 3 Configuraci n espec fica del Servidor The MySQL server uses the configuration file my cnf On Windows machines this file is usually located in C my cnf The MySQL installer puts four examples configuration files within the root installation directory C MySQL in our case Files are my small cnf medium cnf my my my huge large cnf and cnf Select the appropriate file for your machine configuration and the size of the database Refer to the MySQL documentation for more details Copy the configuration selected configuration file in C my cnf Open the file c my cnf with any text editor and uncomment all configurations that follow the line that says remove the comments that follow if you are using tables Innobases Uncomment the Following if you are using Innobase tables Pay attention to the directories that are with innodb_data_home_dir variables innodb_log_group_home_dir and innodb_log_arch_dir These variables specify the location of the InnoDB data files You can override the defaults with anything you want or you can leave them as is Create
354. resents the channel at which to open the file counter It is a numeric value that returns the number of records in the file Reg The data record length Note that this value has traditionally been the addition of more data characters of the key Key This value returns the length of the key 13 2 9 Functions related to the environment 13 2 10 Bgetenv y Bputenv The function can be used to obtain Bgetenv charges any environment variable autoexec bat file The statement syntax is Bputenv can be used to activate the environment variables to a value only during program execution Check with your dealer about which variables that may change After the program ends restores the original value CALL Bgetenv ADDROF value var CALL Bputenv comandoset The parameters are value Returns the information stored in the environment variable or a null character if the required information is not available For example if this variable was not updated with any value var Specifies the name of the environment variable comandoset Specifies the command to update the environment variable with a new value The following code shows the use of these features CALL Bgetenv addrof s aa PRINT Present value aa is lt s gt REM Now change the environment variable in the form lt VAR gt lt LIST gt new PATH C DOS C BIN CALL Bputenv new 13 2 11 Bgetenv32 y Bputenv32 Bgetenv function can be use
355. return a BASIC subroutine The ability to use BASIC subroutines is another powerful feature of Application Development System w 32 CET to which he devotes a separate chapter in this manual 2 6 Mouse support The mouse input device is the most important data for Windows applications It gives the user an intuitive way of selection and implementation Although entry by mouse is usually difficult to integrate keyboard oriented applications w 32 provides a powerful way to use the mouse at any time The mouse handler detects any movement or touch and responds immediately by calling specific BASIC subroutines such as e cetLBtnDn e cetRBtnDn e cetMouseMove e cetLBtnUp e cetRBtnUp e cetLBtnDClk e cetRBtnDClk These subroutines are invoked when the mouse buttons are pressed released or doubly pressed and when movement is detected in the mouse Your program can perform any action when it detects these mouse events or define global variables that will later be used in other routines Even existing applications that use INPUT or GET LINPUT for user input can be enhanced by using the mouse Using a feature called cInputQ Wi 32 a program can preload the keyboard input queue with answers Using this method a mouse event can force entering characters queued input keyboard making LINPUT or INPUT statements give input to these characters later 2 7 Viewing graphic images W 32 provides routines to display position and resize graphics in Bmp Dib
356. riate section 5 3 4 Command Arguments W32APBLD You can enter the environment and have opened a specific file without having to select File Open later This is done by typing the file name followed by the name W32APBLD For example to run the command and open the project example enter dialogue W32APBLD cetlib samples cetdemo prj 5 4 Create a project The command File New serves to create a project When you run this command will close any open windows containing source code dialog or other projects If changes have been made in those files the program will prompt you to save before closing New Pied El A dialog box will appear called New Project z Settings in which to write the name of the new project which Pioiect Name ies can be up to eight characters In our example we have given Create Cancel ae the A x If you choose the button Advanced another dialo box y te 8 Exe Name test appears in which you can specify the name of the executable file by default the same name as the Mo project name typing another name not add extension since CetWin Name ftestwin IES Exe is added automatically CetUser Name testuser Import You can also specify the name of the resource files that sie ad Cancel your project will use By default W32APBLD create a new file pair of own resources and this new project will be a 55 Chapter 5 The W 32 integrated develop environment copy of the files cetwin by
357. ric Driver Name under NT 95 or the name of the driver file using Windows In the latter case the file name is returned for information only It is not necessary to print handler port It is the alphanumeric variable used to return the port to which the printer is connected Under Windows NT and 95 the port number is important Note that the last three parameters will be empty when all printers are specified Currently cEnumPrinters function can be used to obtain information of the printer recognized by the printer driver Although they may have more available printers as network printers that are not connected to the printer driver Windows does not provide any means to determine if a printer is local or networked Under NT and 95 the name of a network printer normally begins with as a path name to the printer so it will be possible to implement this feature in future releases The following piece of program illustrates how to use this feature One example of W32usa programs this feature The project also illustrates this feature suprint prj REM begins to list the printers cEnumPrinters call 0 addrof prt addrof drvname addrof port while prtname lt gt print prtname drvname port cEnumPrinters call 1 addrof prt addrof drvname addrof port wend REM releases dynamic memory being used call cEnumPrinters 2 addrof prt addrof drvname addrof port cFontValues This routine c
358. rio V ase funciones del registro call cRegOpenKey 80000001H Software addrof sub 0 addrof ret call cRegOpenKey sub Microsoft addrof subl1 0 addrof ret call cRegOpenkey sub1 Windows addrof sub2 0 addrof ret call cRegOpenKey sub2 CurrentVersion addrof sub3 0 addrof ret call cRegOpenKey sub3 Explorer addrof sub4 0 addrof ret call cRegOpenKey sub4 Shell Folders addrof sub5 0 addrof ret call cRegQueryValue sub5 Desktop addrof donde addrof ret Rem Fin de la determinaci n de la ruta del escritorio call w32CreateShortCut c TPVREST tickitre exe donde S amp Programa Restaurantes lnk c XTPVREST Versi n 5 5 addrof ret a SERENE ES ee xi General Acceso directo Seguridad Programa Restaurantes Tipo de destino Aplicaci n Ubicaci n tpvrest Destino C tpvrest TICKitre EXE IV Ejecutar en espacio de memoria separado Ejecutar como usuario diferente Iniciar en eMTPVREST Tecla de m todo abrev Ninguno Ejecutar Ventana normal y Comentario Versi n 5 5 Buscar destino Cambiar icono Aceptar Cancelar Aplicar call w32CreateTipH control texto addrof tip This is identical to w32CreateTip with the proviso that the initial parameter is added to the control reference specify value obtained w32GetWindow This procedure avoids the need to put the focus
359. rlined addrof strikethrough W32GetFont function returns the attributes of the source that has the control that has focus Use to call cSetFocus The meaning of the parameters is identical to the function w32SetFont w32GetWindow call father ID addrof hand Returns a reference to a control in a dialog box The first parameter should be returned by the function call w32GetParent The second parameter must be the ID value of the control you want to get the reference w32SetFontH call hand source points position bold italic sub strikeout Sets the font control referenced by hand The orientation parameter designates the degrees of inclination of the text The last 4 parameters take value 1 to enable and 0 to disable attribute Ejemplo 147 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Se desea asignar el tipo de fuente Tahoma de 12 puntos al control de edici n con ID 100 perteneciente al di logo dlgl SUB dlglInit REM Initialize dialog save area REM inistart Rem poner el foco en un boton cualquiera 203 p ej para hallar la referencia al cuadro de dialogo Call cSetFocus dlglHDLG 203 Rem Obtener la referencia al dialogo Solo es necesario llamar a esta funcion una vez al inicio del dialogo call w32GetParent addrof padre Rem Obtener la referencia al control 100 del dialogo dlgl Call w32GetWindow padre 100 addrof ed100 Rem Cambiar la fuente Call w32SetFontH ed100 T
360. rns a string Bbarcode produce the correct bar code to send to one of the following printers e Postscript e Epson 9 pin e IBM Proprinter 9 pin e HP Laserjet at 150 dpi e HP Laserjet at 300 dpi e Epson 24 pin e 24 pin Toshiba e Standard Okidata Microline e IBM Proprinter 24 pin e HP Deskjet 150 dpi e HP Deskjet 300 dpi e HP Paintjet 180 dpi e HP Laserjet 150 dpi Compat Mode e HP Laserjet 300 dpi Compat Mode 2 10 3 The file access library CET BASIC can be linked linked with C language routines following paragraphs CET Guide Interface with C in the User Manual Since CET BASIC data files do not use native access methods that run through the operating system it is difficult to write subroutines implementing operations with files The File Access Library CET provides functions equivalent to CET BASIC statements OPEN CLOSE READ WRITE and UNLOCK Using these function libraries ensures that file accesses are executed through synchronizing with external subroutines C CET BASIC programs callers All locks files and records are executed through the library of functions and subroutines that can detect external conditions or end of file locking The functions used have the following syntax int fclose int channel int fwrite int channel char buffer int Ing long ftell int channel void fseek int channel long offset int base int fread int channel char buffer int Ing void finfo char nombrefi struct sfinfo
361. rogram or routine within the framework cetPreInit Windows The CALL statement syntax is CToolBar call bmid Num MATADDROF btns Where Bmid is the ID number of the bitmap resource The default toolbar as IDR_MAINFRAME has an ID number from 1 bmid 1 and is associated with the file cettool bmp Use of bmid 2 to bmid 50 to reference defined toolbars from IDR_TOOLBAR2 up IDR_TOOLBARSO Num is the number of buttons on the toolbar including separators this argument defines the number of array elements btns btns is an integer array of 50 elements representing menu ID values from ID_WINSUB1 up ID_WINSUB250 to be associated with the buttons The first element of the array is always 1 If used OPTION BASE 1 element 0 is ignored If you consider that each button is a quick way to specify a menu item it is easy to understand that each button within the matrix btns has to be associated with an identifier just as you MENUITEM serves to define the individual elements associated with a menu A menu specific ID is associated with a corresponding button in the integer array to the position of the button in the bitmap file For example if your toolbar has three buttons the dimension of the array will have a size of 3 The first button may be associated with the menu item ID_WINSUB12 the second and the third ID_WINSUB2 ID_WINSUB34 for assigning the following values btn 1 121 btn 2 2 bth 3 34 There are six special
362. roll properties are automatically activated and the corresponding Auto VScroll HScroll Note that each time you press the button in a dialog lt Enter gt default button is selected automatically Only a multiline edit control with the property Return be activated allow usable lt Enter gt to data entry This feature also allows you to describe the field using the newline character n when you need to load the input into an array Note that each time there is any change in an edit control a special event is generated This means you can add code to the source file dialog to verify the data character by character as it is entered or wait for the user to select another control This feature is covered in the section of the Dialogue Resource Files 7 8 5 Frames A control group can be used to alter the appearance of a dialogue by drawing a box to visually separate groups of related controls Introducing controls in a control group or defining a control group or covering around other controls did not alter in any way the behavior of the controls To add a control group select the appropriate menu item and position the cursor so that it is in the upper left corner Click and resize the control until the desired size The group controls have only two properties a title and a control ID number Double Click on a title to change the default Group Enter a title or label is optional In dialogue dlgCET example has created a control group la
363. rom within programs w 32 we recommend using Bcreate function see next chapter instead of this command which avoids having to leave the BASIC environment to develop this operation Note that this command is an enhanced version of the CREATE command you must have used on other platforms If desired you can rename the CREATE command with the name for compatibility Bcreate recognizes a variety of command options The shortcuts are underlined Note that precede signed options open parenthesis is optional The syntax is Bcreate lt filename gt options where filename The file name can be either in MS DOS and THEOS format For example cp data cp data custname custname and can be used interchangeably Nodesize value Specifies the node size to use when creating an indexed file The default is 512 Although w 32 programs can read files with the default size of the node we recommend that you use the n 1024 for consistency with Bcreate function indexed Creates an indexed file which is actually two files a Idx for keys and file records Dat for data direct Create a direct file on access reclen Assigns a record of length n keylen n Assigns a key of length n This option is ignored for direct files clear Clears an existing file content The key and record length will remain the same unless you specify other options keylen reclen and or nodesize in the command line Note that the file must be closed prior to th
364. rstFile c addrof fichero addrof handle if handle lt gt 0 then matrizS indice ficheros call w32FindNextFile handle addrof fichero addrof retorno 136 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 while retorno lt gt 0 indice indice 1 matriz indice fichero call w32FindNextFile handle addrof fichero addrof retorno wend ifend call cChoiceListNS Directorio c mataddrof matriz addrof sel Directorio c x Cancel w32GetComputerName addrof name Returns computer name w32GetDiskFreeSpace unidad addrof bytesfree addrof retcode Returns the number of bytes that are free on the drive that was specified Retcode Cero indica error w32GetWindowsDirectory addrof path Returns the WINDOWS directory path w32GetDriveType unidad addrof retcode Returns information about the type of drive unit Retcode can be 0 ERROR 1 LA UNIDAD NO EXISTE O NO HAY NINGUN MEDIO INSERTADO 2 UNIDAD REMOVIBLE 3 UNIDAD FIJA 4 UNIDAD REMOTA 3 UNIDAD CDROM 6 DISCO RAM call cOpenBrowser addrof nombre Imagenes para Botones bmp bmp if sch 0 nombre X lt gt 0 then for i l to len nombref if nombre i iJ then break next i call w32GetDriveType nombre 1 i addrof retorno5 SELECT retorno CASE 2 Msgbox No se permiten las unidades removibles CASE 3 rem call cSetFocus rem call w32BLoadImage nombre addrof valor CASE 4 Msg
365. rts the system looks for a file execution with the same name as the application with the W32 in the Windows directory usually Windows If the initialization file for a specific application does not exist or can not be found will be used instead the default file W32APBLD w32 Any program chained or bound to always use the same main initialization program that is using the main program The initialization file is editable W32APBLD w32 is a text file that loads all environment variables to null or empty strings so as to use the defaults Edit the file or preferably a copy to load any variable to a specific value Its content should not be replaced when installing a software update For a list of available environment variables run OBW32 without any parameters These appear grouped by function Variables related to the compiler and runtime system These variables indicate the location of the compiler runtime system and its components thus avoiding having to update the autoexec bat file B_CETBIN Indicates the location w 32 compiler By default this variable is updated B_CETBIN CACETBIN 11 Chapter 1 Installation guide B_CETINC Indicates the location of the runtime components cet Default is current directory cetlib INC B_CETINC CACETLIBUNC B_CETLIB This variable indicates the location of components cet win Default is current directory c cetlib B_CETLIB C CETLIB B_BRTMDIR This variable indicates the location of the sy
366. s 13 2 2 Bcreate 13 2 3 Berase 13 2 4 Brename 13 2 5 Bcopy 13 2 6 Bfilestat 13 2 7 Bgetcwd y Bchdir 13 2 8 Bindinfo 13 2 9 Functions related to the environment 13 2 10 Bgetenv y Bputenv 13 2 11 Bgetenv32 y Bputenv32 13 2 12 Bmemavl y Bmemmax 13 2 13 Bsernum 13 2 14 Functions of Program 13 2 15 Becho y Bnoecho 13 2 16 Bkdshift Chapter 14 Implementation Notes 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 Introduction El Default PIF file Current working directory The name of a file The default search sequence The number of open files CSI CSH sentences 129 129 129 130 132 202 202 202 203 203 204 204 205 205 206 207 207 216 216 216 216 216 216 216 216 217 217 217 217 217 217 217 218 218 218 218 219 219 219 219 219 220 220 220 Index 14 8 Msgbox Sentence 14 9 Printing 14 9 1 14 9 2 14 9 3 Native printing Printing text in Windows printers not compatible with MS Dos GRAPHICS PRINTING WITH WINDOWS SOURCES 221 221 221 222 222 Chapter 1 Installation guide Chapter 1 Installation guide 1 1 Introduction The Application Development System w 32 CET is a compiler libraries and utilities designed to produce commercial applications in 32 bit Windows operating systems from Microsoft This chapter will provide the information necessary to install
367. s and for an explanation of the command argument wsize that can be used to change this default at the time of execution 7 7 5 Source file The files in the dialog are explained in detail later in this chapter For now just note that there are two additional properties that can be set and that will change the BASIC source file to be generated The two properties refer to these two options 1 Not to ask for interactive control values Interactive controls are those that capture user input By default generated CALL statements to automatically search the values of all interactive controls before the end of the dialogue This means you do not have to modify the source to get the information passed to the main program with GLOBAL statements 66 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 The control dialogs this default feature However display formats typically have to modify the source programs by hand to recover the values of interactive controls according to their specific needs In this case update this to the editor does not generate this code also 2 Not generating the control variables GLOBAL By default BASIC control each variable is defined as a global variable with GLOBAL statement This same statements GLOBAL also be written in the main program so that the information can be accessed from the dialogue Edit Copy command can be used to copy the sentences GLOBAL clipboard Then be pasted into the main program using Edit
368. s including Windows By default an application starts w 32 opening a text window A l0 x File View Fonts Help Practicas con lineas de cabeceras v1 0 Consulta de albaranes Seleccion de albaran Consulta de Proveedores Seleccion de Proveedor Consulta de Articulos Seleccion de Articulo Consulta de Clientes Seleccion de Cliente 17 Chapter 2 Overview The text window provides a familiar screen character style ready for them to run existing programs CET The menu command by default has the following options selecting typefaces fonts or fonts appears or not the toolbar that appears or not the status bar and a help window Development System w 32 CET provides powerful tools to enhance your applications without having to modify the source code By default all applications are linked to the framework by which you can control the fonts fonts the number and types of elements displaying the status bar and toolbar The Manager can be modified eg Selecting a specific source these new features will be used automatically whenever you compile a program To the framework it devotes an entire chapter in this manual You can use a special compiler flag that can be used to change their existing input fields created LINPUT USING LINPUT controls and GET for Windows text editors to quickly acquire your application windows look See Chapter w 32 Compiler for more information on the use of these special text editors
369. s not loaded 1 see a black background before any color you use your program If you use a background color in your program we recommend loading this variable with the same color this will prevent discoloration often undesirable If you do not use color in your program the gray will give a totally Windows This can be done by setting the variables of foreground and background to black and white ie the values 0 and 7 respectively To display a gray background B_DFLTBGC 7 For more details on using color see COLOR statement in Chapter Features Color and Line Drawing Manual CET BASIC Language Reference B_DFLTFGC Load the value of the foreground color for the same reason as discussed in the previous paragraph we recommend loading this variable with the same value you use in your application program For example the following variable will cause the foreground color is black B_DFLTFGC 0 For more details on using color see COLOR statement in Chapter Features Color and Line Drawing Manual CET BASIC Language Reference B_SCRNOLINES Load the number of lines to be displayed on screen The default is 25 unless BLEMULATE loaded in this case will be 24 Variables que proporcionan compatibilidad con THEOS The use of the following variables will allow their w 32 programs run as if they were running under the operating system THEOS B_ lt driver gt DRIVE Turn on to affect the way we interpret the physical drive THEOS driver For example SET B_S
370. s that a key is extended the F1 key SUB cetLBinUp REM Llamada cuando el bot n izquierdo es soltado REM Inserta la tecla F1 dentro de la cola de entrada call cInputQ 0 Tecla Extendida De Funci n cursores etc call cInputQ 59 F1 EXIT The following example of the operation of the ENTER key cetRBtnUp inserted into the input buffer as soon as you release the right SUB cetRBtnUp REM Llamada cuando suelte el bot n derecho del rat n REM Introduce la tecla INTRO dentro de la cola de entrada call clnputQ 13 You can find a table of characters for input codes in Appendix Manual CET BASIC Language Reference The following is an example of how you can modify a copy of your file cetwin b to add mouse support to your application SUB cetLBtnDn Chapter 4 The framework GLOBAL MROW MCOL MOUSEDOWN SELANCHOR REM Llamado cuando se pulsa el bot n izquierdo MOUSEDOWN 1 CALL cGetMouse addrof mrow addrof mcol CALL clnputQ 3007 rem MOUSE DOWN EXIT SUB cetRBtnDn REM Llamado cuando se pulsa el bot n derecho REM No se utiliza en este ejemplo EXIT SUB cetLBinUp GLOBAL MROW MCOL MOUSEDOWN SELANCHOR REM Llamado cuando se suelta el bot n izquierdo MOUSEDOWN 0 CALL cGetMouse addrof mrow addrof mcol CALL clnputQ 3008 1 rem MOUSE UP EXIT SUB cetRBtnUp REM Llamado cuando se suelta el bot n izquierdo REM No utilizado en este ejemplo EXIT SUB cetLBtnD
371. se specify Mode which indicates the way in which to display the window in accordance with the following table Hidden Window 0 Activates and displays the window 1 Activates the window and minimizes 2 Activates the window and maximizes 3 Activates the window in its most recent size and position 4 Activates the window and displays it in its current size and position 5 Minimizes the window and activates the appropriate following six Minimizes the window that was active window remains 7 Displays the window in its current state remains active window 8 Active and restore a minimized window when this was 9 w32ShellExecuteEx call father operation file arg dir mode seg _timeout addrof return Performs an operation on the specified file expecting to conclude The interpretation of the parameters is as follows 180 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Father parent window handle to receive any message box regarding implementation If used must be the value returned by the function w32GetParent otherwise specify 0 Operation one of the following values edit open a document for editing explore Explore the specified folder open Opens the specified document print Print the document specified file file on which the operation is performed arg if the specified file is the name of an executable this parameter indicates the parameters that are passed to the application Otherwise speci
372. sed to transfer control to an external routine in C BASIC or assembler The name of the routines should be as shown in this manual case sensitive to the linker LINK to resolve references during compilation There are two modes of CALL statements Mode 1 uses the syntax CALL routine to transfer control to a specific routine No arguments are passed to the routine and returns information to the main program A few routines as cFontValues w 32 use this syntax Most C routines use mode 2 of the CALL statement to pass one or more arguments to the routine using the syntax CALL routine arg list When used this way it is important to spend the type and number of arguments in the proper order Otherwise it will generate a runtime error For example if a routine as cDIBWindow expects an integer value handle has to pass an integer variable or constant not a float value The special function ADDROF be used to pass the memory address of a variable to a C routine passing the value of this variable This variable can be an element of a table or a simple variable MATADDROF is a similar function to pass the memory address of a table The routine will evaluate the direction of the variable and assign a new value For example the ADDROF address of two integer variables are passed cGetCursor CALL cGetCursor ADDROF row ADDROF column The values assigned to the variables row and column will be returned to the BASIC program To say that t
373. sequential output file if specified limited output option L Example 4 This example shows how to specify that the sorting parameters in a sequential ASCII file This feature is especially useful when you want to change the sorting parameters without recompiling the BASIC program Also enter long classification instructions that require the use of the continuation option C to prevent exceeding the maximum limit of 127 characters in a command that requires MS DOS Should consider two requirements to use this technique First the file name must be a name with UNIX or DOS format depending on the operating system in use The file name must have the extension Qs For example Bsort Example qsp The contents of two records in a file Qsp might be Testfile Out B 80 6 1 1 3 1 6 4 1 40 5 1 4 1 I C 2 1 5 S4 1 1 EQ 1 A NM L4 1 40 11 Example 5 In this example the file to be sorted is called Isamfile Is an indexed file with three fields in each record The first field contains an integer the second a floating point number and the third a string The following command will order the contents of Isamfile and write the sorted records in a file called direct Out in descending order The records sorted first by the first five characters of the third field The second and third sort criteria will be determined by the contents of the second and third fields Bsort Isamfile Out B 3 1 5 2F 1 ID Sorting Records ASC
374. set of properties that affect its appearance and the way it works These properties can be set at design time dialogue editing and clicking with the mouse to control properties or at runtime using some functions described in section Files dialog sources To avoid redundancy we define here the two properties common to all controls 1 Ownership variable BASIC is a name like EDIT100 and LBOX300 indicating the type of control and the ID number that define it These names can be changed to make more sense for you as a programmer Each variable BASIC statement will result in a GLOBAL automatically The GLOBAL specify the prefix of dialogue dialogue prefix property followed by the variable name BASIC This statement can be used to pass information between the dialogue and the main application program Note that the prefix of the dialogue eg DLG1 is added at the beginning of each global variable that the variable to be unique to that specific dialogue This prefix will be used in all the names in the source BASIC subroutine 2 The unique ID value should not be changed because it is used to identify the controls in the dialog program These numbers will be within a specific range depending on the type of control Example Tipo de control Valor del Identificador Radio buttonsGroups 1to 99 Edit text 100 to 199 Command buttons 200 to 299 200 OK y 201 Cancel Lists boxes 300 to 399 Scroll bars 400 to 499 Labels 500 to 599 Frames 60
375. sion of Bpretty is unlike those available in other products of CET BASIC The entry will not be accepted from rear The source file name must be specified on the command line The specified file will be rewritten after storing the original code in a file extension Bak By default the backup file has the same name as the source file file names must be in DOS format The syntax is Bpretty n p i fuente b fuente bak where n Indents n spaces The default is 4 t Replaces spaces with TAB if possible I Insert the include files before performing any other operation 12 6Brenum command Brenum can be used to renumber or remove the numbering CET BASIC source programs up to 999 999 lines The file names must be in DOS format The syntax is Brenum a n initial i increment b begin e end u lt fuente b gt fuente bak where A Makes all lines are numbered range When omitted the default numbered lines only with numbers Note that the lines of code contained in include files are not renumbered even when using this option a N 204 Chapter 12 Development Utilities Start renumber from given initial number By default this is 10 I Increases line renumbering by the increased value given in the command line The default is 10 Works like the i option to specify how the numbers will increase B Renumbering starts from given initial line When this is omitted the default is the first line of the progr
376. solutions e 640x480 e 800x600 e 1024x768 This feature allows you to design dialogues on a monitor that has a higher resolution than what your client may be using For example if you are using a resolution of 1024x768 the dialog you are designing will not work on a system that is running at a resolution of 640x480 To avoid a possible problem use the command Layout Display Resolution and make your selection to redesign the dialog editor window according to the resolution If your application uses a display format with a toolbar and or status bar then make sure the editor window also has the main toolbar and the status bar status Otherwise all formats may not fit in the application window 7 9 7 Radio buttons commands The menu commands are available to make or break a group of radio buttons When you have defined a set of buttons you may find it easier to use the command Layout Undo all Radio Groups undo all radio groups and return them if you find that you do not operate as expected Refer to section Radio button controls for more information on how to use these commands 7 9 8 Grid Size Resolution The dialog window has a mesh size of five pixels by default This means that a control can be moved or resized five pixels at the same time so you can see the effect Although it is recommended that this value does not decrease this size can be increased temporarily when aligned controls Note that this command is only ef
377. splay the status bar when you run any of its programs compiled W32 You can call a special function the cStatusText from its program to replace the default messages from other messages that you choose Please refer to the chapter Functions Window to see in detail how to use this feature 4 5 5 Changing the default title in the main window By default no title will not appear in the main window To define a function using cAppTitle title cAppTitle call ABC Payroll System You should be aware that the text chosen not exceed the width of the window because it exceeded the characters will be truncated CAppTitle function should be used within a BASIC program If used within the subroutine cetPreInit cetwin b contained in the file and recompiling then any program that linke with this Obj has the same title 4 5 6 Changing the default menu bar CET w 32 App Builder gives you many options to incorporate features of Windows within their programs You can display your classic menus in the main window without having to use the drop down submenus system You can also choose to completely replace their existing menus or display your classic menus and give the user the option to use a submenu with or without a mouse The Framework is designed to help in the development of Windows submenus By default programs w 32 displayed a menu that includes options File View and Help Sources This menu can be redesigned to display more than two dozen different
378. ssword Password to authenticate to the SMTP server in the event that this is required usarssl Indicate the value 1 if using the SSL protocol on shipping or O otherwise 201 Chapter 12 Development Utilities Chapter 12 Development Utilities 12 1 Introduction CET BASIC The product includes a variety of utilities that can be used in development programs and in the recovery of data files These utilities are described in this chapter To clarify the syntax have been used the following criteria Double brackets an optional parameter indicator IA vertical bar indicates a choice between two parameters The italics italics indicate a variable name defined by the user Although Windows commands no difference between upper and lower case all utilities except CREATE names are a mixture of both We recommend you get used to the distinction between the two case sensitive especially if you go to port applications to UNIX environment where this difference is important It is important to stress that these utilities are 32 bit programs to be stored in the directory W32 executable programs by default the cetbin If you have a copy of CET BASIC product on the same system then you will also have 16 bit versions of these utilities stored in the bin corresponding Set the PATH variable to the directory selected is the first specified to avoid potential problems when trying to access the wrong versions There is an online help available for each
379. stem running WIN CET Default is current directory c windows system B_BRTMDIR CAWINDOWSISYSTEM Variables de entorno relacionadas con ficheros y entradas salidas B_CSHFCLOSE Load this variable to 1 to close all files before running a sentence CSH CSI This variable is subject to the default which is not close open files B_FPATH Load this variable to the list of directories where different locations will pick the OPEN statement before launching a file not found error B_FPATH supports a string of up to 255 characters Separate each path with a semicolon symbol For example if the file question to be opened BASIC first searches the current directory If this file is not in this directory and loaded B_FPATH variable as below then the program will try to open the file D FPA question B_FPATH D APF Note that if the variable is loaded B_FPATH search will be conducted for all open files except SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT mode In this case the runtime system will always look for the file in the current directory B_LIBFNTYP Load this variable to 1 so that the file name in the format THEOS abc are open as b a c If this variable is not set to 1 BASIC will try to open the file as 1 A b c B_LKPATH Load this variable search paths used by executable files called by the judgments LINK CHAIN and RUN Separate each path with a semicolon symbol Note that behaves like Windows w 32 to find an executable file The search seque
380. system all applications are suspended until the user responds to the message box The first group of values 0 5 describes the number and type of buttons displayed in the dialog box and the second group 16 32 48 64 describes the icon style the third group 0 256 512 determines the default button and the fourth group 0 4096 determines the modality of the message box When adding numbers to get the final value of the style argument uses only one number from each group The return value can be one of the following values indicating the button pressed by the user 1 OK 133 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 2 Cancel 3 Cancel 4 Retry 5 Ignore 6 Yes 7 No The following example illustrates the potential program dialog that could be presented to the user in the event that one of the records in a sequence to be updated is locked by another user call cForceExit cAppTitle call My Application arti 00214020 title Record locked S linel Article arti amp can not be updated S line2 because another user is modifying Line3 Specify the procedure Line4 CANCEL to cancel the upgrade linea5 RETRY to see if it has already been freed linea6 ignore to dismiss it and move to the next text linel amp chr 10 amp line2 amp chr 10 Chr 10 amp Line3 amp chr 10 Line4 chr 10 amp linea5 amp chr 10
381. t c If the selected cell on pressing the DEL key Backspace erases the contents hereof and allows editing You have changed the contents of a cell by any of the three methods so quick edit keys Home End and Delete keys have no effect Also the cursor left and right cursor will cause the adjacent cell is selected In any type of editing you can press the Escape key to undo the data entry Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridEditing call grid addrof editing Returns 1 if a cell is being edited in the grid Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridGetCellProtection call grid row col addrof protected Returns 1 if the grid cell par mentros referenced by row and col is protected Protected cells are those that the user can not edit and whose background color can be highlighted Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later 169 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 w32GridGetCol call grid addrof col_actual Returns the column number of the cell in the grid that is currently selected Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridGetColCount call grid addrof num_col Returns the number of columns in the grid Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridGetEditString call grid addrof txt This feature should be invoked when previously been found by w32GridEditing which is a cell in editing in which case
382. t en la primera fila 20 Pulsaci n de Cursor Abajo ltima Fila Columna actual S lo se notifica cuando se est en la ltima fila 21 Pulsaci n de Re P g S lo se 1 Columna actual notifica cuando se est en la primera fila 22 Pulsaci n de Av P g S lo se Ultima Fila Columna actual notifica cuando se est en la 170 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 ltima fila 23 No se utiliza Reservado 24 Clic fuera del rea de celdas Fila Correspondiente Columna l en otro caso correspondiente 1 en otro caso 25 Se ha seleccionado una celda Fila anterior Columna anterior perteneciente a una fila distinta a la anterior 26 Se ha seleccionado una celda Fila anterior Columna anterior perteneciente a una columna distinta a la anterior 27 Se ha puesto el foco sobre el ID del control que 1 control anteriormente ten a el foco 6 0 si el control pertenec a a otro di logo 28 El control ha perdido el foco ID del control que pasaa 1 recibir el foco 6 0 si el control no pertenece al di logo 29 Clic con el bot n derecho Fila Correspondiente Columna 1l en otro caso correspondiente 1 en otro caso 30 Doble Clic fuera del rea de Fila Correspondiente Columna celdas l en otro caso correspondiente 1 en otro caso 31 Pulsaci n de ENTER S lo se Fila actual Columna actual notifica cuando no hay ning n desplazamiento asociado a esa tecla Ver w32GridSetEnterMode 32 Pulsaci n de ESCAPE Fila actual Columna
383. t REM Initialize dialog save area REM inistart include estilos h Rem El fichero estilos contiene la definici n de las constante empleadas en w32CreateWindowH Rem Permitir crear controles link en tiempo de ejecuci n call w32CreateStaticClassEx padre addrof props 197 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Rem Crear un control CETStaticLinkEx al que se le puede asociar una imagen esto se indica por el flag SS_BITMAP call w32CreateWindowH padre 521 CETStaticLinkEx WS_BASE S OR SS_NOTIFY OR SS_BITMAPS 0 110 46 20 20 addrof r521 Rem Se le asocia la imagen al control que acaba de crearse call w32StaticSetImageH r521 imagen abrir bmp 20 20 addrof ret SUB hotlEvent SELECT CET_EVTYPE REM Event notification save area REM evtstart CASE 15 SELECT CMDID CASE 521 Rem Eventos para el control Link con ID n mero 521 if prop 1 Rem Se ha hecho click en la etiqueta ifend call w32BlockInput bloquea Disable or enable the keyboard and mouse as a function of the argument is or 0 The only combination that is recognized Ctrl Alt Delete w32GetAdaptersInfo call num addrof name addrof desc addrod mac addrof ip addrof mask addrof ret Returns information about the network adapters installed on the system The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Num network adapter number on which you want information starting from 0 Name Name
384. t 7 7 1 Tittle TA Prefix 7 7 3 Type 7 7 4 Size 7 7 5 Source file 7 8 Defining controls 7 8 1 Check Box 7 8 2 Combobox 7 8 3 Command buttons 7 8 4 ContEdit text 7 8 5 Frames 7 8 6 Listboxes 7 87 Radio buttons 7 8 8 Scrollbars 7 8 9 Labels 7 9 Changing the look and how to operate the dialog 7 9 1 Alignment 7 9 2 Centered 7 9 3 Using the Same Size 7 9 4 Tab order 7 9 5 Returning to create a sequence of IDs 7 9 6 Screen Resolution 7 9 7 Radio buttons commands 7 9 8 Grid Size Resolution 7 10 Runtime functions 7 10 1 Checking Box Controls 7 10 2 Combo box controls 7 10 3 Command buttons controls 7 10 4 Edit controls 7 10 5 List box controls 7 10 6 Radio buttons controls 7 10 7 Scrollbars controls 60 60 60 60 60 62 Index 7 10 8 General routines 78 7 11 Dialog source files 79 7 11 1 Program upper part 80 7 11 2 Prefix subroutine 81 7 11 3 prefixBtnClick subroutine 81 7 11 4 PrefixEvent subroutine 83 7 A1 5 PrefixInit subroutine 84 7 12 Copying a dialog 84 7 13 The main program 84 7 14 INVOICE An example using visual format 86 7 14 1 The main program 87 7 14 2 The visual format source file 87 7 14 3 Dialog source files 93 7 15 VALIDATE Data validation subroutine 96 7 16 W32 DEMOS A menu example program 98 7 17 CALC A special buttons proccesing program 100 7 18 PROGRESS A d
385. t item indice_ima addrof resu It has the same behavior as w32ListInsertltem function except that it is possible to specify a last parameter indicating the index of the image list associated with the control to be displayed in the row item example You have created the following file image bmp containing all possible images to be displayed in rows in a list ena call w32CreateImageList 20 limagen bmp addrof ima rem la anchura de cada icono es de 20 call w32ListImageList lis ima addrof ret rem Asociar las imagenes a la lista call w32ListSetImage lis 0 1 addrof ret Establece el 2 icono como imagen del 1 item Capitulo 501 ACONDICIONAMIENTO DEL TERRENO call w32CreateTreeH padre x y ancho alto addrof tree Create a visual tree control The return value is necessary to refer to the tree in the rest of the functions that operate on the same The coordinates x and y are relative to the overall dialog box referenced by the parent parameter use w32GetParent call for this first parameter w32TreelInsertItem call tree text padre_en_arbol index children addrof ref Inserts a new element into the tree tree with text text 155 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 The parameter indicates the reference padre_en_arbol element tree hierarchy immediately above the element to be inserted When there is an ancestor in the tree above the padre_en_arbol parameter valu
386. t directory 1f not specified uses the directory in which the file is input The output stage In the third stage the sorted records are written to the output file specified on the command line Output specifications are used to limit the fields from the check that will be written to the output file These fields are completely independent of those used in the organization If this option is omitted the check will be written entirely in the output file The letter L is used to indicate that the following statements define which fields are displayed The character should immediately precede the first definition of the output field without separation of space or comma This option ends when you enter a command S P or Q or it reaches the end of the command line The field variables for formatted binary records and off field have the same use as before except that at this stage no longer needed the option N to convert a string to a numeric value You can also use certain options P Q and C to modify the behavior of the utility Bsort and indicate that you need to ignore records starting control of a file not to display the copyright information and the number or records management instructions have been introduced into more than one line Bsort examples This section illustrates some typical commands for sorting records in a UNIX environment The equivalent commands in MS DOS could use a backslash at the start of the file names and w
387. t programs We strongly environment BASIC leave to perform other operations eliminating the judgments CSI CSH whenever possible Have developed spatial files related functions for this purpose Covered in Chapter routines built in C language The sentences CSI CSH write the command to execute a batch file in the directory tmp Given that generates a batch file can enter multiple commands separated by lt Intro Nueva lt LINE generated by CHR 13 CHR 10 For example to change to the tst tst exe delete the file and enter CMD CD TMP CHR 13 CHR 10 THE TST EXE CSI CMD Your program will wait until you run the last command that was passed to the judgment CSI While running a command CSI an icon appears on screen MS DOS When the command finishes CSI the icon disappears and your program is still running Because some commands that are passed to CSI require keyboard input we have added an option to the judgment CSI If the first seven characters are past noicon then the MS DOS window appears as another window inside the screen allowing the user to accept data Your program will be suspended until the command finishes For example to format a floppy disk in drive A CMD noicon FORMAT A CSI CMD In this case an MS DOS window appears on your screen with the FORMAT command message Insert a new diskette in drive A and press ENTER when ready The user should press Enter and wait while t
388. t property of the event It returns 1 if not applicable Param2 the second property of the event It returns 1 if not applicable The information available for each type of event is as follows Evento Descripci n Propiedad 1 Propiedad 2 Click con el bot n izq del rat n Item fila de la lista Sub item columna Cambio de estado Selecci n o Check Item fila de la lista 1 Box Doble click con el bot n izq del rat n Item fila de la lista Sub item columna Click con el bot n derecho del rat n Item fila de la lista Sub item columna Pulsaci n de una tecla Valor ver 1 w32Skeybd_event_dow n Click en el titulo de una columna 1 Columna de la lista The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init In all dialogues that make up an executable should not be called more than once to the same function in this group Thus to define the event processing list controls three functions to be used Call w32ListGetEvents1 Call w32ListGetEvents2 Call w32ListGetEvents3 Este grupo de funciones reemplaza al grupo de funciones w32SetEventsn Ejemplo SSUB dlglBtnClick REM Button Click save area REM btnstart SELECT CMDID CASE 250 151 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Rem Notificaciones para la lista lis Rem evento gt Numero de evento Rem 1_item gt Propiedad 1 Rem 1_sub gt Propiedad 2 SELECT evento CASE 1 Rem Click en un
389. t the A Library properties moment we are going to close or save the environment will prompt you to add it to the ean project This also occurs when you create a dependency file extension Inc Ho Cpu In this case you should answer you do not want to add the file to the project because as mentioned would give an error message Finally we strongly recommend that you NOT use the Save As option to rename files this could lead to problems with projects using the same We recommend that the project be deleted delete will be renamed from the command line By Idh if dialogue and finally back to the project reafiadan After adding a file to a project when you press the right button options are fast the type of file to which you pressed e Open Edit the file e Delete removes the project file e Compile Compile the file using the flags specified in the properties of that file Properties Specifies the file properties They are different project properties properties files Project Properties Displayed by pressing the right mouse button over the project root properties Exe Name Exe Path CAEJEMPLOS 1 Exe Name name of the executable file to generate Starting Path CAEJEMPLOS 2 Exe Path path where to store the executable file o oetsd 3 Starting Path working directory 4 Exe Args execution arguments Include Dirs 5 Include Dirs search directories include files indicating NOTE Include Dirs must be abs
390. t there are no inconsistencies in this part of the input file and creates SQL statements to create the SQL table and import the data Bsqlconv Run again and redirect its output into a file bsqlconv exampl t Recordl gt examplel sql This will create a file in a format compatible example1 sql the mysql utility You will need this file later Now we have to analyze the rest of the input file Bsqlconv run again using the key Record1 as the beginning of the analysis bsqlconv exampl f Recordl Input file example From Recordl Indexed file example Key Length 20 Record Length 200 No inconsistencies found drop table if exists example create tabl xampl Key CHAR 20 BINARY NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY Fldl CHAR 15 BINARY Fld2 SMALLINT F1d3 FLOAT TYPE InnoDB replace _cet_files Name Type Reclen Keylen Table Key Record values example I 200 20 example Key Fldl Fld2 Fld3 L load data infile c tmp example txt into table example fields terminated by enclosed by lines terminated by iria As there were no inconsistencies we can save the SQL statements in another text file bsgqlconv exampl f Recordl gt example2 sql Now we have finished analyzing the file containing records and found two formats Therefore will require two MySQL tables to move data from this file to the MySQL database We created two SQL scripts to create these
391. tContent call combo addrof ret Clears the contents of the combo box whose reference is passed as the first argument w32CreateCalendarH call father x y width height addrof cal This function is identical to w32CreateCalendar except that you add the initial parameter to specify the window or dialog on which to create the calendar This procedure avoids the need to put the focus on a control and thus improves performance 160 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 call w32CreateProcess command addrof return Run a WINDOWS or DOS command ensuring it will not run the next statement in the program until the command is completed For calls to DOS commands or programs they should proceed by command com c no DOS window appears in the taskbar The return value indicates whether the command was executed successfully Example call w32CreateProcess command com c 900 3 sound addrof ret w32CreateShortCut call program access dir_trabajo comment addrof return Create a shortcut to a program and puts this access to the file Lnk whose path is specified as the second parameter The third parameter specifies the working directory from where the program begins execution Requires CETutils dll file dated 19 03 2002 or later is located in the directory of the program that calls this function or any other directory pointed to by the PATH Ejemplo Rem Determinar la ruta del escrito
392. tation of each of these in submodules eg answers user a fixed sequence or some other method of selection 3 Programs that previously shared COMMON variables should be sited in a list GLOBAL Remember to use the keyword MAT prefix in front of the arrays tables to include in GLOBAL Also make sure that the GLOBAL variables are dimensioned 4 Replace all statements and LINK CHAIN by the CALL statement The precise way in which to do this and the location of the CALL statement depends on the structure of their execution tree 5 Use CLEAR to clear all variables and arrays with undefined COMMON GLOBAL or before entering or exiting the subroutine and not keep loaded during a CALL previous values 6 Modify programs to return to the calling program automatically with a EXIT statement in our example would change EXIT by Chaim menu The EXIT ensure that the control is automatically returned to the program that called 1t using a CALL statement 7 Remember all sentences end with a RETURN GOSUB before it is executed a EXIT but the program passes control to the last statement that is executed GOSUB 124 Chapter 9 Basic subroutines 8 You may continue using CHAIN LINK or RUN between programs main modules In these cases you can still use the COMMON statement to switch between programs variables and arrays If you use a common statement that would be used only in the MAIN module To share these variables COMMON or n
393. ted The return value is 1 for OK 0 for Cancel For example CALL cMessageBoxOkC Print Listing ADDROF result IF result 109 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions Then MsgBox Printing Document ELSE MsgBox The impression has been canceled IfEnd Note MSGBOX judgment has been used to display a message box with only OK button This statement is covered in the Implementation Notes section of the Appendix cMoveApp Window This routine is used to move the application window to a new location The CALL statement syntax is cMoveAppWindow call x y Where X y specifies the positions of the new upper left column and row to the window For example REM moves the upper left corner of the application window to REM display the location of 50 50 CALL cMoveAppWindow 50 50 cMoveDIB Window This routine can be used to move a window to a new location DIB The CALL statement syntax is cMoveDIB Window call handle x y Where handle is the descriptor of the window returned by the call to cOpenDIBWindow Trying to move a window with an invalid handle generate an error X y are the coordinates of the upper left corner of the new position of the window For example REM Move the upper left corner of the window to new REM screen location 50 50 CALL cMoveDIB Window dibwin1 50 50 See cOpenDIB Window function to obtain the necessary information on how to manage the windows DIB to display graphic images
394. tents Establece el valor actual de una caja Combo cAppTitle Agrega el titulo a mostrar de la ventana de Lf aplicaci n cAppWindowInfo Obtiene la localizaci n y tama o de la ES e e ERT ventana de aplicaci n cAppWindowTop Mueve la ventana de aplicaci n a la parte de 2 arriba cAppWindowMax Maximiza la ventana principal de la aplicaci n cAppWindowMin Maximiza la ventana principal de la aplicaci n cAppWindowNormal Restaura el tama o de la ventana principal de la aplicaci n cCbEmpty Limpia el contenido del Clipboard ow cCbPaste_ Pega una cadena de caracteres desde el Clipboard cCheckItem Introduce o borra un bot n de opci n para un elemento de men cChoiceList Visualiza una lista de opciones con elementos clasificados cChoiceListNS Visualiza una lista de opciones con elementos no clasificados cCloseDIBWindow Cierra una ventana DIP cComboAddString A ade un alfanum rico en una caja Combo cComboDelString Elimina un alfanum rico de una caja Combo cCombolnsString Inserta un alfanum rico en una caja Combo cComboSetChoice Establece la selecci n por defecto de una caja Combo e El cCreateProcess Crea un proceso espec fico e cDefaultBin____ Cambia el bot n de comando por defecto cDIBInfo Obtiene el alto y ancho de un grafico DIB lo cDIBWindowInfo Obtiene la localizaci n y tama o de una ventana DIB cDIBWindowTop Desplaza una ventana DIB al principio del al stac
395. that seeks entry 83 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 into a specific format If the user types as alphanumeric ABC will be made three calls to this subroutine one for each character This method can also be used to check the first character of the input and dynamically change always capitalized The program uses a procedure example INVOICE to process the data in the edit control after they enter the field and therefore has lost the focus 1 Use the flag modified to know that an event has occurred of type 1 an event editing control has changed 2 Show the flag modified and conditionally executes its validation routine when data is inserted completely giving an event of type 7 control has lost focus 7 11 5 PrefixInit subroutine The last subroutine is called at the time the dialog is initialized before it appears on screen This is where you can set or change the initial state of any control If you have defined a list box the initial elements should be added here The code below has been caught dlgcet b example dialogue Alphanumeric matrices that should appear in the two boxes listed are defined as local variables and a call is made to cAddLBoxContents to set the current value of the checks for arrays Values of alphanumeric or texts are set in the program CETDEMO Note that a call is made to the box cSetCheck Option 1 is checked or checked when the dialog appears SUB dlgCETInit REM inistart REM Initial
396. the code you want to run before the dialog is created and before you run the subroutine dlgCETInit initialization dialog In the example INVOICE this area is used to size the array of items in the invoice lines THE GOSUB statement transfers control to the routine dlgCET CREATE which is stored in the file HDI Since there are other initialization subroutine calls control event detection display and close dialogue The judgments of the beginning of the subroutine dlgCET CREATE define the number of controls within the global variable prefixCTRLS CNT and dimensions the array of control IDs IDs this is the global variable prefixCRTLS and corresponding properties to be defined by the user will be stored in the global variable prefixPROPS The array of controls contain ID values in the order of focus REM Create the dialog REM Add the controls and initialize the ctrls and PROPS arrays dlgeCET CREATE REM The controls array dilgCETCTRLS CNT 16 DIM dlgCETCTRLS dlgCETCTRLS CNT DIM dlgCETPROBS dlgCETCTRLS CNT 10 Suppose for example that one of the properties of interactive controls to be defined by the user you have decided that you will use to define the type of input that is required for example a positive integer or an integer that must be in the range 1 999 In that case when the user clicks a button to course entry you might look at the array of prefixPROPS properties to see if the data follows the correct
397. the default size Double click the selected item to display the Properties box text control that lets you specify Property Value Effect Text Alphanumeric characters that appear in the dialog box ID Control ID 500 The value associated with the control Fixed Font off the text that appears in a proportional font Left on Text The text will be left justified within the control The default option Text Center will be focused on the text within the control Right on Text The text will be right justified within the control You can specify the alignment of text within the control selecting either left center or right on the control s properties dialog text The default is right justified Only you can select a radio button in a group simultaneously The controls can be simple text or multiple lines By default the control will only have space for one line of eight characters long When you enter a larger alphanumeric control must have been long before the data is displayed Within dlgCET all controls are multiline text To carry out a multi line text simply select a control and extend it The words automatically indented to the next line if available when the text exceeds the length of the control To force a line break enter a two character sequence n when specifying the alphanumeric control properties dialog text Enter t to tab if you want to create a column effect 7 9 Changing the look and how to operate the dialog The appe
398. the dialog using the File Rewrite HDI and B rewrite files HDI B The prefix name will also be used as default files HDI B generated when the save dialogue For example the code for one of the examples dialogues is dlgCET The name of the file on disk is dlgCET b 7 7 3 Type The default option is to create a dialogue that is called from the main program or from another box The dialog box will always remain focused on the Windows application If you specify a display format the format will be used to replace the window of the text based application The maximization property will use the full screen format Otherwise the application window will format starting exiting the screen upper left corner In any case the user can move or resize the format The dialog boxes are only those that can move Note that has a variety of functions w 32 windows if you want to modify the program at the time of execution for example are functions maximization minimization replacement of the screen at runtime etc See the chapter on Windows w 32 Functions for details 7 7 4 Size Besides forcing the main application window to fill the entire screen by setting the maximization you can set explicitly the width and height Note that the default feature size comes with 300 x 200 pixels As you resize the dialog box these sizes will change each other Refer to implementation notes in the appendix to get an idea of how to think in terms of pixel
399. the directory or by clicking on the icon CET w 32 group Aplication Builder Windows menu After loading W32APBLD program will display the typical File File View View and Help FAQ of Windows program menu Although it has several toolbars available most of them are initially disabled Multiple menu commands are also available when creating projects dialogues or use the debugger Only the menu commands that refer to projects covered in this chapter 54 Chapter 5 The W 32 integrated develop environment 5 3 1 The Help menu The command Contents contained displays the help system w 32 The help file is for the user manual w 32 If there are new features in the product the manual and the help file will be updated as soon as possible Please see the notes of any new information that is not included The command Help About help about shows the version and copyright information W32APBLD 5 3 2 The View menu The menu see you have options to show or hide any of the toolbars and the status bar Most toolbars are designed to work with the dialog editor If you change the visibility or position of any toolbar the program will remain in that state the next time it is invoked You can use the command View Settings so that all return to their original position 5 3 3 The File menu The File menu contains commands initially New Open Find in Files and Exit Imprt Template Dialog It also contains the 10
400. the example we set the initial state of the check box called Option 1 to checked The other check boxes were not tested by default The source files chapter explains the program dialog cetdemo b example that checks cleans the two boxes on the right if you check clean the box disable 7 8 2 Combobox Combo boxes provide a list of options as listed boxes but also allow the user to enter an additional element You can define an initial choice as a property of the control For example the user may want to specify the shipping method although as usual may appear by default the user could choose from a list of EA E x other common forms or even introduce new OK There are three styles of combo Cancel boxes depending on whether or not the user can enter a value e i Estilo 1 Estilo 2 Estilo 3 that does not exist in the list The na stilo following dialogue illustrates each type Simple Drop Down Drop Down List Use a a simple box b shutter with scroll bar for the user to Estilo 1 Estilo 2 M Estilo E El Estilo 2 i make an entry as they have an En Estilo 2 E edit control associated with them Or c use a shutter control list that is associated static text A simple combo box control is always visible list box so that the control could be resized to show the number of options that you may want to appear The styles of blinds have a property that allows them to specify the number of lines you want to a
401. the tab order when the mnemonic is pressed 7 9 5 Returning to create a sequence of IDs Each control you create is given a sequential ID value beginning with the first number in the range assigned to the specific type of control For example the edit controls have IDs between 100 and 199 Imagine that you have created three editors with IDs 101 102 and 103 If you delete the control with the ID of 102 the following is assigned the value 104 By the time you finish designing the dialogue you will discover that the values are out of sequence While this has no effect on the mode of dialogue is much easier to make changes to a box that has all of its visual checks ID sorted The command Layout resequence IDs sequences Recreate IDs can be used to rebuild the IDs for individual types or control for all controls based on their order of Tab When do the sequence again IDs the first such control in the tab order will be marked the first available ID value within range and the next control in the tab order will be assigned the next ID etc 75 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 The range of values for different controls IDs are as follows CONTROL N DE IDENTIFICACION Edit 100 199 Command buttons 200 299 Listboxes 300 399 Scrollbars 400 499 Labels 500 599 Frames 600 699 Comboboxes 700 799 Chexkboxes 800 899 Radio buttons 900 999 7 9 6 Screen Resolution This command can be used to create a dialogue for one of the following re
402. the value returned by cCreateProcess control stat Is a value indicating the status of the process Any value other than 998 or 999 indicates that the process is over A value of 998 or 999 means 998 The process is still active 999 The status can not be obtained because the process is not started or not a 32 bit under Windows Note that an application w 32 end by default with the exit code 0 You can get the exit status using the quit statement with a numeric expression in the range 0 98 Except errors that follow values greater than 98 indicate that an error has occurred 100 Process ended with a judgment CHAIN LINK RUN 101 program name passed CHAIN LINK RUN could not be found If your program needs to wait to complete a process be sure to perform a SLEEP or make a call to cCheckMessage otherwise Windows will appear to hang Under Windows the whole system may appear to hang For example REM Create a process to be executed on a minimized and gets its return code REM cCreateProcess call addrof hd1 ats A glpost exe 1 if hdl 0 print process not started goto NoStatus IfEnd stat 998 while stat 998 SLEEP 5 REM or call with any argument cCheckMessage cProcessStat call hdl addrof stat wend print Process Exit Code stat NoStatus If your program needs to wait to complete a process perform a SLEEP Otherwise the window look gets hung Under Windows the complete look that hangs For
403. the variables that contain respectively the x and y coordinates of the upper left and lower right corner of the rectangle noted In addition to returning the coordinates of the rectangle the last 4 parameters are used as input values for the function to specify the coordinates of the upper left corner and lower right corner of the rectangle that delimits the region of dialog on the user you can drag the mouse to draw The interpretation of the rest of the parameters are as follows Father referring to the dialog box The value returned by the call to w32GetParent button a value between 200 and 299 that designates the ID button number real or fictional whose associated section in SUB BtnClick subroutine code is executed when you release the left button press control name of the variable whose value will determine whether to allow the user to click and drag to draw A value of 0 disables and 1 enables Every time you send a notification to the designated button that the user has released the left mouse button control this variable is assigned the value 0 The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init In all dialogues that make up an executable should not be called more than once to the same function in this group Thus to allow the user to define regions in 3 different dialogues that belong to the same project Call w32DefineRegion Call w32DefineRegion2 Call w32DefineRegio
404. this variable to 1 the program is suspended when it detects a stall condition CET BASIC suspends execution only when faced with a judgment or ON ERROR ON LOCK If this variable is set execution of an ON ERROR statement not generate an error when run blocking access statements that direct or indexed files Refer to chapter system error handling the Language Reference Manual B_THPON Activate this variable to one to reverse the default meaning PON POFF as THEOS CET BASIC normally shows low intensity text under MS DOS and Windows environments Jogging B_THPON ensure the variable use of high intensity attribute in the foreground B_THVAL Check this one variable to VAL functions and work as THEOS NBR This will make judgments as having below zero PRINT VAL abc If not used the environment variable this statement would generate a runtime error See the Language Reference Manual CET BASIC to see the standard way of dealing CET VAL functions and NBR Generic Environment Variables B_4DYEAR Load this variable to 1 so that the work functions and DTE DATE with 4 digits B_DATEFORM Charge 2 European or 3 International to change the default date format showing dates in American format MM DD YY The CET BASIC DATEFORM option is used to change the date format in the program B_LANGUAGE Introduces two 2 characters that specify the language to force the function YESNO generate the appropriate text for the languages French FR
405. tility management is a record level full of options Allows a file sort by any field subfield or combination of fields The input file organization can be sequential direct or indexed and can contain both binary and ASCII text records The output file can also be sequential direct and indexed Bsort is fast and efficient and can be used to enhance any application CET For example business programs written in BASIC CET users can sort files and return to BASIC for the show Some of the features are Bsort command parameters can be stored on disk This feature allows to change parameters without recompiling the BASIC program Bsort can jump to the first 255 records from the input file This is especially important when you do not want to include control records or headers with specific program information in the orderly exit The specification of the position of the character field or subfield allows to classify the fixed fields of variable length The quick key classification is implemented 206 Chapter 12 Development Utilities Outputs can write complete records the key field or any portion of the record according to programming needs You can write out any combination of fields or subfields regardless of the order in which the records are classified You can override specific fields within the output record There is the possibility to use up to 32 instructions to select specific records that meet the desired cr
406. tings box functions with the same generic name cComboSetChoice hDlg ID STR Sets the default selection for combo box specified alphanumeric STR cGetCombo hDlg ID ADDROF STR Take user selection combo box specified by ID and introduced into STR This String is empty if no selection has been made cLimitComboText hDlg ID MAX Sets the maximum number of characters that can be entered in the combo box editor specified MAX value cSetCaret hDlg ID POS Sets the cursor position to the associate editor combo box indicated the value of POS The special value POS 0 places the cursor before the first position If the value of POS is greater than the number of characters of the editor will be positioned at the end of the editor Note that this feature should be used with Event subroutine If the cursor is currently located above the control specified by ID the result is unpredictable 7 10 3 Command buttons controls cDefaultBtn hDlg ID NEWDEFAULT Changes the current default command button specified by ID the new value specified by the button ID NEWDEFAULT 7 10 4 Edit controls cGetEditText hDlg ID ADDROF STR Gets the current value of the edit control specified by ID and enters it into the variable STR cGetLimitEditText hDlg ID addrof MAX Used to get the maximum number of characters that can be entered into a text editor control cLimitEditText hDlg ID MAX Limits the number of c
407. to the dialog Value returned by the function w32GetParent rt value of R red text color Valid values are 0 255 Use the valu 1 to indicate that you want to use the default color for that control vt component value V green text color Valid values are 0 255 If parameter rt 1 value is specified in this you can specify the value returned by w32ImageBackgroundn if you want the background color is the same as the tapestry of dialogue at value component blue text color Valid values are 0 255 rf value of R red the background color of the text Valid values are 0 255 Use the value 1 to indicate that you want to use a transparent background for that control vf component value V green background color of the text Valid values are 0 255 af value component blue background color of the text Valid values are 0 255 The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init Example see dialogue project w32SetCtrlColorEdit call father rt vt at rf vf af The call to this function allows you to set the text color and background checks of all dialogue editing The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father reference to the dialog Value returned by the function w32GetParent rt value of R red text color Valid values are 0 255 Use the value 1 to indicate that you want to use the default color for that control vt component value V
408. ton pressed by the user 10K 2 Cancel 3 Cancel 4 Retry 5 Ignore 6 Yes 7 No Example w32InputBox call 0 Do you want to send the material by courier amp CHR 13 CHR 13 amp If so explain the agency Confirm carrier 1 32 256 MRW addrof value addrof ret The execution of this line of code produces the following output Confirme transportista x 7 Desea enviar el material por mensajero Aceptar A Si as es indique la agencia call w32Splash padre imagen mensaje posx posy fuente puntos r g b miliseg addrof retorno Allows a display screen splash application indicating the background image text style color and location as well as the maximum time to be displayed The return will be timeout or Click User Requires CETExt dll file dated 05 05 2005 or later The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father Return value w32GetParent function if text mode programs specify 0 image image file path to be displayed Message Text to be written on the image Posx horizontal position in pixels in which to display the text Posy vertical position in pixels in which to display the text Source the source name to be used to render the text Points Font Size 1 value of R red text color Valid values are 0 255 g component value G green text color Valid values are 0 255 b value of component B blue color of
409. tring TextAt Position String prints a text string from the position indicated Position Position in pixels String String that can contain the following escape characters MV Backslash N newline F end of page VO 9 Source Selection CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj Text position string 2 MACRO PrinterTextAt obj position string 224 Chapter 14 Implementation Notes NewLine is positioned at the beginning of the next line CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj NewLine 0 MACRO PrinterNewLine obj NewLine position is positioned at the beginning of the line in the vertical displacement given Position Integer New vertical CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj NewLine position 1 MACRO PrinterNewPosition obj position NewPage new page CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj NewPage 0 MACRO PrinterNewPage obj Left O aligns the text to the left CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj Left 0 MACRO PrinterLeft obj Right aligns the text to the right CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj Right 0 MACRO PrinterRight 0bj Center centers the text CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj Center 0 MACRO PrinterCenter obj Justify justifies text CALL CALL cetObjectExecute obj Justify 0 MACRO PrinterJustify obj SetPage Left Top Width Height sets the position and size of the virtual page If the virtu
410. ts the text color of the list items lis 1 value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are 0 255 w32ListDeleteltem call lis item addrof ret Removes the item at index in the list item lis Ret value is nonzero if the call has been executed successfully w32ListDeleteAllItems call lis addrof ret Removes all items from the list lis Ret value is nonzero if the call has been executed successfully w32ListDeleteColumn call lis column addrof ret Removes the column column of the list lis Ret value is nonzero if the call has been executed successfully all w32SetFocus hand addrof ret Sets the control referenced by hand as the new control that has the input focus mouse and keyboard The return value ret contain the reference to the control that previously had the focus w32CreateAnimation call x y width height addrof animal Create animated control within the window that has focus ani value will be used in reference to the control w32AnimationOpen call ani file addrof return Opens a file Avi specify complete path is associated to the control ani and displays in its initial state Return is 0 on error call w32AnimationPlay ani addrof retorno Sign uninterrupted playback of avi file associated with the control ani This reproduction is p
411. tura editModified 1 case 5 REM Un control de combo ha cambiado por tanto cambiamos el flag de REM documento REM Solamente nos ocuparemos de Ship Via y no la invoice factura if CMDID 700 then docModified 1 case 7 REM Comprueba el flag para ver si un control de edici n ha cambiado if editModified lt gt 0 REM Efect a un nuevo formato cuando se introduce datos en un REM control definido como fecha o tel fono en las propiedades REM definidas por el usuario i 1 while 1 REM Busca CTRL para que coincida con CMDID if inviCTRLS CMDID if invi PROPS i 8 DATE gosub date format call cSetEditText invi HDLG CMDID date fld ifend if invi PROPS i 8 PHONE gosub phone format call cSetEditText invi HDLG cmdid phone fld ifend break ifend i i 1 wend REM Si los campos de carga o impuestos han cambiado inicialice el flag REM para recalcular el total if CMDID 121 or CMDID 122 gosub calc total call cSetEditText invi HDLG 120 total ifend editModified 0 ifend case 8 REM Si una factura es seleccionada a partir de la caja de listado combo REM entonces accede a ella if CMDID 701 then call cSendBtnClick invi HDLG 206 SUB inv1 Init 90 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 This subroutine is used to initialize various controls The program INVOICE carry the masks used to validate and format the phone field and initialize the combo box list by opening a file an
412. u call this subroutine so you can validate and format user input This subroutine is a SELECT CASE statement that process can be modified for special events The sample program does not use this feature Thus no extra code is included here See the example programs at the end of this chapter SUB dlgCETEvent SELECT CET_EVTYPE REM evtstart REM evtend CEND EXIT These are global variables that are used to process the events Variable Value CMDID The ID of the control that generated the event CET_EVPARM1 depending on the type of event the contents of this variable will be the new position of the scroll bar the next control that will be the focus or the current cursor position CET_EVTYPE The code indicating the type of event Recognizes the following events Exchange Event 1 An edit control has changed or because they entered a character or because he has made a cut or copied to a new value In this case the variable CET_EVPARM1 should have the cursor position 2 A list box control has changed to a new selected item to the box with a simple click 3 A list box control has changed when selecting a new item in the box with a double click 4 The position of the scroll bar is changed The new position is passed in the variable CET_EVPARM1 5 An edit control Combo box changed See the event 1 6 A control has received the input focus The operator selected the new control using a mnemonic the Tab key or clicking
413. uestra texto sobre la barra de estado Introduce un cadena dentro del buffer de entrada Carga una nueva barra de herramienta de mapa de bits Visualiza o quita un cursor tipo reloj de arena Ejecuta una Aplicaci n Windows 8 3 W 32 functions list All built in C language functions including WINDOW CET for use in your applications listed in this apartado N tese that the names of the functions that are available on all products CET begin with the prefix B while the functions solamante that are available on this product starting with c In the table Gen are generally useful functions Dlg The functions to be used with dialogues Mez The functions of several Funci n Operaci n Bchdir Cambia el directorio de trabajo actual oO ae Bcopy Copia el contenido de un fichero a otro AO E Bcreate Crea o limpia un fichero espec fico de datos EE SEs za Becho Muestra los caracteres introducidos mediante funciones LINPUT e INPUT Gen Dig Me Berase Eliminaun fichero determinado e Bfilestat_ Determina si existe un fichero o directorio Bgetowd Lee el directorio actual e Bgeteny___ Lee el contenido de una variable de entorno Bindinfo informaci n sobre un fichero indexado Bkbshift Consigue el estado de letras espec ficas _ e Bnoecho Desactiva el eco de caracteres en funciones LINPUT 118 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions EA EI E Lo cAddComboCon
414. unctions note that Differentiate between upper and lower case is important The function name should be written as it appears in the manual The file names must appear in DOS format or format THEOS CET is a name with a period as a format and converts relevant For example the following names are considered identical cp data nomfich cp data nomfich If the DOS file included in point using the following format Atrans fil This chapter describes some of these routines See Libraries CET BASIC Manual for more information on available features 13 2Routines performed in C The routines currently supported are documented in this chapter As developers will need additional functions they will provide new routines Contact your dealer CET if you do not find any of these routines For your convenience the routines have been classified by their functionality 13 2 1 Functions of files The following functions are provided to avoid having to use operations CSI CSH Any error that generates an error ERROR ON catchable by using the list of errors found in the file brun err 13 2 2 Bcreate Bcreate utility operates as described in the previous chapter Bcreate except running within a BASIC program using a CALL statement instead of a CSI The syntax of this statement is CALL Bcreate create command line Keep in mind the distinction between uppercase and lowercase letters in the same command syntax The function name must be entered exactly
415. urrounded by a blue rectangle If you get the controls you want leave the selection process clicking anywhere outside of the selected controls From this point again begin the process of entrainment Note that when a group of controls that are selected Multiple will appear as the ID of the status bar status The position and size fields indicate the bounding rectangle the smallest rectangle that encloses all controls 7 3 6 Undo and Redo options The dialog editor w 32 remember all editing changes have been made To fix a possible error select Edit Undo command undo or click the Undo button on the Status bar state If you decide you would like to keep the change simply click the button again to make Redo Any operation can go backwards and any operation that may have gone back to again When using this feature later be careful because some operations such as changing properties of controls can not be visually checked but can be remade or can go backwards The number of operations and unpacking are limited only by the size of virtual memory and can grow to a very large amount Saving the file will erase all buffers and unpacking We recommend that you periodically save the file 7 4 Opening an existing dialog File Open command displays a window with the different types of files select the type you want to open There are two files for each dialog you think These files are 1 File extension Idh containing the code that is use
416. use at that point it will read the file Idh to create dialogue Otherwise it would generate a compilation error Note also that if the same variable is defined first as GLOBAL and later as COMMON the compiler will detect a duplicate symbol status and display a notification message it might not be a fatal error The dialog editor w 32 creates four BASIC subroutines for each dialog The value specified in the property dialogue prefix prefix is used as the name of the first subroutine The names of the other three subroutines begin with the same value In our example the prefix property value is dlgCET and therefore the names of the four subroutines will SUB digCET SUB digCETBtnClick SUB digCETEvent SUB dIgCETInit Each of these subroutines are described below 7 11 2 Prefix subroutine This is the subroutine that you need to call from your main program the one containing the statement MAIN whenever you want to show dialog designed In our example the main program CETDEMO invokes the dialog with the following statement Remember that the CALL is sensitive to case sensitive so if you used DLGCET this statement cause an error CALL dlgCET When calling this subroutine will create and show the dialog running using the following code SUB dlgCET REM dlgstart REM dlgend GOSUB dlgCET CREATE EXIT Note that you have a safe area the space between the comments dlgstart REM and REM dlgend to specify
417. utility and such support is accessed by entering the name of the utility without any parameters This information is stored in the file butil msg in the same directory as the executable These utilities are documented in alphabetical order in this chapter 12 2Bcopy Bcopy function can be used to copy or mix all records or a particular group of records from one file to another file The syntax of the command line is Bcopy f desdeclave t hastaclave c count r m ss d reclen i reclen keylen lt source gt lt target gt Where F desdeclave Copy starting from the specified key with hastaclave with a key index of a file or a record of a direct file T hastaclave Copy the source file to but not including the record specified by hastaclave The default option is to stop at the end of the file C count Specifies the number of records copied R Replaces the destination file if it exists The default option is to ask the user whether the existing file should be replaced M Mix the source file records within the target file When using this option and the source file does not exist the program will ask the user about the action to take Create Quit C Q ie Create Exit after choosing the action press Enter to continue Note that this option will not change the parameters of the existing file This feature makes it possible to copy records to a file with a password and or a different record length S
418. utine to position the cursor at the end of the line of text editor The starting point of the calculator screen Tl and as expected the data will be right justified The main program code is very simple main call calc call cForceExit quit The source code file calc b dialog has been modified and is also included in the manual Note that the ON ERROR GOTO statement at the beginning of the subroutine calcBtnClick Since each BASIC subroutine can have its own error handler this code should be included in each subroutine that could cause an error We only have included it in this example The error handling routine is stored in the security area of the end of the program SUB calcBtnClick REM Button Click save area REM binstart on error goto calcerr call cGetCtrlValue calcHDLG 100 ADDROF value value VAL value key CMDID 200 select case key lt 9 REM a numeric key if state Clear OR state Result1 disp str key state Append else if state Append disp value str key ifend ifend case key 10 REM a decimal point if state Clear OR state Result1 disp 0 state Append else if state Append disp value ifend ifend case key 11 REM the change sign key value 0 value disp str value case key 12 REM the equal key select cmd case 13 result num1 value case 14 result num1 value case 15 result num1 value case
419. value of the last parameter of the grid is 1 or 0 The default behavior is that the rows are autoenumeren This function can be used so that it is possible to specify an alternative description for each row by the column indicating w32GridSetText function number 0 that corresponds to the column showing the number or title of each row Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetSelColor call grid r v y Sets the color to be the background of the entire row when you select a cell belonging to it in case it has been determined that shade the entire row for the active cell See w32GridShowHilight 1 value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are 0 255 Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetSelTextColor call grid r v y Sets the color to have the text of the entire row when selecting a cell belonging to it in case it has been determined that shade the entire row for the active cell See w32GridShowHilight r value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are O 255 175 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Requires CET grid dll file dated 23 04 2003 or later w32GridSetText call grid row column text Sets the cell c
420. ve the syntax of the operating system in use Names are also permitted as cust data THEOS format In this case the name will become eg DATA CUST 210 Chapter 12 Development Utilities Bsort seek the input file in the directory specified by the environment variable B_FPATH and then in the current working directory in the same way files are searched in the CET BASIC programs The input file can be any standard sequential CET direct or indexed sequential ISAM Data records can be formatted or not but all records of the file should be similar Pnn Note that the option can be used when necessary ignore control registers that are at the beginning of the file Bsort also allows you to store the sort parameters in a special ASCII sequential file with a Qs When you specify this type of file as input ignoring the rest of line arguments Binary format files A formatted file containing records with alphanumeric fields integer or floating point specified in a special data format Each field starts with a format code indicating its type Records with binary format are supported automatically by CET BASIC if written using the WRITE statement CET Blist command displays log data fields separated by commas Plain ASCII files Plain ASCII files contain records made up of ASCII characters only no field delimiters The entire record is written as a single string The end of the record delimiter is a carriage lt retorno gt or lt linefeed gt
421. w32GetParent call addrof parent Returns a reference to the parent window of the control that has focus Use cSetFocus The typical use of this function is to obtain a reference to the dialogue when the focus is on one of its controls w32ResizeDialog father x y width height addrof return Change the position and size of main window dialog dialog box The first parameter must be the value returned by the function call w32GetParent The following four parameters must be specified in pixels and indicate respectively the horizontal and vertical position of the left corner and the width and height of the dialog box w32ListSetBkColor call lis r v y Sets the background color of the text of the list items lis r value of R red color Valid values are 0 255 v component value V green color Valid values are 0 255 a value component blue color Valid values are 0 255 w32EnableWindow call hand status Active 1 or off state 0 control The first parameter should be the reference value obtained for the control function call w32Create Calendar Progress List Animation When a control is disabled grayed out and can not get the input focus w32FtpGet call FTPSite user key ficheroftp ficherolocal addrof return Gets a file from an ftp site and saves it locally Cetftp dll is needed The return value can be 1 Operation completed successfull
422. which they are found associated function Furthermore it can process any key pressed by the user This instruction implements the same functionality as w32EditENTER provided that notification of events keystrokes done differently to prevent some unwanted effects of change in focus that occurred sometimes when you used the previous version Requires 9 32ma version from which the runtime system to process the event CETW32 special number 15 by which it can detect additional notifications The value of the variable reserved CMDID contain the ID of the control that generated the event The interpretation of the parameters is as follows index integer value between 1 and 99 Hand referring to the edit control Value obtained with w32GetWindow ID between 100 and 199 that designates the control handle key variable name that will contain the value of the key pressed in every moment For a full account of the values of the keys see w32skeybd_event function documentation The usual place where to place the call to this function is the end of the section SUB Init In all dialogues that make up an executable to use a different value for each index edit control So to associate this special processing three edit controls to use functions could be Call w32EditENTEREXx 1 Call w32EditENTEREx 2 176 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Call w32EditENTEREXx 3 Note 1 This function replaces the function group and
423. wise an error occurs To avoid confusion with extension include files B you can rename these files with another extension to distinguish them from files B BASIC code 56 Chapter 5 The W 32 integrated develop environment 3 You can add resource files if you have checked the option create an Empty Project create an empty project If you add these resource files By Rc When you compile the project Build then also automatically compiled and stored these files the compiled Obj and Res into a subdirectory BLD In this case they are added resource files the environment does not back up files renowned system resources as would be usual 4 We recommend that you add the OBJ already compiled when you go to add a library created with the utility CETLINK32 This file can be modified during operation and relinkado compiling and linking Build If a Obj is part of a library the dates of both files should be modified In that case the mitestor oxi environment relinka all files in the library C Files in project test 5 The subprojects to be added as executables These statements are called with type EU Basic Files CHAIN from some source files F B a DE an You can add several files at a time either all at once by selecting them with Shift click or S E RCFie Delete selecting some control click a Ta Compile When a project is open you can create source files edit them and dialog windows A
424. within a GLOBAL list is the same variable in each module that uses it e Jfa variable is not defined within a list of variables GLOBAL or common must be initialized each time you enter or exit a subroutine using a sentence CLEAR e Each variable GLOBAL used in a BASIC subroutine must also be declared in the main program e The GLOBAL must immediately follow the rulings and MAIN SUB 9 7 CLEAR sentence Normally variables are initialized when in a subroutine CLEAR can be used when needed and initialize all variables dimensioned arrays that are not defined as GLOBAL or COMMON The statement syntax is CLEAR The reason to initialize all variables from the fact that this is what normally happens when a CET BASIC program runs for the first time Besides variables in separate programs are different unless they are in COMMON even though they have the same name Programs must take this into account CLEAR program provides for a new BASIC subroutines used to combine a number of separate programs before using statements CHAIN LINK or RUN operate the same way Unless a variable is in a list GLOBAL or common CLEAR the following effect when entering a subroutine e Scalar variables no matrix integer and real are zeroed e Scalar variables are loaded with alphanumeric null string e Arrays are cleaned that is each array is initialized to a one dimensional table with 10 elements each of which is zero or nil de
425. ws is the size required to display 80 25 characters using the current font cStatusText This function can be used to replace the default message of the status bar The syntax is cStatusText call msg Where msg 1s the message string to display For example CALL cStatusText Enter the name of the Customer 114 Chapter 8 W 32 Windows Functions When the status bar is displayed for the first time the default message is Ready Ready Standby The messages for different menu items and buttons on the toolbar will also appear on the status bar When the mouse cursor leaves the menu or toolbar the default message will be displayed again At any time you can change the default message with a call to your program cStatusText to always display the appropriate message to the user cStringInputQ This function can be used to enter a string in the input buffer The result is exactly as if the characters were entered from the keyboard The syntax of this statement is cStringInputQ call string Where chain is the character string to be placed inside the keyboard input queue For example CALL cStringInputQ Hello World See cInputQ function for a similar function that lets you insert characters ESC within the input buffer CToolBar The default toolbar tools w 32 CET Apl Builder has two buttons as shortcuts to quickly access the elements of source selection and menu items Help About This toolbar is defined by the
426. xecution Step mode executes the program step by step making a stop at each line of code Start the program begins execution and debug operation 61 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 Chapter 7 The dialog editor W 32 7 1 Introduction The dialog editor w 32 is a special tool that allows you to create input formats which we refer to as the display format and dialog boxes so that their programs can have a graphical user interface like any other Windows application A display format is a graphical login screen based on pixels used to replace the main window text based for an application The format can be full screen or can be set to the desired size using the dialog editor In any case the window can be moved and resized Any time you are active a display format have full access to the menu bar or the buttons on the toolbar A dialog box is similar to a display format except that the dialog is modal This means that the dialogue box will be closed eg by clicking OK or Cancel to transfer control back to the program that called it and the user can continue working with the rest of the application Menu items for example can not be accessed when a dialogue is still open You can create a variety of dialogues A simple dialog box is one that takes some text messages and waits for the operator to select a button A dialogue box complex could have a large number of controls input fields along with images leaving waiting for the user t
427. y 1 Error in the connection to the ftp site 2 Error processing file Example call w32FtpGet Return w32FtpPut call FTPSite user key ficheroftp ficherolocal addrof return Send a file to an FTP location Cetftp dll is needed The return value can be 145 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 1 Operation completed successfully 1 Error in the connection to the ftp site 2 Error processing file Call w32PrinterDlg addrof context addrof printer addrof or addrof c Presents a dialog box for the user to select a printer print settings and define the orientation and number of copies Requires cetprint dll dll All values of this function are to return and have the following interpretation Context reference to the object printer It will serve as an input parameter in other functions that return properties of the printed page Printer printer name chosen by the user O page orientation specified by the user 1 Vertical 2 Horizontal C number of copies specified by the user Example prt b w32PrinterContext call printer addrof context Create a reference to the context of the specified printer by printer Requires cetprint dll dll Example prt b w32PrinterDeleteContext call context Destroy the reference to the context of the printer It is intended to free up resources Requires cetprint dll dll Example prt b w32PrinterOffsetX cal
428. y interpreted languages CET BASIC provides high performance at runtime The compiler generates code w 32 32 bit highly optimized allowing applications to run natively under Windows 9x Windows NT 2000 and XP CET BASIC is management oriented and includes features such as Sophisticated operations with sequential files direct and indexed working with level locks files and records detecting and controlling locks shared files What makes programming in multiuser environments Supports data types decimal and floating point arithmetic Full support matrix arithmetic and E S files Types type COBOL formats to display fields on screen and print listings Chaining programs to generate structured programs and applications easier to maintain Comprehensive error detection and capture Easy access to operating system commands and liaison with external routines in C BASIC and assembler Full support preprocessor C Supports Multi platafomas under Windows all versions and Linux CET BASIC has support multinational Provides complete control over the numeric and date formats Error messages are stored externally which facilitates translation 2 3 The W 32 environment The compiler takes w 32 CET BASIC conventional applications and links linka within the Windows environment for 32 bit This means that existing programs in CET BASIC can be compiled and executed immediately without modifications and then gradually improve specific characteristic
429. y the file default pif If you change the property Display Usage to Full Screen to Windowed each time you run a DOS program a small window that puts DOS When the program ends this small window disappear If you have a specific program you want to run DOS in full screen from within Windows we suggest you create an icon for the program and use a Pif which specify Full Screen for screen printing For more information on the program icons and files Pif refer to your Microsoft Windows documentation 14 3Current working directory Any file data to open a program w 32 must have specified an absolute path or relative to the current working directory CWD current working directory The current working directory CWD can be specified by two roads When a program is executed from the File Manager the CWD is the directory where the program began to run If the program is executed from the Program Manager after adding the group programs then the CWD is part of the Program Manager Properties You can change or view the properties by selecting the icon from the File menu Included are two routines done in C and Bchdir Bgetcwd to determine and change the CWD CWD See chapter C language routines performed for specific information 14 4The name of a file The file names can be specified in DOS or THEOS format In either of the two formats must maintain proper nomenclature filename A DOS format is recognized when the prefix Y Y
430. yle valorinicial addrof value addrof return Function dialog box which allows the user introduccir text then you get in return as well as an indicator of the button you pressed It runs the following line of code until the input is complete Requires CETExt dll file dated 05 05 2005 or later The interpretation of the parameters is as follows Father Return value w32GetParent function if text mode programs specify 0 Message Message to be presented to the user Title Title of the window Style This parameter is equivalent to the function w32MessageBox Numeric expression that is the sum of values specifying the number and type of buttons that are intended to display the icon style to use and the identity of the default button The possible values are 0 Display OK button only 1 Display OK and Cancel buttons 2 Displays the Abort Retry and Ignore 3 shows the buttons Yes No and Cancel 4 Display Yes and No buttons 5 Display Retry and Cancel buttons 16 shows the critical message icon 32 shows the warning icon question 48 shows the warning icon 64 shows the information message icon 0 First button is default 256 Second button is default 512 Third button is default Valorinicial is the default value that appears in the text box 194 Cap tulo 11 CALLS FROM WIN32 API CET W32 Value Value finally written by the user Return may have one of the following values indicating the but
431. you add the flag at the properties of BASIC type files then the debugger will be enabled on every file extension B This feature is explained in detail in the next chapter The individual properties of a file can crush to global properties For example if you specify the c flag create and linkar files Obj you could use the s flag on the individual properties of the file forcing the build environment to complete the process after creating the files assemblies asm Build the Project Building the project Compiles all programs and generates executables The directory lt project name gt Bld is used to store the compiled files Obj resource Res and the text file with the error messages of the compilation ie w32error file During subsequent compilations W32APBLD check all dependencies and recompile only those files that have changed since the last compilation During this process we will try to delete the executable file If the file can not be deleted because of an access denied which usually means that the file is in use at the time compilation aborted and a message is displayed indicating the reason Note that W32APBLD can not detect changes to files that are referenced in resource files cetwin by cetuser b For example if cetwin b is modified to display a new button in the toolbar or have changed the Bmp or Ico W32APBLD will not notice and you are responsible for opening resource file and save them to W32APBLD recompile
432. you store the project file Prj Once you have created the project a window that displays the files in the project tree Folders tree identifies a file type Basic dialogues RC objects libraries dependencies and subprojects Folders that are preceded by a plus sign indicates that the folder is expanded listing all files that belong to such project click on a minus sign or double click the folder to expand it If you right click on the folder Files in Project then will the global properties El of the project These properties are TRR 1 The name of the executable file zu E 2 Any argument that is passed to the executable 3 Include directories If you are using include files that do not belong to the seas project be sure to indicate your full path absolute path name or relative to the masos project directory in this section Separate multiple paths with a semicolon sign NOTE Include Dirs must be absolute paths E E from the root or relative to the project 4 The way of beginning This will be the working directory of the application directory Muliple drectones are seperated yarns when started running 5 The path of the executable files Store here any way different than the default path project directory executable files It is important to remember that these properties are global to all files of the project If you use the same directory for all include files find more useful to

App Builder CET W/32 User guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents